Manual de Operare-Instalare - Modem SLM5650a

SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
IMPORTANT NOTE: The information contained in this document supersedes all previously
published information regarding this product. This manual is subject to change without prior notice.
Part Number MN-SLM5650A
Revision 8
Errata A
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
RevisetoincludeextendedtemperatureinformationforNetwork
Processoroption
OriginalManualPart
Number/Rev:
MNSLM5650ARev8
ErrataNumber/
PLMDocumentID:
ERSLM5650AEA8
PLMCONumber:
C0027953
Comments:
UpdatedSections:
1.3.3.3.1NetworkProcessor
FASTAccessibleOptions
D.10ExtendedTemperatureOption
Revisedpagesfollow.
ER-SLM5650A-EA8
THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! PLM CO C-0027953
Page 1 of 4
ER-SLM5650A-EA8
Page 2 of 4
ER-SLM5650A-EA8
Page 3 of 4
ER-SLM5650A-EA8
Page 4 of 4
Errata B
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
RevisetoincludeextendedtemperatureinformationforNetwork
Processoroption
OriginalManualPart
Number/Rev:
MNSLM5650ARev8
ErrataNumber/
PLMDocumentID:
ERSLM5650AEB8
PLMCONumber:
C0028075
Comments:
UpdatedpageC41:
Router Ethernet Interface Traffic IP Address and Range command, corrected

typo
Revisedpagesfollow.
ER-SLM5650A-EB8
This document is not subject to revision/update!
CO C-0028075
Revision -
Page 1 of 2
ER-SLM5650A-EB8
This document is not subject to revision/update!
CO C-0028075
Revision -
Page 2 of 2
SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
Part Number MN-SLM5650A
Revision 8
Copyright 2013 Comtech EF Data. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, 480.333.2200, FAX: 480.333.2161
BLANK PAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE ............................................................................................................................................... XXI
About this Manual ........................................................................................................................................... xxi
Conventions and References ............................................................................................................................ xxi
Patents and Trademarks ........................................................................................................................................ xxi
Related Documents ................................................................................................................................................ xxi
Military Standards .................................................................................................................................................. xxi
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ............................................................................................................................. xxii
Examples of Multi-Hazard Formats ....................................................................................................................... xxii
Safety and Compliance .................................................................................................................................... xxii
Electrical Safety and Compliance .......................................................................................................................... xxii
Electrical Installation ............................................................................................................................................ xxiii
Operating Environment ........................................................................................................................................ xxiii
European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive (1999/5/EC)
and EN 301 489-1 ................................................................................................................................................. xxiii
Contact Comtech EF Data ................................................................................................................................ xxv
Warranty Policy ............................................................................................................................................. xxvi
Limitations of Warranty ....................................................................................................................................... xxvi
Exclusive Remedies .............................................................................................................................................. xxvi
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................... 11
1.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 11
1.2
Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 12
1.3
SLM-5650A Features ........................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.1 Physical Description ................................................................................................................................. 14
1.3.2 Physical Features ...................................................................................................................................... 15
1.3.3 Operational Features ............................................................................................................................... 16
1.3.4 Interoperability ...................................................................................................................................... 111
1.4
Summary of Specifications ................................................................................................................ 112
1.4.1 Performance........................................................................................................................................... 114
CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 21

2.1
Unpacking and Inspection ................................................................................................................... 21
2.2
Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 22
2.2.1 Installing the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit .................................................................................... 24
2.2.2 Installing the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set.................................................................................... 26
iii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2.3
Connect External Cables...................................................................................................................... 27
2.4
Configuration...................................................................................................................................... 27
CHAPTER 3. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS A ND PINOUTS .................................................. 31

3.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 31
3.2
IF Connectors ...................................................................................................................................... 33
3.2.1 J2, J4 L-Band IF Interface Connectors....................................................................................................... 33
3.2.2 J11, J3 70/140 MHz IF Interface Connectors ............................................................................................ 33
3.3
Terrestrial Data Connectors ................................................................................................................ 33
3.3.1 J5 Ethernet Remote Control Connector (RJ-45) ....................................................................................... 33
3.3.2 P1 Overhead Data Interface Connector (DB-25M)................................................................................... 34
3.3.3 J6 EIA-530 Connector (DB-25F) ................................................................................................................ 35
3.3.4 J7 HSSI Connector .................................................................................................................................... 36
3.3.5 Interface Option Slot ................................................................................................................................ 37
3.4
Utility Connectors ............................................................................................................................... 37
3.4.1 J1 Ext Ref (External Reference) (Type TNC) ............................................................................................ 37
3.4.2 J8 Alarms Connector (DB-9F) ................................................................................................................... 37
3.4.3 J9 Auxiliary Connector (HD-15F) .............................................................................................................. 38
3.4.4 J10 Remote Connector (DB-9F) ............................................................................................................... 38
3.5
Power/Ground Connectors ................................................................................................................. 39
3.5.1 AC Power Connector ................................................................................................................................ 39
3.5.2 Ground Connector (GND) ......................................................................................................................... 39
CHAPTER 4. UPDATING FIRMWARE ........................................................................................ 41

4.1
Updating Firmware via Internet .......................................................................................................... 41
4.2
About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Archive Formats ............................................................ 41
4.3
Bulk Firmware Update Ethernet FTP Upload Procedure .......................................................................... 43
4.4
Network Processor (NP) Interface Module Update Procedure ............................................................. 45
4.5
TRANSEC Module Update Procedure ................................................................................................. 410
CHAPTER 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION ................................................................................ 51

5.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 51
5.1.1 Keypad with Data Entry Array .................................................................................................................. 52
5.1.2 LED Indicators........................................................................................................................................... 53
5.1.3 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) .......................................................................................................... 54
5.2
SELECT: (Main) Menu .......................................................................................................................... 55
5.2.1 SELECT (Main) Menu Matrix..................................................................................................................... 56
iv

Table of Contents
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Navigating the Menu Screens .................................................................................................................. 57

SELECT: Configure .................................................................................................................................... 58
SELECT: Monitor ..................................................................................................................................... 534
SELECT: Test ........................................................................................................................................... 540
SELECT: Save/Load ................................................................................................................................. 542
SELECT: Utility ........................................................................................................................................ 543
CHAPTER 6. ETHERNET-BASED MANAGEMENT .................................................................. 61

6.1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 61
6.2
Ethernet Management Interface Protocols .......................................................................................... 61
6.2.1 Ethernet-Based Management via Secure Management Interfaces ......................................................... 62
6.3
HTTP/HTTPS (Web Server) Interfaces .................................................................................................. 64
6.4
SNMP Interface................................................................................................................................... 65
6.4.1 Management Information Base (MIB) Files ............................................................................................. 65
6.4.2 SNMP Community Strings ........................................................................................................................ 65
6.4.3 SNMP Traps .............................................................................................................................................. 66
6.4.4 SNMPv3 (NP Interface Only) .................................................................................................................... 67
6.5
Telnet Interface .................................................................................................................................. 68
6.5.1 Telnet Operation via HyperTerminal........................................................................................................ 69
6.6
SSH (Secure Shell) Interface .............................................................................................................. 610
CHAPTER 7. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE ...................................................................... 71

7.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 71
7.2
Base Modem HTTP Interface Introduction ........................................................................................... 71
7.2.1 HTTP Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces .............................................................. 71
7.2.2 User Login................................................................................................................................................. 72
7.2.3 HTTP Interface Operational Features .................................................................................................... 73
7.2.4 HTTP Interface Menu Tree ....................................................................................................................... 74
7.3
SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface Page Descriptions ................................................................ 75
7.3.1 Home pages.............................................................................................................................................. 75
7.3.2 Admin pages ............................................................................................................................................. 78
7.3.3 Config Mdm (Modem Configuration) pages .......................................................................................... 710
7.3.4 Stats (Statistics) pages ............................................................................................................................ 715
7.3.5 Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info ........................................................................................................... 722
CHAPTER 8. NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE ..................................................... 81

8.1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 81
8.2
Functional Hardware Description ........................................................................................................ 82
8.2.1 Connector Pinout ..................................................................................................................................... 83

Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.3
Interface Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 83
8.3.1 Physical Description ................................................................................................................................. 83
8.3.2 General Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 83
8.4
NP Interface Module Removal and Installation.................................................................................... 84
8.4.1 NP Interface Module Removal Procedure................................................................................................ 84
8.4.2 NP Interface Module Installation Procedure ........................................................................................... 84
8.5
BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode ............................................................................................. 85
8.6
Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface ................................................................................... 85
8.6.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Introduction ......................................................................................................... 85
8.6.2 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces .................................................. 85
8.6.3 User Login................................................................................................................................................. 87
8.6.4 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Operational Features ........................................................................................ 88
8.6.5 HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree ........................................................................................................................... 88
8.6.6 HTTP/HTTPS Page Descriptions ................................................................................................................ 89
CHAPTER 9. NP INTERFACE TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION ............................................. 91

9.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 91
9.1.1 Telnet User Access ................................................................................................................................... 92
9.1.2 SSH (Secure Shell) User Access................................................................................................................. 92
9.2
Command Line Interface Pages ........................................................................................................... 93
9.2.1 CLI Menu System Parallel Functionality ................................................................................................ 93
9.2.2 CLI Menu Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features ....................................................... 93
9.2.3 Main Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 95
9.2.4 Administration Menu page (A) ................................................................................................................. 96
9.2.5 Satellite Modem Configuration (Modem Menu) page (M) .................................................................... 914
9.2.6 LAN Menu page (N) ................................................................................................................................ 921
9.2.7 WAN Menu page (W) ............................................................................................................................. 925
9.2.8 Routing Table page (R) ........................................................................................................................... 926
9.2.9 OSPF Configuration page (F) .................................................................................................................. 927
9.2.10
IGMP Configuration page (I) .............................................................................................................. 928
9.2.11
Vipersat Configuration page (V) ........................................................................................................ 929
9.2.12
Redundancy Configuration page (E) .................................................................................................. 930
9.2.13
Operations & Maintenance page (O) ................................................................................................. 931
CHAPTER 10. TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE .................................................... 101

10.1
TRANSEC Module Overview .............................................................................................................. 101
10.2
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface .................................................................................................... 102
10.3
Accessing the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface ............................................................................... 102
10.3.1
HTTPS Interface Operational Features............................................................................................ 103
10.3.2
HTTPS Interface Menu Tree ............................................................................................................... 103
10.4
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface Page Descriptions ........................................................................ 104
10.4.1
Home pages ....................................................................................................................................... 104
vi

Table of Contents
10.4.2
10.4.3
10.4.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin (Administrative) pages ........................................................................................................... 106

Stats (Statistics) | Module Status .................................................................................................... 1013
Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info ..................................................................................................... 1014
CHAPTER 11. TRANSEC MODULE SSH CLI OPERATION .................................................. 111

11.1
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 111
11.1.1
SSH (Secure Shell) User Access .......................................................................................................... 112
11.2
Command Line Interface (CLI) Pages.................................................................................................. 113
11.2.1
CLI Menu System Parallel Functionality .......................................................................................... 113
11.2.2
CLI Menu Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features ................................................. 113
11.2.3
Main Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 115
11.2.4
Configuration page [C] ....................................................................................................................... 116
11.2.5
Module Status page [M] .................................................................................................................. 1113
11.2.6
Event Log [E] .................................................................................................................................... 1114
11.2.7
Unit Info [ I ] ..................................................................................................................................... 1115
11.2.8
Comtech EF Data Information page [Z] ........................................................................................... 1116
CHAPTER 12. 10/100/1000 BASET (GBE) INTERFACE ................................................. 121

12.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 121
12.2
Physical Description .......................................................................................................................... 121
12.2.1
Connector Pinout ............................................................................................................................... 122
12.3
General Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 123
12.4
10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module Removal and Installation ...................................................... 125
12.4.1
GbE Interface Module Removal Procedure ....................................................................................... 125
12.4.2
GbE Interface Module Installation Procedure ................................................................................... 125
CHAPTER 13. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 INTERFACE ................................................................ 131

13.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 131
13.2
13.2.1
Connector Pinouts ............................................................................................................................. 133
13.3
Summary of Specifications ................................................................................................................ 134
13.4
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal and Installation ........................................................ 135
13.4.1
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal Procedure............................................................... 135
13.4.2
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Installation Procedure........................................................... 135
CHAPTER 14. LOW VOLTAGE DIFFERENTIAL (LVDS) INTERFACE ............................. 141

14.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 141
14.2
vii

Table of Contents
14.2.1
14.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
J1 Connector Pinout ....................................................................................................................... 143
General Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 144
14.4
LVDS Interface Module Removal and Installation ................................................................................... 145
14.4.1
LVDS Interface Module Removal Procedure...................................................................................... 145
14.4.2
LVDS Interface Module Installation Procedure.................................................................................. 145
CHAPTER 15. DOUBLETALK CARRIER-IN-CARRIER OPTION ....................................... 151

15.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 151
15.2
What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier? .............................................................................................. 151
15.3
Application Requirements................................................................................................................. 152
15.3.1
Operational Recommendations ......................................................................................................... 154
15.4
System Functionality and Operational Considerations ....................................................................... 155
15.4.1
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Cancellation Process........................................................................... 157
15.4.2
Margin Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 159
15.4.3
Carrier-in-Carrier Latency .................................................................................................................. 159
15.4.4
Carrier-in-Carrier and Adaptive Coding and Modulation................................................................... 159
15.4.5
Carrier-in-Carrier Link Design ............................................................................................................ 159
15.4.6
Carrier-in-Carrier Commissioning and Deployment ........................................................................ 1515
15.4.7
Validating Carrier-in-Carrier Performance ....................................................................................... 1516
15.5
Operational References .................................................................................................................. 1517
15.5.1
Carrier-in-Carrier Link Budget Calculation ....................................................................................... 1517
15.5.2
Estimating PSD Ratio........................................................................................................................ 1518
15.6
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications .................................................................................... 1520
15.7
Carrier-in-Carrier Summary ............................................................................................................. 1520
15.8
Glossary.......................................................................................................................................... 1521
APPENDIX A. TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................... A1

A.1
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... A1
A.2
System Checkout ............................................................................................................................... A1
A.2.1 Interface Checkout .................................................................................................................................. A2
A.2.2 Modulator Checkout ............................................................................................................................... A3
A.2.3 Demodulator Checkout ........................................................................................................................... A6
A.3
Fault Isolation .................................................................................................................................... A9
A.4
System Faults/Alarms ...................................................................................................................... A10
A.5
LED Display and Description ............................................................................................................. A12
viii

Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
APPENDIX B. OPERATIONS REFERENCE ................................................................................ B1

B.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ B1
B.2
Modes ................................................................................................................................................ B1
B.2.1 OM-73 Mode ........................................................................................................................................... B1
B.2.2 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode ........................................................................................................................ B2
B.2.3 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode Sequential ................................................................................................... B3
B.2.4 IESS-308 Mode Standard Higher Rates ................................................................................................ B4
B.2.5 IESS-308 Mode Extended ..................................................................................................................... B6
B.2.6 IESS-309 Mode Extended (Closed Network) ........................................................................................ B7
B.2.7 IESS-310 Mode Extended Rates ........................................................................................................... B7
B.2.8 Turbo Code Mode ................................................................................................................................... B7
B.2.9 16-QAM Mode ........................................................................................................................................ B8
B.2.10
AUPC Mode......................................................................................................................................... B9
B.2.11
AUPC Mode Sequential .................................................................................................................... B9
B.2.12
AUPC Mode Turbo ......................................................................................................................... B10
B.2.13
LDPC Mode Ultra Low Latency (ULL).............................................................................................. B10
B.2.14
LDPC Mode Low Latency (LL) ......................................................................................................... B10
B.2.15
LDPC Mode High Performance (HP) ............................................................................................... B11
B.3
Clocking Options ............................................................................................................................... B11
B.3.1 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master .............................................................................................................. B11
B.3.2 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave.................................................................................................................. B13
B.4
Buffering .......................................................................................................................................... B15
B.4.1 Buffer Size ............................................................................................................................................. B16
APPENDIX C. REMOTE CONTROL .............................................................................................. C1

C.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ C1
C.2
EIA-485 ............................................................................................................................................... C1
C.3
EIA-232 ............................................................................................................................................... C2
C.4
Basic Protocol ..................................................................................................................................... C2
C.5
Packet Structure ................................................................................................................................. C3
C.5.1 Start of Packet ..........................................................................................................................................C3
C.5.2 Target Address .........................................................................................................................................C4
C.5.3 Address Delimiter .....................................................................................................................................C4
C.5.4 Instruction Code .......................................................................................................................................C4
C.5.5 Instruction Code Qualifier ........................................................................................................................C4
C.5.6 Optional Message Arguments ..................................................................................................................C5
C.5.7 End Of Packet ...........................................................................................................................................C5
C.6
Remote Commands / Queries ............................................................................................................. C6
C.6.1 Initial Setup Priority Commands / Queries ............................................................................................C7
C.6.2 Modulator (Tx) Commands / Queries ......................................................................................................C8
C.6.3 Demodulator (Rx) Commands / Queries ............................................................................................... C14
ix

Table of Contents
C.6.4
C.6.5
C.6.6
C.6.7
C.6.8
C.6.9
C.6.10
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem, Unit Commands / Queries ...................................................................................................... C21

Bulk Configuration Commands / Queries.............................................................................................. C29
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands / Queries ........................................................... C32
G.703 Interface Commands / Queries................................................................................................... C37
Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands / Queries .................................................................................. C39
Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands / Queries...................................................................... C40
TRANSEC Interface Commands / Queries ......................................................................................... C42
APPENDIX D. MODEM OPTIONS ............................................................................................... D1

D.1
Forward Error Correction Options ...................................................................................................... D1
D.2
Viterbi ............................................................................................................................................... D2
D.3
Reed-Solomon Outer Codec ............................................................................................................... D3
D.4
Closed Network Modes ...................................................................................................................... D4
D.5
Trellis Coding (FAST Option) ............................................................................................................... D5
D.6
Turbo Product Codec (FAST Option) ................................................................................................... D6
D.7
Sequential (FAST Option) ................................................................................................................... D7
D.8
Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding ............................................................................................. D8
D.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ D8
D.8.2 LDPC versus TPC ...................................................................................................................................... D9
D.9
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) ......................................................................................... D10
D.10
Extended Temperature Option ......................................................................................................... D10
APPENDIX E. VIPERSAT NETWORK APPLICATION EXAMPLES....................................... E1

E.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ E1
E.2
OSPFv2 in a Shared Outbound Satellite Network ................................................................................. E1
E.2.1 Shared Outbound Satellite Network Overview ........................................................................................ E1
E.2.2 OSPF Basics............................................................................................................................................... E2
E.2.3 OSPF Challenges ....................................................................................................................................... E2
E.2.4 OSPF Maritime Use Cases ........................................................................................................................ E3
E.2.5 OSPF Deployment Solution ...................................................................................................................... E5
E.2.6 OSPFv2 Summary ..................................................................................................................................... E7
E.3
Network Processor (NP) Interface BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode ......................................... E8
E.3.1 BPM Mode Functional Description .......................................................................................................... E8
E.3.2 BPM Mode Configuration ...................................................................................................................... E10
E.3.3 BPM Mode in Hub Data Traffic Networks .............................................................................................. E11
E.3.4 Dynamic Hub Demodulators in a Multiple TDM Hubs Configuration .................................................... E13
E.3.5 Remote Data Traffic Handling ................................................................................................................ E14

Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
TABLES
Table 1-1. Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements ............................................................. 114
Table 1-2. Doppler Requirements ........................................................................................................... 114
Table 1-3. Viterbi Decoder BER .............................................................................................................. 117
Table 1-4. BSPK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi with Reed-Solomon Decoder BER Performance .................... 117
Table 1-5. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder BER Performance ............................................................................. 117
Table 1-6. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance............................................. 118
Table 1-7. 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance ......................................... 118
Table 1-8. TPC Decoder BER Performance ........................................................................................... 118
Table 1-9. Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon BER Performance ................................ 119
Table 1-10. Acceptable ACI Degradation with Spacing Factor of 1.2 .................................................... 120
Table 3-1. SLM-5650A Rear Panel Connectors ....................................................................................... 32
Table 7-1. Summary of Attributes for Router Stats Pages...................................................................... 720
Table 8-1. LAN Interface Connector Pinout (Typical) ............................................................................... 83
Table 10-1. Event Log Message Types ................................................................................................ 1012
Table 12-1. Connector Pinout ................................................................................................................. 122
Table 13-1. J1 | BAL DATA Connector Pinout .................................................................................... 133
Table 13-2. 75 BNC Connectors (G.703 Unbalanced) ........................................................................ 133
Table 14-1. J1 Connector Pinout .......................................................................................................... 143
Table 15-1. Spectral Efficiency using DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier ...................................................... 157
Table A-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0 Chart .......................................................................................A4
Table A-2. SLM-5650A Fault Tree ..........................................................................................................A10
Table D-1. Viterbi Decoding Summary .................................................................................................... D2
Table D-2. Open Network Modes ............................................................................................................ D4
Table D-3. Concatenated RS Coding Summary ...................................................................................... D4
Table D-4. 8PSK/TCM Coding Summary ................................................................................................ D5
Table D-5. Available TPC Modes ............................................................................................................. D6
Table D-6. Sequential Decoding Summary.............................................................................................. D7
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem .................................................................................................. 11
Figure 1-2. SLM-5650A Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 12
Figure 1-3. SLM-5650A Dimensional Envelope ........................................................................................ 14
Figure 1-4. SLM-5650A Front Panel View ................................................................................................ 15
Figure 1-5. SLM-5650A Rear Panel View ................................................................................................. 15
Figure 2-1. Unpacking and Inspecting the SLM-5650A ............................................................................ 21
Figure 2-2. SLM-5650A Rack Enclosure Installation Example ................................................................. 23
Figure 2-3. Optional Rear Support Bracket Installation ............................................................................ 25
Figure 2-4. Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set Installation .................................................................. 26
Figure 3-1. SLM-5650A Rear Panel ............................................................................................................ 31
Figure 4-1. Firmware Update via Internet ................................................................................................. 42
Figure 5-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Front Panel .............................................................................. 51
Figure 7-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Home page .............................................................................. 75
Figure 7-2. Home | Contact page .............................................................................................................. 76
Figure 7-3. Home | Support page.............................................................................................................. 77
Figure 7-4. Admin | Access page .............................................................................................................. 78
Figure 7-5. Admin | Remote page ............................................................................................................. 79
Figure 7-6. Config Mdm | Modem Config (Page 1) ................................................................................. 710
Figure 7-7. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities (Page 2) ................................................................................ 711
xi

Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 7-8. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities (Page 3) ................................................................................ 712

Figure 7-9. Config Mdm | Spreading page .............................................................................................. 713
Figure 7-10. Config Mdm | Automatic Uplink Power Control page ......................................................... 714
Figure 7-11. Stats | Modem Status page ................................................................................................ 715
Figure 7-12. Stats | Modem Event Log page .......................................................................................... 716
Figure 7-13. Stats | Modem Statistics Log page ..................................................................................... 717
Figure 7-14. Stats | Configuration Change Log page ............................................................................. 718
Figure 7-15. Stats | Router Statistics page ............................................................................................. 719
Figure 7-16. Stats | Modem Ethernet Statistics page ............................................................................. 721
Figure 7-17. Maint | Unit Information page ............................................................................................. 722
Figure 8-1. Network Processor (NP) Interface Module ............................................................................. 81
Figure 8-2. NP Interface Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 82
Figure 8-3. Info | Home Page .................................................................................................................... 89
Figure 8-4. Info | Contact page ............................................................................................................... 810
Figure 8-5. Info | Logoff page .................................................................................................................. 810
Figure 8-6. Admin | Vipersat Mode page ................................................................................................ 811
Figure 8-7. Admin | FAST Features page ............................................................................................... 813
Figure 8-8. Admin | Security (Management Security) page .................................................................... 814
Figure 8-9. Admin | SNMP page ............................................................................................................. 816
Figure 8-10. Admin | Upgrade page ........................................................................................................ 817
Figure 8-11. Admin | Defaults (Factory Default Configurations) page .................................................... 818
Figure 8-12. Admin | Time (Date & Time) page ...................................................................................... 819
Figure 8-13. Admin | Event Log page ..................................................................................................... 820
Figure 8-14. Admin | Reboot page .......................................................................................................... 821
Figure 8-15. Modem | Config (Modem Configuration) page ................................................................... 823
Figure 8-16. Modem | Monitor (Modem Status) page ............................................................................. 828
Figure 8-17. Modem |Events (Modem Events Log) page ....................................................................... 829
Figure 8-18. Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) page ..................................................................... 830
Figure 8-19. Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities) page ............................................................................... 831
Figure 8-20. LAN | Interface page ........................................................................................................... 832
Figure 8-21. LAN | Ethernet Ports page .................................................................................................. 835
Figure 8-22. LAN | ARP page ................................................................................................................. 836
Figure 8-23. WAN | Quality of Service page ........................................................................................... 837
Figure 8-24. WAN | Quality of Service Statistics page............................................................................ 838
Figure 8-25. WAN | Loopback Test page ................................................................................................ 839
Figure 8-26. Routing | Routes page ........................................................................................................ 840
Figure 8-27. Routing | OSPF page.......................................................................................................... 841
Figure 8-28. Routing | IGMP page .......................................................................................................... 843
Figure 8-29. Stats | Ethernet Tx Statistics page ..................................................................................... 844
Figure 8-30. Stats | Ethernet Rx Statistics page ..................................................................................... 846
Figure 8-31. Stats | IP Statistics page ..................................................................................................... 848
Figure 8-32. Stats | WAN Statistics page ................................................................................................ 851
Figure 8-33. Stats | Clear All Statistics page .......................................................................................... 853
Figure 8-34. Vipersat pages .................................................................................................................... 854
Figure 8-35. Redundancy page .............................................................................................................. 855
Figure 8-36. Save page........................................................................................................................... 856
Figure 10-1. Home | Home page............................................................................................................. 104
Figure 10-2. Home | Contact page .......................................................................................................... 105
Figure 10-3. Admin | Config page ........................................................................................................... 106
Figure 10-4. Admin | Update page ........................................................................................................ 1010
Figure 10-5. Admin | Event page .......................................................................................................... 1011
Figure 10-6. Stats | Module Status page ............................................................................................. 1013
Figure 10-7. Maint | Unit Info page ...................................................................................................... 1014
Figure 12-1. 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module (AS/11985) .................................................. 121
Figure 12-2. GbE Interface Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................... 122
xii

Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 13-1. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (AS/11579 shown) ................................................. 131
Figure 13-2. G.703T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Functional Block Diagram ................................................... 132
Figure 14-1. Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (PL/12272-1)....................................... 141
Figure 14-2. LVDS Interface Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................... 142
Figure 155-1. Conceptual Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 153
Figure 15-2. Conventional FDMA Link .................................................................................................... 155
Figure 15-3. Same Link Using SLM-5650A and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier ...................................... 156
Figure 15-4. Duplex Link Optimization .................................................................................................... 156
Figure 15-5. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Signals ................................................................................ 158
Figure 15-6. Carrier-in-Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram .......................................................... 158
Figure A-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup ......................................................................................................A2
Figure A-2. Typical Output Spectrum With Noise ..................................................................................A5
Figure A-3. Typical Output Spectrum Without Noise .............................................................................A5
Figure A-4. Typical Constellation Patterns With Noise ..........................................................................A7
Figure A-5. Typical Constellation Patterns Without Noise ....................................................................A8
Figure B-1. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram ................................................................B12
Figure B-2. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram ..................................................................B14
Figure B-3. Clock Slip .............................................................................................................................B15
Figure B-4. Doppler Shift.........................................................................................................................B16
Figure D-1. TPC & LDPC Modes Performance (Relative to Shannon Limit) ........................................... D9
Figure E-1. Satellite Shared Outbound Network .......................................................................................E2
Figure E-2. OSPF Support at Shore .........................................................................................................E3
Figure E-3. OSPF Support at Sea ............................................................................................................E4
Figure E-4. OSPF Laboratory Test Network .............................................................................................E5
Figure E-5. OSPF Test Solution ...............................................................................................................E6
Figure E-6. Ethernet Port Configuration in BPM Mode .............................................................................E8
Figure E-7. Hub Data Traffic Network .....................................................................................................E11
Figure E-8. Hub VLAN Configuration HTTP/HTTPS Interface Pages ....................................................E13
Figure E-9. Remote (Spoke) Data Traffic Network .................................................................................E14
xiii

Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
xiv
PREFACE
About this Manual
This manual describes the installation and operation for the Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem. This is a document intended for the persons responsible for the operation and
maintenance of the SLM-5650A.
Conventions and References

Patents and Trademarks
See all of Comtech EF Data's Patents and Patents Pending at http://patents.comtechefdata.com.
Comtech EF Data acknowledges that all trademarks are the property of the trademark owners.
DoubleTalk is licensed from Raytheon Applied Signal Technology.

DoubleTalk is a registered trademark of Raytheon Applied Signal Technology.
Carrier-in-Carrier is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data.
Related Documents
The following documents are referenced in this manual:
Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, Electrical Characteristics of Digital

Interface Circuits
Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-165A, Interoperability and Performance
Standards for SHF Satellite Communications PSK Modems (FDMA Operation) (dated
November 2005)
INTELSAT Earth Station Standards IESS-308, -309, -310, and -315
EUTELSAT SMS
Military Standards
References to MIL-STD-188 apply to the 114A series (i.e., MIL-STD-188-114A), which
provides electrical and functional characteristics of the unbalanced and balanced voltage digital
interface circuits applicable to both long haul and tactical communications. Specifically, these
references apply to the MIL-STD-188-114A electrical characteristics for a balanced voltage
digital interface circuit, Type 1 generator, for the full range of data rates. For more information,
refer to the Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, Electrical Characteristics of
Digital Interface Circuits.
xxi

Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

A WARNING gives information about a possible hazard that MAY CAUSE DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY.
A CAUTION gives information about a possible hazard that MAY CAUSE INJURY
or PROPERTY DAMAGE.
A NOTE gives important information about a task or the equipment.
A REFERENCE directs the reader to more information.
Examples of Multi-Hazard Formats
Safety and Compliance

Electrical Safety and Compliance
The SLM-5650A complies with the EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment
(Including Electrical Business Machines) safety standard.
If the unit is operated in a vehicle or movable installation, make sure the unit is
stable. Otherwise, EN 60950 safety is not guaranteed.
xxii

Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Electrical Installation
Connect the unit to a power system that has separate ground, line and neutral
conductors. Do not connect the unit without a direct connection to ground.
Operating Environment
Do not operate the unit in any of these extreme operating conditions:
Ambient temperatures less than 0 C (32 F) or more than 50 C (122 F).
(extended temperature option -32 to 50 C)
Precipitation, condensation, or humid atmospheres of more than 95% relative
humidity.
Unpressurized altitudes of more than 2000 metres (6561.7 feet).
Excessive dust.
Flammable gases.
Corrosive or explosive atmospheres.
European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal

Equipment (R&TTE) Directive (1999/5/EC) and EN 301 489-1
Independent testing verifies that the unit complies with the European Union R&TTE Directive, its
reference to EN 301 489-1 (Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters [ERM];
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility [EMC] standard for radio equipment and services, Part 1:
Common technical requirements), and the Declarations of Conformity for the applicable
directives, standards, and practices that follow:
European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive

(2004/108/EC)
Emissions: EN 55022 Class B Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference

Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.
Immunity: EN 55024 Information Technology Equipment: Immunity Characteristics,
Limits, and Methods of Measurement.
EN 61000-3-2 Harmonic Currents Emission
EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker.
Federal Communications Commission Federal Code of Regulation FCC Part 15, Subpart B.
To make sure that the unit complies with these standards, obey these
instructions:
xxiii

Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Use coaxial cable that is of good quality for connections to the L-Band Type N Rx (receive)
female connector.
Use Type 'D' connectors that have back-shells with continuous metallic shielding.
Type D cabling must have a continuous outer shield (either foil or braid, or both). The
shield must be bonded to the back-shell.
Operate the unit with its cover on at all times.
European Union Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (2006/95/EC)

Symbol
Description
<HAR>
Type of power cord required for use in the European Community.
CAUTION: Double-pole/Neutral Fusing

ACHTUNG: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung
International Symbols
Symbol
Definition
Symbol
Definition
Alternating Current
Protective Earth
Fuse
Chassis Ground
European Union RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC)

This unit satisfies (with exemptions) the requirements specified in the European Union Directive
on the Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EU RoHS,
Directive 2002/95/EC).
European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive

(91/263/EEC)
In accordance with the European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive
91/263/EEC, the unit should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications
Network.
CE Mark
Comtech EF Data declares that the unit meets the necessary requirements for the CE Mark.
xxiv

Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Contact Comtech EF Data

Contact Comtech EF Data during normal business hours:
Monday through Friday, 8 A.M. to 5 P.M Mountain Standard Time (MST)
Be prepared to provide the product model and serial numbers.
For:
SLM-5650A
Technical
Support and
Service
Comtech EF
Data Web Site
Contact:
Telephone
+1.480.333.4357
Email
cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com
Fax
+1.480.333.2500
Main Page
http://www.comtechefdata.com
Customer and
Technical Support
http://www.comtechefdata.com/support.asp
RMA
(Return Material
Authorization)
http://www.comtechefdata.com/rmaform.asp
Comtech EF Data Main Number
+1.480.333.2200
Mailing Address
2114 West 7th Street

Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA
xxv

Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Warranty Policy
Comtech EF Data products are warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a specific period from the
date of shipment, and this period varies by product. In most cases, the warranty period is two years. During the
warranty period, Comtech EF Data will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective. Repairs are
warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or a 90 day extended warranty, whichever is longer. Contact
Comtech EF Data for the warranty period specific to the product purchased.
For equipment under warranty, the owner is responsible for freight to Comtech EF Data and all related customs, taxes,
tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the
factory to the owner. Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air, Express, Surface) as
the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data.
All equipment returned for warranty repair must have a valid RMA number issued prior to return and be marked clearly
on the return packaging. Comtech EF Data strongly recommends all equipment be returned in its original packaging.
Comtech EF Data Corporations obligations under this warranty are limited to repair or replacement of failed parts, and
the return shipment to the buyer of the repaired or replaced parts.
Limitations of Warranty
The warranty does not apply to any part of a product that has been installed, altered, repaired, or misused in any way
that, in the opinion of Comtech EF Data Corporation, would affect the reliability or detracts from the performance of
any part of the product, or is damaged as the result of use in a way or with equipment that had not been previously
approved by Comtech EF Data Corporation.
The warranty does not apply to any product or parts thereof where the serial number or the serial number of any of its
parts has been altered, defaced, or removed.
The warranty does not cover damage or loss incurred in transportation of the product.
The warranty does not cover replacement or repair necessitated by loss or damage from any cause beyond the control
of Comtech EF Data Corporation, such as lightning or other natural and weather related events or wartime
environments.
The warranty does not cover any labor involved in the removal and or reinstallation of warranted equipment or parts on
site, or any labor required to diagnose the necessity for repair or replacement.
The warranty excludes any responsibility by Comtech EF Data Corporation for incidental or consequential damages
arising from the use of the equipment or products, or for any inability to use them either separate from or in
combination with any other equipment or products.
Exclusive Remedies
Comtech EF Data Corporations warranty, as stated is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed, implied, or statutory,
including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The buyer shall pass on to any purchaser,
lessee, or other user of Comtech EF Data Corporations products, the aforementioned warranty, and shall indemnify
and hold harmless Comtech EF Data Corporation from any claims or liability of such purchaser, lessee, or user based
upon allegations that the buyer, its agents, or employees have made additional warranties or representations as to
product preference or use.
The remedies provided herein are the buyers sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech EF Data shall not be liable for any
direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
xxvi
Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
Overview
Figure 1-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem (Figure 1-1) satisfies the requirements for government and
military communications system applications that require state-of-the-art modulation and coding
techniques to optimize satellite transponder bandwidth usage, while retaining backward
compatibility.
The SLM-5650A:
Supports baseband data rates up to 155.52 Mbps, and its flexible modulation and
Forward Error Correction (FEC) capabilities ensure that the throughput and BER over
the satellite is optimized.
Is compliant with the provisions of Department of Defense (DoD) Standard MIL-STD188-165A, Interoperability of SHF Satellite Communications PSK Modems (Frequency
Division Multiple Access [FDMA] Operation).
Is fully interoperable with legacy OM-73 modems and other Government owned
Commercial Off-the-Shelf (COTS) and International Telecommunications Satellite
Organization (Intelsat) compatible PSK modems.
Can be controlled and monitored from a variety of platforms, including its own front
panel controls and indicators, a co-located Personal Computer (PC), and remote control
systems such as the Vipersat Network Management System (VNMS).
11

Introduction
1.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
Functional Description
Figure 1-2. SLM-5650A Block Diagram

Figure 1-2 depicts the functional block diagram for the SLM-5650A. The modem has been
designed to accommodate a wide range of currently required features, and to support both nearand far-term advances in software-defined radio technology as well as advances in FEC
technology. It is designed for installation in fixed or mobile Earth Terminal (ET) facilities (sites)
using Defense Satellite Communications System III (DSCS III), DSCS III/Satellite Life
Enhancement Program (SLEP), Wideband Gap filler System (WGS), and commercial satellites.
The user has the ability to:
Add or change modular data interfaces and FEC assemblies;
Utilize an extensive array of built-in test capabilities;
Easily upgrade the modems operational capabilities in the field;
Easily update the modems firmware in the field;
Use a wide range of flexible remote control options.
As shown in Figure 1-2, the modem accepts signals from a selected digital signal source and
modulates either a 70/140 MHz or L-Band Intermediate Frequency (IF) carrier with these signals.
The demodulator receives the Rx signal from either the 70/140 MHz or L-Band IF input interface,
then demodulates the IF carrier. Clock and data are recovered and output on a selected data
interface.
The Tx and Rx functions are independent with respect to coding, interleaving, overhead, and
scrambling. The modem does not allow simplex operation in the 70/140 and the L-Band IF
interfaces at the same time. The modem allows duplex operation in either one of the two IF
interfaces.
12

Introduction
1.3
Revision 8
SLM-5650A Features
The SLM-5650A incorporates the following features:
MIL-STD-188-165A compliance (Types A, B, D, E, F);
Intelsat IESS-308, -309, -310, and -315;
A rugged, one-rack unit (1RU) enclosure;
Low weight and low power dissipation;
Selectable 70/140 MHz or L-Band (950 to 2000 MHz) IF interfaces;
EIA-530/422 Data Interface (built-in, to 20 Mbps);
EIA-613/HSSI Data Interface (built-in, to 51.84 Mbps);
EIA-485/EIA-232 Interface for serial remote control;
Ethernet Interface for remote control using Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, HTTPS, and SSH;
Plug-in Data Interface supporting the optional Gigabit Ethernet, Network Processor (NP),
G.703, and LVDS modules;
Asymmetrical Loop Timing;
Data Source Bit Synchronization (Clock recovery for input data without an associated
transmit clock);
Full-featured, built-in BER test-set;
Electrical and Ethernet Rx constellation monitor;
Adaptive Equalizer for high order modulation types;
64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps (Modulation-, code rate-, and interface-dependent);
BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM, and 16QAM;
FEC Rates: 5/16, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 21/44, 5/16, 17/18, .382, .456, .547, and 1/1;
Viterbi and Reed-Solomon Codec;
Turbo Product Codec (optional);
Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding in three block sizes: ULL, LL, and HP
(optional);
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) (optional with LDPC).
Sequential FEC (optional);
Static Bridge, Router, and BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Modes (via the optional NP
Interface);
TRANSEC Encryption (optional);
Firmware updating capability.
13

Introduction
1.3.1
Revision 8
Physical Description
The SLM-5650A is constructed as a 1RU high, rack-mount chassis that can be free-standing as
needed. Handles at the front ease removal from and placement into a rack.
1.3.1.1
Dimensional Envelope
Figure 1-3. SLM-5650A Dimensional Envelope
14

Introduction
Revision 8
1.3.2
Physical Features
1.3.2.1
Front Panel
Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION
SLM-5650A Front Panel Features

Item
Description
Function
USB Port
Reserved for future software support
6-button keypad
Local control via menu navigation
12-button array
Manual data entry
Overall status monitoring at a glance

Display of messages, menus and prompts
10 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

40-character, 2-line Vacuum Fluorescent Display
(VFD)
Backlit On/Off Power Switch
Rack handles
Eases installation into / removal from rack
Unit power
Figure 1-4. SLM-5650A Front Panel View

Local control of the SLM-5650A is accomplished from the modems front panel (Figure 1-4).
The function and behavior of the keypad/data entry array, LED Indicators, and VFD are described
in detail in Chapter 5.
1.3.2.2
Rear Panel
Chapter 3. R E A R P A NE L C ONNE C T OR S
AND
P INOUT S
Figure 1-5. SLM-5650A Rear Panel View

External cables are attached to connectors on the SLM-5650As rear panel (Figure 1-5). Each
connector is described in detail in Chapter 3.
15

Introduction
1.3.3
Operational Features
1.3.3.1
Operating Modes
Revision 8
The SLM-5650A supports Closed Network, Open Network and OM-73 modes of operation.
1.3.3.1.1
Closed Networks
Closed Networks refer to private networks with modem operational parameters that do not need to
interoperate with modems developed for commercial open networks (as specified under IAW
IESS-308, IESS-309, and IESS-310 requirements for open network operation).
A Comtech EF Data overhead channel is provided so that the modem is capable of operating in
such closed networks over commercial satellites IAW Intelsat requirements for use during closed
network operation.
1.3.3.1.2
Open Networks (Intelsat)
Open Networks refer to networks that must meet Intelsat specifications for Effective Isotropic
Radiated Power (EIRP), EIRP stability, spurious emissions, intermodulation products, adjacent
carrier interference, frequency tolerance, equalization, and modem parameters such as
modulation, FEC, and scrambling.
The SLM-5650A meets Intelsat certification requirements and is capable of operating in such
open networks over commercial satellites (as specified under IAW IESS-308, IESS-309, and
IESS-310 requirements for open network operation).
The modem supports the overhead framing integral to those modems, in order to be fully
compatible with commercial modems complying with IAW IESS-308, IESS-309, and IESS-310.
No access is provided to the overhead channel data or alarms.
1.3.3.1.3
OM-73 Mode
OM-73 Mode allows the SLM-5650A to be compatible with Linkabits original OM-73 modem.
This modem and its operational capabilities have become a de facto standard when operating over
DSCS satellites. All OM-73 modes listed in MIL-STD-188-165A are supported.
1.3.3.2
Secure Management Interfaces
The SLM-5650A supports secure management interfaces, as part of its Management Security
option, when the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module and/or the TRANSEC
Encryption card are installed either individually or in tandem.
When Management Security is enabled, three important modes of operation affect network
management functionality:
16

Introduction
Revision 8
(Static) Bridge Mode This mode is used when the NP Interface is configured to
support a static point-to-point connection.
Router Mode This mode is used when the NP Interface is configured to support multiport Ethernet and, for Dynamic Point-to-Point Mode, to provide bridged connectivity for
data traffic while supporting routed network management and Vipersat traffic.
BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode This mode is used when the NP Interface is
configured to provide bridged connectivity for data traffic while supporting routed
network management and Vipersat traffic.
Detailed information about these configurations and modes, and their functional association with
the Base Modem, NP Interface and/or the TRANSEC Module Interface, is provided in the
following chapters in this manual:
Chapter 6. ETHERNET MANAGEMENT
Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE
Chapter 8. NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE INTERFACE
1.3.3.3
Data Interfaces
The SLM-5650A supports only one data interface at a time. The modem features two native data
interfaces (TIA/EIA-530/422 and TIA/EIA-613 [HSSI]), plus an option slot for installation of a
modular data interface. The optional modular interfaces available at this time are the Network
Processor, Gigabit Ethernet, G.703, and LVDS.
1.3.3.3.1
Network Processor
The optional Network Processor (NP) Interface is Comtech EF Datas third generation IP router,
Ethernet bridge, and BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) device. The interface is designed to
process more than 150,000 packets per second (pps) in Layer 2, Layer 3, or Brouter mode of
operation. The NP Interface supports the following operating modes:
1.3.3.3.2
Layer 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode

Layer 2 and Layer 3 SCPC Ethernet Brouter Mode
Layer 2 and Layer 3 Vipersat Brouter Mode
Layer 3 SCPC IP Router Mode
Layer 3 Vipersat STDMA Router Mode
Extended Temperature Range -32 to 50 C
10/100/1000 BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet)
The optional 10/100/1000 BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet, or GbE) interface performs a simple bridge
function and passes IP packets, unaltered, in each direction between the LAN (10/100/1000
BaseT interface) and WAN (SLM-5650A modulator/demodulator).
17

Introduction
Revision 8
IP packet traffic is framed via HDLC encapsulation by the GBEI-5650A logic, and the GBEI5650A is both the origination and termination point for HDLC encapsulation. HDLC CRC-16
verification is performed on all received (from WAN) HDLC frames.
1.3.3.3.3
T1/E1, T2/E2, G.703
The optional T1/E1, T2/E2, G.703 interface is designed for full duplex capability and is automatically
configured for simplex transmit or simplex receive operation The interface operates at the digital
hierarchy bit rates of 1.544, 2.048, 6.312, and 8.448 Mps as defined by ITU-T G.703.
1.3.3.3.4
LVDS
The optional Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) interface provides a physical and electrical
interface between an SLM-5650A modulator and demodulator and signal sources operating with
LVDS electrical characteristics.
1.3.3.3.5
TIA/EIA-530
The native TIA/EIA-530 interface supports the physical layer requirements for TIA/EIA-530. It
also supports the TIA/EIA-422 electrical interface specification. This interface operates in duplex
from 64 kbps to 20 Mbps.
1.3.3.3.6
TIA/EIA-613 (HSSI)
The native TIA/EIA-613 interface supports the physical layer requirements for TIA/EIA-613. It
also supports the TIA/EIA-612 electrical interface specification. This interface operates in duplex
from 64 kbps to 51.84 Mbps.
1.3.3.4
Independent Tx and Rx Function
The Tx (modulator) and Rx (demodulator) sides of the modem are functionally independent and
separately controllable. The baseband Tx and Rx sides of a communications channel passing
through the modem are independently configurable, including the ability to select different
parameters (to include data rate, modulation, and coding) in support of asymmetrical operation.
Data interfaces and IF interfaces are not independent.
Example: If the TIA/EIA-530 interface is selected, DO NOT USE TIA/EIA-530 to transmit and a HSSI interface to
receive. The same principle applies to the IF interfaces: If 70/140 is selected, DO NOT USE 70/140 to transmit and
the L-Band interface to receive.
18

Introduction
1.3.3.5
Revision 8
Verification
The SLM-5650A includes test modes and loopbacks for rapid verification of the correct
functioning of the modem. Of particular note is the IF loopback, which permits the user to
perform a quick diagnostic test without having to disturb external cabling. During the loopback,
all of the receive configuration parameters are temporarily changed to match those of the Tx side,
and an internal RF switch connects the modulator output to the demodulator input. When normal
operation is again selected, all of the previous values are restored.
1.3.3.6
Updating Modem Firmware
The SLM-5650A stores its firmware in flash memory, which allows the modem to upload
firmware downloads from an external PC once Ethernet connectivity has been established.
Firmware updates for the base modem, 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module, and
Network Processor (NP) Interface Module may be obtained free from Comtech EF Data via the
CEFD Web site or via e-mail from Comtech EF Data Customer Support during normal business
hours. (Note that TRANSEC Module firmware updates must be requested directly from Comtech
EF Data Customer Support.)
Chapter 4. UPDATING FIRMWARE
1.3.3.7
Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST)
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem incorporates a number of optional features. In order to permit
a lower initial cost, the unit may be purchased with only the desired features enabled.
If, at a later date, the user wishes to upgrade the functionality of a unit, Comtech EF Data
provides Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), a technology which permits the purchase
and installation of options through special authorization codes. These unique Fast Access Codes
may be purchased from Comtech EF Data during normal business hours, and then loaded into the
unit using the front panel keypad.
FAST System Theory

FAST allows an operator to order a unit precisely tailored for the initial application. When
service requirements change, FAST allows the operator to upgrade the topology of the unit onlocation, within minutes, and without having to remove the unit from the setup. This accelerated
upgrade is possible due to FASTs extensive use of the programmable logic devices incorporated
into Comtech EF Data products.
FAST Implementation
Comtech EF Datas FAST system is factory-implemented in the modem. All FAST options are
available through the basic platform unit at the time of order. FAST allows immediate activation
of available options first, upon entry of the FAST Access Code through the front panel keypad,
and then by setting the desired operational parameters via the front panel, remote control, or Web
Server interfaces.
19

Introduction
Revision 8
FAST Accessible Options

SLM-5650A hardware options can be ordered and installed either at the factory or in the field. In
the field, the operator can select options that can be easily activated, depending on the current
hardware configuration of the unit. The unique FAST Access Code that is purchased from
Comtech EF Data enables configuration of the available hardware.
The following table shows the FAST-accessible hardware and FAST options available for the
SLM-5650A.
Option
How Enabled
HARDWARE
Gigabit Ethernet Interface (Plug-in Card)

G.703 Interface (Plug-in Card)
Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) FEC Option (Installed Card and FAST)
LVDS Interface (Plug-in Card)
Network Processor Interface Module (Plug-in Card)
TRANSEC Module (Installed Card and FAST)
FAST
Modem Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Adv FEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Turbo FEC Option
Asymmetrical Rx Data Rate: 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Demodulator Only
8-PSK modulation
8QAM modulation
16-QAM modulation
16APSK/32APSK modulation (future)
AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) Overhead
ASYNC ESC
Carrier-In-Carrier
Network Processor Antenna Handover
Network Processor BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
Network Processor Management Security
Network Processor QoS
Network Processor Vipersat
Reed-Solomon Coding
Sequential Encode/Decoder
Spectrum Spreading (DSSS)
TRANSEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Vipersat Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
110

Introduction
Revision 8
1.3.4
Interoperability
1.3.4.1
Legacy Modems
The SLM-5650A is fully compatible and interoperable with all specified modes of operation of
the following legacy modems:
OM-73 (V);
MD-1352 (P)/U (BEM-7650);
MD-1340 (OM-73 interoperable mode only; orderwire not required);
MD-1030B;
SLM-3650;
SLM-5650;
SLM-8650;
SLM-7650.
Note: The remote control protocol is not backwards compatible.
1.3.4.2
Modem Switches
To ensure operational reliability, the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem may be incorporated into a
number of Comtech EF Data switching products. These switches are compatible only with
Comtech EF Data modems; this switch/modem compatibility is further defined for the
SLM-5650A as follows:
Compatible
CRS-300 1:10 Redundancy Switch

CRS-311 1:1 Redundancy Switch
CRS-311-AH Antenna Handover Switch
Non-compatible
SMS-300
SMS-450
SMS-7000 Modem Protection Switch
For detailed information on using the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem in 1:1/1:N redundancy or
Antenna Handover applications, refer to the pertinent switch Installation and Operation Manual.
111

Introduction
1.4
Revision 8
Summary of Specifications
General Specifications
Parameter
Operating Frequency Range
Modulation Types
Digital Data Rates
Symbol Rate Range

EXT REF Input
INT REF Stability
Scrambling
IDR/IBS Framing Compatibility
Built-in Test (BIT)
Summary Faults
Monitor and Control

Modulator Specifications
Parameter
Output Power
Output Return Loss
Specifications
52 to 88, 104 to 176, 950 to 2000 MHz ( in 100 Hz steps).
BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM, 16QAM.
64 kbps to 2.5 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
64 kbps to 5 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
64 kbps to 51.840 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-613, LVDS)
64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (GBEI, Network Processor)
32 Ks/s to 64 Ms/s
TNC Connector, 1, 5, or 10 MHz selectable.
1 x 10-7
V.35, OM-73, and Synchronous
Support for IBS and IDR framing. Allows basic IBS/IDR Open Network capable
operation.
Fault and status reporting, BER performance monitoring, IF Loop-back,
programmable test modes, built-in Fireberd emulation with all comprehensive
BER measurements.
Reported via Front Panel LEDs, 9-pin D-sub Alarm connector, relay contacts for
Tx, Rx, Common equipment faults, and Tx and RX alarms. Open collector faults
on the 15-pin D-sub Aux connector. Both data interfaces have open collector
faults available.
EIA-485, EIA-232, 10/100 BaseT Ethernet with HTTP, Telnet, and SNMP.
Specifications
+10 to -40 dBm, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps.
In Extended Temperature Range of -32 to 0 C, TX Power accuracy
is +/- 1.5 dB
-14 dB (70/140 MHz)
-9 dB (L-Band)
Output Impedance
50
Spurious
From Carrier TX SR TO 500 MHZ 51 dBc (measured in a 10 kHz bandwidth).

From Carrier (CW) to the greater of the 12th harmonic or
4000 MHz 60 dBc.
Rx, INT, Tx Terrestrial, and Data Source Sync.
Harmonics
Tx Clock Source
Output Connections
TNC for 52 to 88, 104 to 176 MHz

Type N for 950 to 2000 MHz
Modulation Timing Jitter
< 3 % of the modulation symbol period.
Modulation Phase Error
<2
Modem can invert the modulated spectrum.
Modem can invert the Tx clock and data independently of each other. (EIA-530,
EIA-613).
Modulator Spectral Inversion

Transmit Clock and Data
Inversion
112

Introduction
Revision 8
Demodulator Specifications
Parameter
Input
Power
Desired Carrier
Maximum Composite
Specifications
For 70/140 MHz:
+10 to -55 dBm
For L-Band:
+10 to -55 dBm (SR>3.2 MSPS)

+10 to 10log10(SR/32000) -75 dBM
(SR3.2 MSPS) where SR is in symbols per second
+20 dBm or +40 dBc
Input Impedance
50
Input Connectors
TNC for 52 to 88, 104 to 176

Type N for 950 to 2000 MHz
Carrier Acquisition Range
30 kHz, selectable
Input Return Loss
-14 dB (70/140 MHz)

-9 dB (L-Band)
Buffer Clock
INT, Tx Terrestrial, Rx Satellite
Doppler Buffer
128 to 4,194,304 bits, or 2 to 60 mSec
Coding Options
Parameter
Specifications
Uncoded
1/1
Viterbi
K=7, 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 rates
Viterbi + Reed-Solomon
Closed Network, per IESS-308, and IESS-309
Trellis
IESS-310
Trellis + Reed-Solomon
IESS-310
Turbo
Turbo Product Coding (TPC), per IESS-315
LDPC: ULL, LL, and HP
Closed Network
Open Network Options

Parameter
Specifications
IDR
INTELSAT IESS-308 (Framing only)

IBS

113

Introduction
Revision 8
1.4.1
Performance
1.4.1.1
Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements
The following reference Eb/N0 is defined as the required Eb/N0 corresponding to a BER of IE-3
with Reed-Solomon FEC not enabled.
Table 1-1. Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements
Parameter
Specification
Initial Acquisition
The modem achieves initial acquisition within the times as specified within 30 kHz at
the reference Eb/N0
For baseband data rates between 64 kbps and 128 kbps, the maximum
initial acquisition time is 500 seconds.
For Baseband data rates between 128kbps and 1544 kbps, the maximum
initial acquisition time is 30 seconds.
For baseband data rates > 1544 kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is
1.5 seconds.
Reacquisition
Reacquisition is achieved, as follows, after a period of up to 15 minutes of the absence

of signal when the carrier returns to within 500 Hz of its original frequency.
reacquisition time shall be 45 seconds.
reacquisition time shall be 20 seconds.
For baseband data rates greater than 1544 kbps, the maximum reacquisition
time shall be 1 second.
BCI
With Tx and Rx random data, the mean time to loss of BCI due to falsely adding or
deleting bits is at least 3 days at the reference Eb/N0. In addition, the modem maintains
BCI over 50 consecutive bits of all ones or zeros, which occur no more than once in
10,000 bits, without employing data scrambling.
System Retention
Synchronization and BCI are maintained for all Eb/N0 above the reference Eb/N0
(BPSK/QPSK/OQPSK/8PSK) for signal loss of up to 50 modulation symbol periods, with
a probability of at least 90 percent.
Receive Timing Jitter
The Rx output clock peak timing jitter cannot exceed 5 percent at the reference Eb/N0
when the modulated signal meets the modulation timing jitter requirement.
Doppler
The modem meets the requirements with a Doppler shift, rate of change, and
acceleration for satellite inclination up to 7 as presented in Table 1-2, and an
additional 0.5 dB added to the reference Eb/N0.
Table 1-2. Doppler Requirements

Parameter
C-Band
X-Band
Ku-Band
Ka-Band
Doppler Shift in Hz
2475
3535
6045
11,810
Doppler Rate of Change in Hz/sec
226
270
490
1046
Doppler Acceleration in Hz/sec2
243
290
526
1124
114

Introduction
1.4.1.2
1.4.1.2.1
Revision 8
Data Quality Performance

OM-73 Compatible Mode Performance
Operating in the OM-73-compatible mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance with
differential encoding and data scrambling enabled does not exceed values shown in Table 1-3
through Table 1-8.
1.4.1.2.2
MIL-STD-188-165A Compatible Mode Performance
Operating with BPSK, QPSK, or OQPSK modulation in the MIL-STD-188-165A compatible

mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance with differential encoding and data scrambling
enabled will not exceed values shown in Table 1-3 (without Reed-Solomon) or Table 1-4 (with
Reed-Solomon) tested in an IF back-to-back configuration over the BER range 5 x 10-03 to 1 x 10-07.
Operating with 8PSK modulation and rate 2/3 pragmatic Trellis coding (without Reed-Solomon
outer coding), SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance is less than or equal to the values shown
in Table 1-5 when tested in an IF back-to-back configuration.
Operating with 8PSK modulation, rate 2/3 pragmatic Trellis coding, and Reed-Solomon
(219,201) outer coding, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance is better than or equal to the
values shown in Table 1-6 when tested in an IF back-to-back configuration.
1.4.1.2.3
IESS-308 Compatible Mode Performance
When operating in the IESS-308 Compatible Mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance is
as specified in IESS-308.
1.4.1.2.4
1.4.1.2.5
1.4.1.2.6
16QAM Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the 16QAM mode provides back-to-back BER vs. Eb/N0
performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-7 when using the modulation
formats indicated.
115

Introduction
1.4.1.2.7
Revision 8
Turbo Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the Turbo Code Mode provides back-to-back BER vs. Eb/N0
performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-8 when using the modulation
formats indicated.
1.4.1.2.8
Sequential Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the Sequential Mode provides back-to-back BER vs. Eb/N0 performance
better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-9 when using the modulation formats indicated.
1.4.1.2.9
LDPC Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in an LDPC Mode provides back-to-back BER vs Eb/N0 performance
better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-11 through 1-13 when using the indicated block
size and modulation formats.
116

Introduction
1.4.1.3
1.4.1.3.1
Revision 8
BER Performance
BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding
Table 1-3. Viterbi Decoder BER
Eb/No (dB) Specifications
Viterbi Decoder
1.4.1.3.2
BER
1/2
3/4
7/8
Uncoded
10-3
3.8
5.0
6.3
10-4
4.7
5.9
7.1
10-5
5.3
6.6
7.8
10.8
10-6
5.9
7.2
8.4
11.6
10-7
6.5
7.8
9.0
12.4
10-8
7.1
8.3
9.5
13.0
BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding and Reed-Solomon
Table 1-4. BSPK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi with Reed-Solomon Decoder BER Performance

Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon
1.4.1.3.3
BER
1/2
3/4
7/8
10-6
4.1
5.6
6.7
10-7
4.4
6.0
7.1
10-8
5.0
6.3
7.5
8PSK, Trellis Decoder

Table 1-5. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder BER Performance
Trellis Decoder
BER
2/3
5/6
10-3
6.5
8.7
10-4
7.3
9.4
10-5
8.1
10.1
10-6
8.9
10.8
10-7
9.6
11.6
10-8
10.2
12.3
117

Introduction
1.4.1.3.4
Revision 8
8PSK, Trellis Decoder and Reed-Solomon

Table 1-6. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance
Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon
1.4.1.3.5
BER
2/3
5/6
10-6
6.2
8.2
10-7
6.5
8.5
10-8
6.7
8.9
10-9
6.9
9.3
10-10
7.2
9.7
16QAM, Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon

Table 1-7. 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance
Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon
1.4.1.3.6
BER
3/4
7/8
10-6
8.2
9.5
10-7
8.4
9.8
10-8
8.6
10.1
10-9
8.8
10.3
10-10
9.0
10.6
Turbo Product Code (TPC) Decoding

Table 1-8. TPC Decoder BER Performance
Turbo Product Code Decoder
BER
BPSK
8PSK
QPSK/OQPSK
16QAM
21/44
5/16
21/44
3/4
7/8
17/18
3/4
7/8
17/18
3/4
7/8
10-6
3.3
2.5
3.3
3.9
4.3
6.8
6.5
7.1
10.0
7.6
8.2
10-7
3.4
2.8
3.4
4.1
4.4
7.1
6.9
7.2
10.6
8.0
8.4
10-8
3.5
3.1
3.5
4.3
4.5
7.4
7.2
7.3
11.2
8.4
8.5
10-9
3.6
3.4
3.6
4.8
4.6
7.7
7.5
7.4
11.8
8.7
8.7
10-10
3.7
7.8
7.5
9.0
8.8
3.7
4.7
118

Introduction
1.4.1.3.7
Revision 8
Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon
Table 1-9. Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon BER Performance

Sequential Decoder with / without Reed-Solomon
DESCRIPTION
Sequential 64 kbps
Sequential 1544 kbps
Sequential+RS (225,205)
1.4.1.3.8
BER
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
1/2
1/2
3/4
7/8
10-5
4.8
4.8
5.8
7.0
10-6
5.2
5.2
6.4
7.5
10-7
5.6
5.6
6.9
8.0
10-5
5.2
5.2
5.9
7.2
10-6
5.7
5.7
6.5
7.7
10-7
6.1
6.1
7.0
8.3
10-6
4.4
4.4
5.0
5.6
10-7
4.6
4.6
5.3
6.0
10-8
4.8
4.8
5.6
6.4
BER Performance with Symmetrical Adjacent Carriers
Operating in the presence of two adjacent symmetrical carriers (one lower in frequency and one
higher in frequency with same modulation, data rate, and coding), the modem performance is not
degraded more than as indicated in Table 1-10 Column 3, and a) and b) in this section. This
performance is measured with the adjacent carriers center frequencies offset XRs Hz from the center
frequency of the carrier under test, where X is the spacing factor and Rs is the modulation symbol rate
in Hz of the symmetrical carriers.
The BER of the test carrier is measured at the specified carrier Ratio of Energy per Symbol to Noise
Power Density in a 1 Hz Bandwidth (Es/N0) Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) without the adjacent carriers.
The adjacent carriers are applied at the specified center frequencies and Es/N0 and the BER of the test
carrier is measured. The change in BER is equal to the change in Eb/N0 based on the characterization
curve of the test carrier and the amount of Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) degradation. For
modulation symbol rates below 38.4 ksps, this paragraph does not apply.
a) For X (spacing factor) = 1.2, the symmetric degradation shall be IAW one of the values in
Table 1-10 Column 3, and corresponding test carrier Es/N0 in Column 1. Select a test
carrier Es/N0 that will yield timely results based on modulation and coding used in the test
configuration. The adjacent carriers Es/N0 shall be set to corresponding value in Column 2.
b) For the case of X (spacing factor) = 1.4, the degradation is less than 0.2 dB.
119

Introduction
1.4.1.3.9
Revision 8
BER Performance with Asymmetrical Adjacent Carriers
Operating in the presence of two adjacent asymmetrical carriers, one lower in frequency and one
higher in frequency, and each adjacent carrier symbol rate (R"s) = 2.0 R's, the modem performance
is not degraded more than indicated in Table 1-10 Column 4, and a) and b) in this section.
Performance is measured with the adjacent carriers center frequencies offset (X/2) times (R's + R"s)
Hz from the test carrier center frequency, where X is the spacing factor and R's is the modulation
symbol rate in Hz of the test carrier, and R"s is the modulation symbol rate in Hz of each adjacent
carrier. For modulation symbol rates below 38.4 ksps, this paragraph does not apply.
a) For X (spacing factor) = 1.2, and R"s = 2.0 R's, the asymmetric degradation shall be IAW
one of the values in Table 1-10 Column 4, and the corresponding test carrier Es/N0 in
Column 1. Select a test carrier Es/N0 that will yield timely results based on modulation
and coding used in the test configuration. The adjacent carriers Es/N0 are set to the
corresponding value in Column 2.
b) For the case of (1.4/2)(R's + R"s) Hz carrier spacing, the degradation is < 0.2 dB.
Table 1-10. Acceptable ACI Degradation with Spacing Factor of 1.2
1.4.1.3.10
Test Carrier
Es/N0 (dB)
Adjacent Carriers
Es/N0 (dB)
Eb/N0 Degradation (dB)

Symmetric Case
Eb/N0 Degradation (dB)

Asymmetric Case
5.5
18.5
< 0.36
< 0.41
6.0
19.0
< 0.38
< 0.43
8.0
21.0
< 0.48
< 0.56
8.4
21.4
< 0.51
< 0.60
10.0
23.0
< 0.64
< 0.77
12.0
25.0
< 0.88
< 1.10
12.7
25.7
< 0.99
< 1.21
LDPC ULL Decoding

Table 1-11. LDPC ULL Decoder BER Performance
BER
-5
10
10-8
Eb/N0 (dB) Specification

BPSK
QPSK
1/2
1/2
2/3
3/4
3.1
3.1
3.6
4.1
3.7
3.7
4.2
4.7
120

Introduction
1.4.1.3.11
Revision 8
LDPC LL Decoding
Table 1-12. LDPC LL Decoder BER Performance
BER
-5
10
10-8

QPSK
BPSK
8QAM
16QAM
.382
.456
.547
1/2
2/3
3/4
7/8
2/3
3/4
7/8
2/3
3/4
7/8
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.4
5.0
5.6
6.5
6.1
6.8
8.0
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.7
3.3
3.9
5.0
5.4
5.9
7.1
6.5
7.1
8.4
1.4.1.3.12
LDPC HP Decoding
Table 1-13. LDPC HP Decoder BER Performance
BER

(O)QPSK
BPSK
8QAM
16QAM
1/2
1/2
2/3
3/4
2/3
3/4
3/4
-5
2.0
2.0
2.3
3.0
4.6
5.6
6.8
-9
2.3
2.3
2.7
3.3
5.0
6.0
7.1
10
10
121

Introduction
Revision 8
BLANK PAGE
122
Chapter 2. INSTALLATION
2.1
Unpacking and Inspection

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, its Installation and Operation Manual, and its power cord were
packaged and shipped in a reusable cardboard carton containing protective foam spacing.
Figure 2-1. Unpacking and Inspecting the SLM-5650A
21

Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by Electrostatic

Discharge (ESD). Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or
inserting PCBs.
Step
Task
Keep all shipping materials for storage or reshipment.
Check the packing list to ensure the shipment is complete.

Inspect the equipment for any possible damage incurred during shipment.
3
4
2.2
Contact the carrier and Comtech EF Data immediately and submit a damage report if damage is evident to
the shipment.
Read the manual.
Installation
When installing the SLM-5650A into a rack enclosure (Figure 2-2):
PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED. The equipment must be connected to
the protective earth connection at all times. It is therefore imperative that the unit is properly
grounded, using the ground stud provided on the unit rear panel, during installation,
configuration, and operation.
PROPER AIR VENTILATION IS REQUIRED. In a rack system where there is high heat
discharge, provide forced-air cooling with top- or bottom-mounted fans or blowers.
Make sure there is adequate clearance inside the enclosure, especially at the side for air
ventilation.
Air temperature inside the rack enclosure should never exceed 50C (122F).
For information about custom rack enclosures, contact Comtech EF Data Customer
Support, or visit Comtech EF Datas Web site (www.comtechefdata.com/support.asp).
22

Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 2-2. SLM-5650A Rack Enclosure Installation Example

Install the SLM-5650A in its assigned position in the rack enclosure. Use, as required:
A standard rack-mounted shelf;
User-supplied screws to secure the front panel to the rack enclosure threaded front rails;
Comtech EF Datas optional KT/6228 (4) or KT/6228 (10) Rear Support Brackets
Kit.
Comtech EF Datas optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set.
23

Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2.2.1 Installing the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit

Tools needed to install the KT/6228 (4) or KT/6228 (10) Bracket Kit:
A medium Phillips screwdriver
A 5/32-inch SAE Allen Wrench
An adjustable Crescent wrench.
To install the kit:

Step
Description
Use the #10 flat washers, #10 split washers, and #10 hex nut to secure the #10 shoulder screws to the unit
chassis through the rear right and left side slots as shown.
Use the #10 rack bracket bolts to install the rear support brackets onto the rack enclosure threaded rear
rails.
Install the unit into the rack enclosure. Ensure that the shoulders of the #10 shoulder screws properly engage
into the rear support bracket slots.
24

Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Detail
1
2
Item
Description
Back of modem
Rack Enclosure Rear Rail (typical)
Kit / Quantity
Part Number
Description
HW/10-32SHLDR
Shoulder Screw, #10
HW/10-32FLT
Flat Washer, #10
HW/10-32SPLIT
Lock Washer, #10
HW/10-32HEXNUT
Hex Nut, #10
HW/10-32x1/2RK
Bolt, #10, Rear Support Bracket
FP/6138-2
Bracket, Rear Support 4
FP/6138-3
Bracket, Rear Support 10
KT/6228-2
KT/6228-3
Figure 2-3. Optional Rear Support Bracket Installation
25

Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2.2.2 Installing the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set

The optional FP/SL0006 Bearingless Rack Slide Set may be installed into the equipment rack
cabinet and onto the sides of the SLM-5650A as shown in Figure 2-4 and per the following
procedure:
Step
Task
Use the provided hardware to install one slide onto each side of the SLM-5650A chassis.
Use the provided hardware to install the slide rail components into each interior side of the
equipment rack cabinet.
Install the unit into the front of the equipment rack. Ensure that the slides properly engage
the cabinet-mounted slide rails.
Continue to slide the modem into the equipment rack to its final operating position. Then,
use four user-provided screws to secure the modem to the equipment racks right and left
threaded front rails (through the front panel slots).
CEFD Part Number
Description
FP/SL0006
Bearingless Rack Slide Set 26
Figure 2-4. Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set Installation
26

Installation
2.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Connect External Cables

Connect the cables to the proper locations on the rear panel.
See Chapter 3. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS.
2.4
Configuration
All configurations are implemented locally via the units loaded firmware.
Step
Task
Read Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION before continuing.
Connect the supplied power cable.
Set the power switch to ON.

The auto-sensing AC power supply does not require any adjustments
Do a check for the correct transmitter (Tx) and receiver (Rx) output signal levels and
spectrums.
Use the front panel keypad and display to configure the unit.
If there is any problem with installation or initial operation, read Appendix A.

TROUBLESHOOTING for possible solutions.
27

Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
28
Chapter 3. REAR PANEL

CONNECTORS A ND PINOUTS
3.1
Overview
The SLM-5650A rear panel connectors (Figure 3-1) provide all necessary external connections
between the modem and other equipment. Table 3-1 on the next page summarizes the connectors
provided here, grouped according to service function.
Figure 3-1. SLM-5650A Rear Panel
31

Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Table 3-1. SLM-5650A Rear Panel Connectors

Connector Group
(Chapter Sect.)
IF
(Sect. 3.2)
Terrestrial Data
(Sect. 3.3)
Utility
(Sect. 3.4)
Power/Ground
(Sect 3.5)
Ref Des / Name
Connector Type
Function
J2 Tx
Type N female (L-Band)
J11 Tx
TNC female (70/140MHz band)
J4 Rx
Type N female (L-Band)
J3 Rx
TNC female (70/140MHz band)
J5 Ethernet
RJ-45 female
10/100 BaseT, Remote Control
P1 Overhead Data
25-pin Type D male2
See Sect. 3.3.2 for details
J6 EIA-530
25-pin Type D female2
Data I/O to 20 Mbps
J7 HSSI
50-pin female
Data I/O to 51.84 Mbps
(Interface Option Slot)
See Sect. 3.3.5.
Supports optional data interfaces
J1 Ext Ref
TNC female
Modem Reference I/O
J8 Alarms
Form C Alarms (relay closures)
J9 Auxiliary
15-Pin Type HD Female2
See Sect. 3.4.3 for details
J10 Remote
Serial Remote Interface (RS232/485)
AC
See Sect. 3.5.1
Chassis power
DC
N/A
Chassis power
Ground
#10-32 stud
Common Chassis Ground
IF Output
IF Input
To maintain compliance with the European EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC (EN 55022, EN55024), properly shielded cables are required for all data I/O.
The D-Shell connectors (J6, J8, J9, J10, P1) provided on the SLM-5650A rear panel
feature threaded nuts to ensure the mechanical integrity of the mated connections.
32

3.2
3.2.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
IF Connectors
J2, J4 L-Band IF Interface Connectors
The L-Band IF Interfaces use standard 50 Type N female connectors:
3.2.2
Type N Connector
Ref Des
Description
Direction
Tx
J2
950-2000 MHz Transmit
Output
Rx
J4
950-2000 MHz Receive
Input
J11, J3 70/140 MHz IF Interface Connectors

The 70/140 IF Interfaces use standard 50 TNC female connectors:
3.3
3.3.1
TNC Connector
Ref Des
Description
Direction
Tx
J11
52-88, 104-176 MHz Transmit
Output
Rx
J3
52-88, 104-176 MHz Receive
Input
Terrestrial Data Connectors

J5 Ethernet Remote Control Connector (RJ-45)
The J5 Ethernet connection is an 8-pin type 'RJ-45' 10/100 BaseT connector. Remote
control of the modem is provided using SNMP, HTTP/HTTPS or Telnet with this port.
33

3.3.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
P1 Overhead Data Interface Connector (DB-25M)

This is a male Type D 25-pin D (DB-25M) connector that allows for
connection of the EIA-422, EIA-485 and EIA-232 data interfaces used
with overhead framing. It also supports signaling for tactical applications.
P1 Overhead Data Connector (DB-25M) Pinout
Signal Function
Name
Pin #
1
14
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
EIA-422 Transmit Data A, Input
Tx Data A
EIA-422 Transmit Data B, Input
Tx Data B
EIA-422 Transmit Clock A, Output
Tx Clk A
EIA-422 Transmit Clock B, Output
Tx Clk B
EIA-422 Transmit Byte Sync A, Output
Tx Sync A
EIA-422 Transmit Byte Sync B, Output
Tx Sync B
EIA-422 Receive Data A, Output
Rx Data A
EIA-422 Receive Data B, Output
Rx Data B
EIA-422 Receive Clock A, Output
Rx Clk A
EIA-422 Receive Clock B, Output
Rx Clk B
EIA-422 Receive Byte Sync A, Output
Rx Sync A
EIA-422 Receive Byte Sync B, Output
Rx Sync B
Shield
Ground
EIA-485 Transmit Data -
485 Tx Data -
EIA-485 Transmit Data +
485 Tx Data +
EIA-422 Transmit Handover Sync A, Input
THS A
EIA-485 Receive Data -
485 Rx Data -
EIA-485 Receive Data +
485 Rx Data +
EIA-422 Transmit Handover Sync B, Input
THS B
EIA-232 Clear to Send
232 CTS
EIA-232 Receive Data
232 Rx Data
EIA-232 Request to Send
232 RTS
EIA-232 Transmit Data
232 Tx Data
EIA-422 Transmit Handover Control A, Input
THC A
EIA-422 Transmit Handover Control B, Input
THC B
* For EIA-485 2-Wire Operation:

Only two wires are required
Tie pins 8 and 22 together (both +)
Tie pins 9 and 20 together (both -)
34

3.3.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
J6 EIA-530 Connector (DB-25F)

This is a female Type D 25-pin (DB-25F) connector that conforms to
the EIA-530 pinout for EIA-422 operation only.
J6 EIA-530 Connector (DB-25F) Pinout
Pin #
1
14
Name
Ground
SD_B
2
15
SD_A
ST_A
3
16
RD_A
RD_B
4
17
RS_A
RT_A
5
18
CS_A
MOD FLT OC
6
19
DM_A
RS_B
7
20
Ground
Not Used
8
21
RR_A
DMD FLT OC
9
22
RT_B
DM_B
10
23
RR_B
Not Used
11
24
TT_B
TT_A
12
25
ST_B
Not Used
13
CS_B
35

3.3.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
J7 HSSI Connector
Notes:
1. 50-pin female connector.
2. These are non-HSSI defined signals.
On Cisco routers there is no connection
to those pins.
Fault Open
No Fault Ground
36
Pin #
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Name
Ground
Ground
RT+
RTCA+
CARD+
RDNot Used
Not Used
ST+
STGround
Ground
TA+
TATT+
TTNot Used
Not Used
SD+
SDNot Used
Not Used
Ground
Ground
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ground
Ground
Not Used
Demod Fault see Note 2
Mod Fault - see Note 2
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ground
Ground

3.3.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Interface Option Slot

You can install optional data interfaces into the units interface option slot.
Read these chapters for more information about the optional data interfaces:
3.4
3.4.1
Network Processor
Chapter 8
Gigabit Ethernet
Chapter 12
G.703
Chapter 13
LVDS
Chapter 14
Utility Connectors
J1 Ext Ref (External Reference) (Type TNC)
The J1 External Reference uses a standard 50 TNC female connector:
3.4.2
Ref Des / Name
Description
Direction
J1 Ext Ref
External Reference 1, 5, 10 MHZ
Input
J8 Alarms Connector (DB-9F)

This is a female Type D 9-pin (DB-9F) connector that provides Form C contact
closures for alarm reporting. The three Form C summary fault contacts are
Modulator, Demodulator, and Common Equipment.
J8 Alarms Connector (DB-9F) Pinout
Pin #
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Signal Function
Name
Tx Alarm common
COM
Tx Alarm is not faulted
NC
Tx Alarm is faulted
NO
Unit Alarm common
COM
Unit Alarm is not faulted
NC
Unit Alarm is faulted
NO
Rx Alarm common
COM
Rx Alarm is not faulted
NC
Rx Alarm is faulted
NO
37

3.4.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
J9 Auxiliary Connector (HD-15F)

This is a female type HD 15-pin (HD-15F) connector that provides TTL open
collector faults for the modulator and demodulator; a TTL input for external
transmit carrier mute; an Analog demodulator Q and I constellation monitor; and a
programmable DC voltage monitor for the demodulators AGC.
Pin #
11
12
13
14
15
3.4.4
10
J9 Auxiliary Connector (HD-15F) Pinout

Signal Function
Demod I Channel
Demod Q Channel
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
Spare
AGC Monitor Test Point
Spare
Spare
Tx TTL Fault
Rx TTL Fault
Chassis Ground
Ext Carrier Off
Name
I
Q
AGC
TxFLT
RxFLT
GND
EXT
J10 Remote Connector (DB-9F)

This is a female Type D 9-pin subminiature (DB-9F) connector that interfaces
the M&C functions to a remote location; the remote location can be an M&C
computer located away from the modem, but attached via cable to the remote
connector. This DCE interface is user selectable for either EIA-232 or EIA-485:
Pin #
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
J10 Remote Connector (DB-9F) Pinout

EIA-232
EIA-485
2-Wire
4-Wire
Name
Pin #
Name
Name
DSR
RD
RTS
TD
CTS
GND
6
7
8
9
GND
GND
+Tx/RX
+Tx/Rx
-Tx/Rx
-Tx/Rx
+Rx
+Tx
-Rx
-Tx
2
3
4
5
38
* For EIA-485 2-Wire Operation:

Only two wires are required
Tie pins 4 and 8 together (both +)
Tie pins 5 and 9 together (both -)

3.5
3.5.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Power/Ground Connectors
AC Power Connector
A standard, detachable, non-locking, 3-prong power cord (IEC plug) supplies the
Alternating Current (AC) power to the modem. Note the following:
3.5.2
Input Power
130W maximum
Input Voltage
90 to 132 or 175 to 264 VAC

Unit switches ranges automatically
Connector Type
I.E.C
Fuse Protection
1A slow-blow
Line and neutral fusing
5 mm type fuses
Ground Connector (GND)

A #10-32 stud on the rear panel of the modem is used for connecting a common
chassis ground among all equipment.
The AC power connector provides the safety ground.
39

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
310
Chapter 4. UPDATING FIRMWARE

4.1
Updating Firmware via Internet

To ensure optimal performance, it is important to operate the SLM-5650A with its latest
available firmware.
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem stores its firmware internally in flash memory, which
simplifies the firmware updating process. The firmware update, once acquired, can be transferred
from an external user PC once Ethernet connectivity has been established with the modem.
This chapter outlines the complete firmware updating process as follows:
4.2
Perform the update, without opening the SLM-5650A, by connecting the unit to the
Ethernet port of the user PC.
Download the firmware update via the Internet to the user PC.
Transfer the firmware update, via File Transfer Protocol (FTP), from the user PC to the
SLM-5650A manually from the Windows command prompt, or automatically if using the
optional Network Processor (NP) or TRANSEC modules Web Server Interfaces.
About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Archive Formats

The SLM-5650A is factory-shipped with the latest version of operating firmware. If a firmware
update is needed, it can be acquired by download from Comtech EF Datas Web site (Figure 4-1)
or from Comtech EF Data Customer Support during normal business hours via e-mail or on CD
by standard mail delivery.
Comtech EF Datas Web site catalogues its firmware update
files by product type (e.g., modem, converter, etc.) and
specific model/optional configuration. The hyperlinks appear
as per the example to the right. In this example, the
F0000030X_V### base modem firmware download hyperlink
is shown, where X denotes the revision letter and ###
represents the firmware version. If applicable, one version
prior to the current release is also available for download.
41

Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
In addition to the download for the base modem bulk firmware, downloads are available for the
SLM-5650As optional Network Processor (NP) and Gigabit Ethernet Interface (GBEI)
modules. These modules require separate firmware update.
To obtain the firmware update for the TRANSEC Module, contact Network Product
Customer Support.
The firmware download files are available from Comtech EF Data in two archive file formats:
*.exe (self extracting) and *.zip (compressed). Some firewalls will not allow the downloading of
*.exe files; in this case, download the *.zip file instead. For additional help with "zipped" file
types, refer to PKZIP for Windows, WinZip, or ZipCentral help files. PKZIP for DOS is not
supported due to file naming conventions.
Figure 4-1. Firmware Update via Internet
42

Updating Firmware
4.3
Step
1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Bulk Firmware Update Ethernet FTP Upload Procedure

Task
Identify the firmware number and version for download. The current modem M&C version can be viewed at the
top-level menu of the front panel display (press the [CLR] key several times to view). The firmware information can
also be found within the SELECT: Utility Firmware Info Image#1 or Image#2 menu trees.
Using serial remote control, the firmware revision levels may be obtained with the <0/SWR? query. For more
information, refer to Appendix C. REMOTE CONTROL.
Alternately, when using the HTTP Interface, the Bootrom, Bulk1 and Bulk2 firmware loads may be viewed after
selecting the Unit Info hyperlink, available from the Maint (Maintenance) page. For more information, refer to
Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE.
Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC (note that the drive letter c: is used in this example; any
valid writable drive letter can be used):
For Windows Explorer: Select File > New > Folder to create a new folder, and then rename it from New
Folder to "temp" or another convenient, unused name. Assuming "temp" works, a "c:\temp" folder should
now be created.
For Windows Command-line: Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, and then click the Run... icon (or,
depending on Windows OS versions prior to Windows 95, click the MS-DOS Prompt icon from the Main
Menu). Then, to open a Command-line window
o For Windows 95 or Windows 98 Type command.
o
For any Windows OS versions later than Windows 98 Type cmd or command.
Alternately, from [Start], select All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
At the Command-line prompt (c:\>), type mkdir temp or md temp (without quotes mkdir and md stand for
make directory). This is the same as creating a new folder using Windows Explorer. There should now be a
"c:\temp" subdirectory created.
3
Download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder. As shown in Figure 4-1:
a)
Go online to: www.comtechefdata.com;
b)
From the Home page menu bar, click the Support tab;
c)
Click the Software Downloads drop-down or hyperlink from the Support page;
d)
Click the Download Flash and Software Update Files icon;
e)
Click the (Select a Product Line:) Satellite Modems hyperlink provided on the Flash and Software
Update Files page;
f)
Select the product hyperlink from the Comtech Brand column;
g)
Select the appropriate firmware hyperlink.
About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats: The flashable files on the download server are
organized by product prefix (i.e., FW Firmware); firmware number (verify that the correct firmware number is
known see Step 1); revision letter and, if applicable; the release version number. The base modem bulk firmware
for the SLM-5650A is FW-0000030x (where the x denotes the revision letter of the bulk modem firmware).
The current version firmware release is provided. If applicable, one version prior to the current release is also
available. Be sure to identify and download the desired version.
43

Updating Firmware
Step
4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
Extract the files to the temporary folder on the PC. A minimum of two files should be extracted:
1.
Fw-0000030x.bin, where "x" denotes the revision letter for the bulk image file.
2.
SLM-5650A_ReleaseNotes_v###.pdf, where ### denotes the version number of the firmware release.
Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC.
Using Command-line, type cd c:\temp to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2, then use the dir
command to list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.
Connect the PC to the modem 10/100 Ethernet M&C via a hub or a switch, or directly to the PC with a crossover
cable.
Send a ping command to the modem to verify the connection and communication.
First, determine the IP address of the modem remotely or by using the modem front panel:
Via Remote Control , use the <000/IPA? query.
Via the modem front panel:

SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig IP Address/ Range.
Then, using Command-line to ping the modem at the prompt, type ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the modem). The results should confirm whether or not the modem is
connected and communicating.
8
Initiate an FTP session with the modem. Using Command-line:

a)
From the PC, at the prompt type "ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of the
base modem.
b)
Enter the Admin User Name (there will be no prompt for a password) to complete login.
c)
Verify the FTP transfer is binary by typing "bin".
d)
Type "prompt", then type "hash" to facilitate the file transfers.
Transfer the files from the temporary folder on the PC. Type "put Fw-0000030x.bin bulk: to begin the file
transfers. The destination bulk: must be all lower-case. Approximately one minute is required to transfer the file.
10
Verify the file transfer. The PC should report that the file transfer has occurred, and the display on the modem will
start reporting PROGRAMMING FLASH SECTOR # xx PLEASE WAIT.
Terminate the FTP session type "bye" and close the Command-line window.
Confirm that the new file was loaded by using the procedure in Step 1.
11
Change the desired image to boot. From the modem front panel: SELECT: Utility Firmware Select (use
arrows to change to the other image), then cycle power to reboot the modem.
12
Verify the new firmware has booted by observing the Firmware Version displayed on the modem front panel VFD
(Video Fluorescent Display):
Comtech SLM-5650A Modem

Firmware Version x.x.x
Note: To load the second image, repeat Steps 8 through 11.
44
State:
Mode:
GO
TURBO

Updating Firmware
4.4
Step
1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Network Processor (NP) Interface Module Update Procedure

Task
Identify the firmware number and version for download, as was done in Chapter Sect. 4.2 Step 1 (Bulk
Firmware Update).
Note: To aid identification, when using the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2 firmware
loads may be viewed after selecting the Upgrade hyperlink available from the Admin (Administration) page. For
more information, refer to the pertinent sections in Chapter 8. NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE.
For Windows Explorer: Select File > New > Folder to create a new folder, then rename it from New
now be created.
o
For Windows 95 or Windows 98 Type command.
make directory). This is the same as creating a new folder from Windows Explorer. There should now be a "c:\temp"
subdirectory created.
3
As per Chapter Sect. 4.2 Step 3, download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder. The NP Module
firmware for the modem is FW-0000051x, where "x" denotes the firmware revision letter.
Refer to Chapter Sect. 4.2 About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Formats for detailed information about
firmware archive file formats.
Extract the file in the temporary folder on the PC:
Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC. Using Command-line, type
cd c:\temp to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2, then use the dir command to list the files
extracted from the downloaded archive file.
Connect the PC to the modem Ethernet via a hub or a switch, via one of the four ports on the NP Module, or directly
to a PC with a crossover cable.
Enable the NP Module. From the modem front panel:
Fw-0000051x.bin, where "x" denotes the revision letter of the module bulk image file.
SELECT: Configure Mode Interface NetworkProc.

8
Send a ping command either to the NP Modules Traffic IP address when in single mode, or to its
Management IP address when in dual mode to verify the connection and communication:
If in single address mode, to determine the IP address of the NP Module, from the modem front panel go to
the SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Traffic
IP menu, then select Yes.
45

Updating Firmware
Step
8
(cont)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
If in dual address mode, to determine the IP address of the NP Module, from the modem front panel go to the
SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Mgmt IP
menu, then select Yes.
Then, using Command-line to ping the modem: At the prompt, type ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the NP Modules IP address). The results should confirm whether or not the module is
Initiate a Web session with the SLM-5650As NP Module using the PC and a supported Web browser.
Note the following:
1.
The browser and page examples that follow use Internet Explorer Version 7.0.
2.
NP HTTP/HTTPS pages are shown with optional FAST Features installed.
Type the NO Modules IP address into the browsers Address box (where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the NP
Modules IP address).
Depending on the NP Modules security level setting:

Type http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx for non-secure access (Low Security Mode);
Type https:/xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx for SSH (Secure Shell) access (High Security Mode). When prompted, enter
the User Name and Password to log in:
o
Factory Default User Name is comtech;
Factory Default Password is comtech.
The Web interface is disabled in Bridge Mode.
46

Updating Firmware
Step
10
11
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
To update the Network Processor Bulk firmware:
a)
Open the Admin | Upgrade page:
b)
In the Upgrade section of the page, locate the update file downloaded to the PC during Steps 2 through 4:
Click [Browse]. The Choose File dialog box will open.
Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click on the folder name to open the folder.
c)
Select the update file, then click [Open]. The filename should appear in the Upgrade Image File text box.
d)
Click [Upload] to begin the Image Upgrade process.
Wait while the file transfers. After [Upload] is clicked, the Image Upgrade page appears while the Network
Processor first transfers, and then uploads, the update file from the PC. Allow sufficient time for the file to be loaded
into the NP Module uploading will take approximately five minutes.
It is not necessary to wait five minutes before clicking [OK], but you MUST wait five
minutes before rebooting the modem.
During the upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar that provides the scrolling percentage of
completion. During transfer, the message Please Wait displays:
47

Updating Firmware
Step
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
11
Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar reads 100%, and the Image Upgrade Complete message
(cont) displays:
Click [OK] to exit the Image Upgrade page and return to the Admin | Upgrade page.
12
Refresh the Admin | Upgrade page and verify that the newly-uploaded firmware is reported in the proper
Network Processor Firmware Info Image slot.
If not, open the Admin | Reboot page then, in the Network Processor Boot From section, use the drop-down
menu to select Newest as needed to force the NP Module to boot using the firmware with the most recent build
date. Click [Submit] when done.
13
Save all settings before rebooting to prevent loss of configuration settings. Go to the
Save Configuration page, then click [Save Now]:
48

Updating Firmware
Step
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
14
After saving, return to the Admin | Reboot page, then click [Reboot Now] to boot the NP Module with the new
firmware:
15
To load the second image, repeat Steps 10 through 12.
49

Updating Firmware
4.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
TRANSEC Module Update Procedure

Firmware updates for the TRANSEC Module (also referred to in front panel menu screens as
the Option Card) are not available from the Comtech EF Data Web site, but they may be
obtained from Comtech EF Data on an as-needed basis. To obtain these updates, contact
Comtech EF Data Customer Support to request access to the modem firmware update files
online FTP site. The CEFD Customer Support representative will arrange for full firmware
access information and download privileges at that time.
Step
1
Task
Contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support during normal business hours to request delivery of the
SLM-5650As TRANSEC Module firmware update files. The Customer Support representative will arrange for full
firmware access information and download privileges at that time.
Note: To aid identification, when using the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface, the Bootrom, Bulk1 and Bulk2
firmware loads may be viewed after selecting the Unit Info hyperlink (available from the Maint [Maintenance] page).
For more information, refer to Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE.
For Windows Explorer: Select File > New > Folder to create a new folder, then rename it from New
now be created.
o
For Windows 95 or Windows 98 Type command.
make directory). This is the same as creating a new folder from Windows Explorer. There should now be a "c:\temp"
subdirectory created.
3
Download the correct firmware file that was obtained from Comtech EF Data Customer Support to this temporary
folder. The SLM-5650As TRANSEC Module firmware for the is FW-0000058x, where "x" denotes the firmware
revision letter.
Refer to Chapter Sect. 4.2 About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Formats for detailed information about
firmware archive file formats.
Extract the file in the temporary folder on the PC:

Fw-0000058x.bin, where "x" denotes the revision letter of the module bulk image file.
Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC.
Using Command-line, type cd c:\temp to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2, then use the dir
command to list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.
Connect the PC to the modems Ethernet via a hub or a switch, or directly to the PC with a crossover cable.
410

Updating Firmware
Step
7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
Send a ping command to the TRANSEC Module to verify the connection and communication.
First, determine the IP address of the TRANSEC Module from the front panel:
SELECT: Configure Transec Module IP Address menus.
Then, using Command-line to ping the modem at the prompt, type ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the TRANSEC Modules IP address). The results should confirm whether or not the module is
Initiate a secure Web session with the SLM-5650As TRANSEC Module via its HTTPS Interface. The example
uses Internet Explorer Version 7.0.
From the PC, type https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address of the TRANSEC
Module) into the Address area of the Web browser:
To log in to the secure interface, select Crypto Officer from the

navigation list that is provided in the upper left-hand corner of each
page, then click [Go!]. When prompted, enter the User Name and
Password at the Login page:
Factory Default User Name is comtech;
Factory Default Password is comtech.
Update the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware:

a)
Open the Admin | Update Firmware page:
b)
In the Bulk Firmware Upload section of the page, locate the update file downloaded to the PC during Steps
2 through 4 :
Click [Browse]. The Choose File dialog box will open.
Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click on the folder name to open the folder.
c)
Select the update file, then click [Open]. The filename should appear in the Upgrade Bulk File text box.
d)
Click [Upload] to begin the Firmware Application Process.
411

Updating Firmware
Step
10
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
Wait while the file transfers. After [Upload] is clicked, the Firmware Application Process page appears while
the TRANSEC Module transfers then uploads the update file from the PC.
Allow sufficient time for the file to be uploaded approximately five minutes is required for the process to be
completed. During the upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar that provides the scrolling
percentage of completion. During transfer, the message Please Wait displays:
Any power failure during this process will result in failure of the TRANSEC Module.
In the event that an error occurs during the Firmware Application Process, the following message is displayed:
For troubleshooting purposes, three common reasons for disruption of the Firmware Application Process are:
Power Failure;
Loss of Ethernet signal (e.g., disconnection of Ethernet cable);
Attempting to load firmware other than the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware (i.e., Fw-0000058x.bin).
412

Updating Firmware
Step
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
10
Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar reads 100%, and the Firmware Application Process
(cont) Complete! message displays:
11
On the Admin | Update Firmware page, verify that the newly-uploaded firmware is reported in the proper
Security Module Bulk Info slot. If not, update the Active Boot Slot Configuration by using the drop-down
menu to select Newest to force the TRANSEC Module to boot using the firmware with the most recent build date.
Click [Submit] when done.
413

Updating Firmware
Step
12
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Task
Click [Reboot Now!] to boot the TRANSEC Module with the new firmware:
The modem will reboot with the new firmware loaded as configured:
It will be necessary to restart the SLM-5650As TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface session once the modem has
returned online.
13
To load the second image, repeat Steps 9 through 11.
414
Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL

OPERATION
5.1
Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem front panel (Figure 5-1) allows the user to monitor the modem
operating status (including clocking information) and to control modem configuration parameters.
Item
Description
Function
USB Port
Reserved for future software support
6-button keypad
Local control via menu navigation
12-button array
Manual data entry
10 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Overall status monitoring at a glance
40-character, 2-line Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
Display of messages, menus and prompts
Backlit On/Off Power Switch
Unit power
Rack handles
Eases installation into / removal from rack
Figure 5-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Front Panel

The front panel operating features (keypad/data entry array, LED Indicators, and VFD) and
menus are described in detail in this chapter. For information about Web Server or Remote
Control operation, refer to Chapter Sect. 6.3 HTTP/HTTPS (Web Server) Interfaces or
Appendix C. REMOTE CONTROL, respectively.
51

Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.1.1 Keypad with Data Entry Array

The front panel keypad controls the local operation of the
modem. This control section consists of 18 buttons (keys). Each
key provides one or more logical functions.
Key
Description
ENT (Enter)
CLR (Clear)
Use this key to select for editing an available function, or to execute a modem configuration
change.
Use this key to back out of a selection, or to cancel a configuration change that has not been
executed using [ENT].
Pressing [CLR] generally returns the display to the previous selection.
and
(left and right)
Use these keys to move between the menu screen options, or to move the cursor on a
space-by-space basis for certain editing functions (e.g., value settings such as frequencies,
text identification strings, etc.).
and
(up and down)
Use these keys primarily to scroll through and select pre-defined options, configuration data
(numbers), or characters.
Alphanumeric
Use the 12 keys comprising this section of the keypad for entry of alphanumeric parameters
(e.g., value settings such as frequencies, text identification strings, etc.).
The first three columns of keys are multi-function in purpose. Each successive push of multifunction key 1 through 9 selects the next choice.
For example: The first time the 2 key is pushed, it selects a 2; the second time, an A; the
third time, a B; the fourth time, a C. Pushing the key a fifth time would start over with a 2.
Number-to-character assignment for this array are as follows:
COLUMN 1
COLUMN 2
COLUMN 3
1 Space
2 ABC
3 - DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PQRS
8 TUV
9 - WXYZ
The last column of keys in this array function as follows:

Use the +/- key to change signs (positive/negative);
Use the . key to enter a decimal point;
Use the 0 key to enter a zero.
The keypad has an auto-repeat feature. By holding a key down for more than three
seconds, the key action repeats, automatically, at the rate of seven keystrokes per
second.
The modem responds by beeping whenever a key is pressed:
A single beep indicates that a valid entry and the appropriate action was taken;
A double beep indicates an invalid entry, or that a parameter is not available for
operation.
52

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.1.2 LED Indicators

The 10 LEDs on the front panel indicate:
General modem summary fault information;

Status;
Alarms.
The behavior of the individual front panel LED indicators is as follows:

LED
Unit Status
Tx Status
Rx Status
Tx On
Stored Events
IF Lock
Data Lock
Remote
Test Mode
Encryption On
Color
Condition
Green
No Unit Faults or Stored Faults.
Red
A Unit Fault exists.
Orange
A Unit Alarm exists.
Green
No Tx Traffic Faults or Alarms exist.
Orange
A Tx Traffic Alarm exists.
Red
A Traffic Fault exists.
Off
Demod only.
Green
No Rx Traffic Faults or Alarms exist.
Orange
An Rx Traffic Alarm exists.
Red
An Rx Fault exists.
Off
Demod Faults are masked.
Green
Transmitter is currently on (this indicator reflects the actual condition of the

transmitter, as opposed to the programmed condition).
Off
Transmitter is currently off.
Orange
Stored Events are logged.
Off
No Stored Events are logged.
Green
Demod has constellation lock.
Off
No constellation lock.
Green
Decoder is locked.
Off
Decoder is not locked.
Green
The modem is in Remote Communication Mode.
Off
The modem is in Local Mode remote monitoring is possible, but no remote

control.
Orange
A Test Mode is selected (Example: IF Loopback).
Off
No Test Mode is selected.
Green
Encryption is enabled.
Off
Encryption is disabled.
53

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.1.3 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)

The SLM-5650A features a Vacuum Fluorescent
Display (VFD). The VFD is an active display showing
two lines of 40 characters each. It produces a blue
light, the brightness of which can be controlled by the
User. Compared to a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), it has superior viewing characteristics and
does not suffer problems of viewing angle or contrast.
On most menu screens, a flashing solid block cursor blinks at a once-per-second rate. This
indicates the currently selected item, digit, or field. Where it might obscure the item being edited
(e.g., a numeric field), the solid block cursor automatically changes to an underline cursor.
5.1.3.1
Screen Saver
If the operating unit is left displaying the same screen for weeks at a time, the VFD could become
burnt with this image. To prevent such burn-in, a screen saver feature activates after 15 minutes.
The screen saver messages loop from right to left across the screen. Sandwiched between the
product display message Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Modem and the user prompt
Press any key to continue, the following operating statistics are provided:
Modem Status Code
Description
01
Circuit Identification
02
Demodulator receive frequency offset from the nominal
03
Buffer fill status (%)
04
Receive signal level (dBm)
05
Estimated Eb/No
06
Estimated Corrected Bit Error Rate
07
Bit Error Rate reported by the internal Bit Error Rate Test set
54

5.1.3.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Opening Screen
The front panel menu screens provide the visual means to fully control and monitor operation of
the SLM-5650A. The first screen to display, after the modem power switch is turned on, is the
read-only opening screen:
Comtech SLM-5650A Modem

Firmware Version x.x.x
State:
Mode:
GO
TURBO
The top line identifies the product and its operational state. The bottom line displays the currently
running firmware version, and the selected mode of operation. Press any key to continue to the
SELECT: (Main) menu screen.
The user must first go to CONFIG: MODE to set the MODEM type, the
FREQBAND, and the INTERFACE type before proceeding with the rest of the
modem configuration.
5.2
SELECT: (Main) Menu

SELECT: Configure
Save/Load
Monitor
Utility
Test
(E)
The menu matrix on the next page identifies the content section in this chapter for each menu
branch, and the functional description and available settings for each branch submenu.
Use the arrow keys to select any menu branch, and then press [ENT].
SELECT: Branch
Description
Configure
Select to fully configure the modem.
Monitor
Select to monitor the alarm status of the modem, to view the log of stored events, and
to display the Receive Parameters screen and clear all stored faults.
Test
Select to configure the modem into one of several Test modes.
Save/Load
Select to save and retrieve up to 10 different modem configurations.
Utility
Select to perform miscellaneous functions, such as setting the Real-Time Clock,

adjusting the display brightness, etc.
55

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.1 SELECT (Main) Menu Matrix

Menu Branch
Para
Nested Menu
Configure
5.2.2
Tx
Rx
5.2.3.2
Demod, DataRate, Overhead, Frequency,

Acquisition, Buffer, Misc, CnC, Spreading
Mode
5.2.3.3
Mode, FreqBand, Interface
AUPC
5.2.3.4
Local, Remote, Async, Logging
TRANSEC
5.2.3.5
State, Module IP Address, Gateway
AntHndOvr
5.2.3.6
Mode, State, PwrOffset, Delay
Ref
5.2.3.7
Internal, Ext-1 MHz, Ext-5 MHz, Ext-10 Mhz
Mask
5.2.3.8
TxData, RxData, Eb/No Threshold, DemodFaults
Reset
5.2.3.9
Monitor
Sect
5.2.5
Mod, DataRate, Overhead, Frequency,

Power, Clocking, Misc, Spreading
Mode, SerialConfig, EthernetConfig (w/Option

Cards)
Remote
Alarms
5.2.4.1
Transmit, Receive, Unit
Event-Log
5.2.4.2
View, Clear-All, ModemParameters
Rx-Params
CnC
5.2.4.4
Stats
5.2.4.5
Gigabit IF Statistics
Test
Selectable Submenus
View, Clear-All, Config
Carrier
5.2.5.1
Normal, Tx-CW, Tx-1,0
Loopback
5.2.5.2
Normal, IF, I/O1
Bert
5.2.5.3
Tx, Pattern, ErrIns, Reset, Rx
LampTest
5.2.5.4
Save/Load
5.2.6
Save/Load
Utility
5.2.7
RT-CLK
5.2.7.1
RefAdjust
5.2.7.2
ID
5.2.7.3
Display
5.2.7.4
Temp
5.2.7.5
AGC
5.2.7.6
Alarm
PwrCal
5.2.7.8
Firmware
5.2.7.9
Loc, Action
FAST
56
Information, Select
Configuration, View Options

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.2 Navigating the Menu Screens

Both single-function and multi-function menu screens are used throughout the front panel
SELECT: menu interface. Both screen types display all available options and prompt the user to
carry out a required action.
For the top-tiered menu screens, such as the SELECT: Configure menu branch screen and its
nested SELECT: CONFIG Tx menu screen, use the arrow keys to first select a menu
item, and then press [ENT] to open the nested submenu screen.
Nested submenu screens, such as the SELECT: CONFIG Tx Mod submenu, provide
multiple functional selections on a single screen, and therefore require additional navigation
steps:
First, the user must first use the arrow keys to navigate to an available option on the
active screen, and then press [ENT] to enable selection of that options available settings.
Note that the cursor jumps from the select option name to its editable/selectable setting.
Then, unless otherwise noted, the user must use the arrow keys to scroll through the
available settings. Once the desired setting is selected, the user must then press [ENT] to
save that option setting. Note that the cursor jumps from the setting back to its select
option name.
Repeat these steps as needed for each available option. Once all option settings are configured via
the arrow keys and the [ENT] key, press [CLR] to exit the active menu screen and return to
the previously selected menu.
57

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.3 SELECT: Configure

CONFIG: Tx Rx Mode AUPC Transec
AntHndOvr Ref Mask Reset Remote (E)
Use the arrow keys to select a configuration submenu, and then press [ENT].
Submenu
Description
Tx (Transmit)
Select to configure the Tx parameters. This menu is not accessible if the modem has been
set to Demod Only.
Rx (Receive)
Select to configure the Rx parameters.
Mode
Select to configure the modem operating modes.
AUPC
Select to configure the AUPC parameters. This menu is selectable only if the modem type
has been set to AUPC.
Transec
Select to configure the TRANSEC Module operation.
AntHndOvr
Select to configure the Antenna Handover parameters (when the SLM-5650A is used with the
CRS-311-AH Antenna Handover Switch). This menu is selectable only if the Antenna
Handover FAST option is installed.
Ref
Select to configure the modem reference.
Mask
Select to mask selected alarms.
Reset
Select to reset the modem to a default status.
Remote
Select to define whether the modem is being controlled locally or remotely as well as the
communication parameters (see IMPORTANT note).
The modem may be monitored over the remote control interface at any time.
When in Local mode, however, configuration parameters may only be changed
through the front panel.
58

5.2.3.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Tx
Tx: Mod DataRate Overhead Frequency
Power Clocking Misc Spreading (E)
Use the arrow keys to select a Tx configuration submenu, and then press [ENT]:
Submenu
Option
Mod
Select: FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, and Scrambler.
DataRate
Enter a selected data rate and view the symbol rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONS GUIDE).
Overhead
Select the overhead type, view the overhead rate, select the Reed-Solomon Code Word, and
depth.
Frequency
Select the desired frequency and spectral inversion.
Power
Select desired output power level and state of the output.
Clocking
Select the transmit clock source and SCT reference.
Misc
Select CLK/DataPhase and BPSK Bit Ordering.
Spreading
Select the Tx spreading factor and equation. View the Tx Chip Rate. This menu is selectable
only if the modem type has been set to LDPC.
CONFIG: Tx Mod
Mod: FEC:VIT
Type:QPSK Rate:1/2
RS:Off Diff:On Scram:OM-73
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Scram, and then press
[ENT]. Then, for any option, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings.
Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option
Setting
FEC
VIT or NONE are standard; the remainder are optional. Note the following:
VIT (Viterbi) K=7 convolutional encoder.
NONE Uncoded.
TURBO Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
SEQ Sequential Encoder/Decoder.
ULL Ultra Low Latency LDPC
LL Low Latency LDPC
HP High Performance LDPC
Type
(Modulation)
BPSK, QPSK, or OQPSK are standard; 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM are optional. Note the
following:
BPSK Bi Phase Shift Keying.
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
8PSK 8 Phase Shift Keying.
8QAM 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
16QAM 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
59

Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Setting
Rate
Viterbi 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8

Uncoded 1/1
Turbo 5/16, 3/4, 7/8, 17/18, or 21/44
Sequential 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
ULL 1/2, 2/3, 3/4

LL .382, .456, .547, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 7/8
HP 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
RS
Reed-Solomon Encoder: On or Off
Diff
Differential Encoder: On or Off
Scram
Scrambling (for energy dispersal): V.35, MOD-V.35, IBS, TURBO, OM73, Synch, or Off.
Note the following:
V.35 ITU standard.
MOD-V.35 (Modified V.35) Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed- Solomon
compatible .
IBS Used for IESS-309 operation.
Turbo Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block.
OM73 Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.
Synch Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon.
When changing modulation type, the data rate must be set to a rate supported
by the modulation type or the change to the modulation type will not be
allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible
mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
CONFIG: Tx DataRate
Tx Data Rate:
Sym Rate:
020000.000 kbps
0266666.666 ksps(E)
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Tx Data Rate (in kilobits per second):
Method
Procedure
Use the number keypad and enter the desired data rate.
(See Appendix B. OPERATIONS GUIDE.)
Use the arrow keys to scroll through and select the desired data rate or symbol rate. When
scrolling through the data rates the symbol rate is automatically recalculated and displayed.
When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into
account:
If the modulation type selected is 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM the minimum data
rate allowed is 256 kbps.
When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to
64 kbps or 256 kbps.
The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for
determining the occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type,
code rate and overhead.
510

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Tx Overhead
Tx:
Overhead:None
RS-CW:N/A
Rate: N/A
Depth:N/A (E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Overhead, Rate, RS-CW, and Depth, and then press
[ENT]. Then, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press [ENT] once
again when done.
Option
Setting
Overhead
IESS-308, IESS-309 are standard; AUPC is optional.
Rate
96 kbps (IESS-308); 1/15 (IESS-309 or AUPC); N/A (None).
RS-CW
Reed-Solomon Code Word, N/K: 126/112, 194/178, 208/192, 219/201, 220/200, 225/205.
Depth
Interleaving depth: 4, 8 or 16.

Some selections will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or
if an option is installed or enabled.
CONFIG: Tx Frequency
Tx Frequency:
Spectrum:
1955.0000 MHz
Normal
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Tx Frequency or Spectrum, and then press [ENT].
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Tx Frequency:
Method
1
Procedure
Use the number keypad and enter the desired frequency. Press [ENT] when done.
Select the digit to be edited using thearrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by
using the arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done. Note the following:
For 70/140 MHz: Valid range is 5288, 104176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
For L-Band: Valid range is 9502000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth
calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead and will
not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of
the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.
Select Spectrum to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum. Use the arrow
keys to select Normal or Invert, and then press [ENT] when done.
511

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Tx Power
Tx Power:
State:On
Control:
Level:-20.0
Normal
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select State, Level, or Control, and then press [ENT]. Then:
Option
Setting
State
Use the arrow keys to select On or Off. Press [ENT] when done.
Level
To edit the Power Level from 40 dBm to +10 dBm in 0.1 dB steps:
1. Key in the desired number using the keypad or
2. Select the digit to be edited using thearrow keys, and then change the value of that
digit by using the arrow keys.
3. Press [ENT] when done.
Control
Use the arrow keys to select Normal, RTS, or VSAT. Press [ENT] when done. Note the
following:
RTS (Request to Send) is an interface signaling control. If enabled, RTS can be used to
control the output state of the modulator. Only available when using either the EIA-530 or
HSSI interface.
When VSAT is selected, the output state of the modulator is controlled by the demodulator
carrier detect status. Modulator output will be enabled when the demodulator is detected,
and disabled otherwise.
CONFIG: Tx Clocking
Tx Clocking:
CLK Source: SCT

(E)
SCT Ref:
Reference
First, use the arrow keys to select Clk Source or SCT Ref, and then press [ENT]. Then:
Option
Setting
Clk Source
Use the arrow keys to select SCT or Tx-Terr. Press [ENT] when done. Note the following:
SCT (Send Clock Timing) Selected as an output to provide a clock reference for the user.
Tx-Terr Provides transmit clock input on the selected data interface.
SCT Ref
Use the arrow keys to select Reference, DataSrcSync, or LoopTiming. Press [ENT]
when done. Note the following:
Reference SCT will be generated from the modems 10 MHz reference (this could be
derived from and external reference if selected).
DataSRCSync (Data Source Synchronization) No clock is provided on the interface and a
clock is generated such that it is phase locked to the incoming data stream.
LoopTiming The clock generated from the received carrier is used as a reference for
generating SCT.
512

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Tx Misc
Tx Misc:
Clk/DataPhase
BitOrdering
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Clk/DataPhase or BitOrdering, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Tx Misc Clk/DataPhase

Tx Clock Phase: Normal
Data Phase: Normal
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Tx Clock Phase or Data Phase, and then press
[ENT]. Then, for either, use the arrow keys to select Normal or Invert. Press
[ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Tx Misc BitOrdering

BPSK Bit Ordering: Standard
Non-Standard
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select BPSK Bit Ordering (for BSPK compatibility) as
Standard or Non-Standard, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Tx Spreading
Tx Spreading: Factor:001 Equation:1
Chip Rate: 000128.000 kcps
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Factor or Equation, and then press [ENT]. Then, use
Method 1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method
Procedure
Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT] when done
Select the digit to be edited using the arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by
using the arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done.
Note the Following:

Option
Setting
Factor
Tx Spreading Factor (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128), where 1 is Spreading Off.
Equation
Use one of the four built-in Pseudo PN patterns, designated 1 through 4.
513

5.2.3.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx
Rx: Demod DataRate Overhead Frequency
Acq Buffer Misc CnC Spreading (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Demod, DataRate, Overhead, Frequency, Acquisition,
Buffer, Misc, CnC, or Spreading and then press [ENT]:
Submenu
Option
Demod
Select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Descrambler.
DataRate
Enter a selected data rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONS GUIDE).
Overhead
Select the overhead type, view the overhead rate, select the Reed-Solomon Code Word, and
depth.
Frequency
Select desired frequency and spectral inversion.
Acquisition
Select acquisition range and reacquisition time period.
Buffer
Select buffer reference clock source, recenter, the buffer size, Bit mode or millisecond mode
and external Framing for Plesiochronous operation.
Misc
Select Clk and Data Phase, BPSK Bit Ordering, and Eb/No Threshold.
CnC
Select Mode, Acquisition, or SearchDelay.
Spreading
Select the Rx spreading factor and equation. View the Rx Chip Rate. This menu is selectable
only if the modem type has been set to LDPC.
Note: Framing is applicable only when using externally framed data, with the following formats:
T1 or E1 G.704; T2 G.743, G.704, G.707; and E2 G.742, G.704, G.745.
CONFIG: Rx Demod
Demod: FEC:VIT
RS:N/A Diff:On
Type:BPSK Rate:3/4
Descram:OM-73
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Descram, and then press
[ENT]. Then, for any option, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings.
Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option
Settings
FEC
VIT or NONE are standard; the remainder are optional.

Note the following:
VIT (Viterbi) K=7 convolutional encoder.
NONE Uncoded.
TURBO Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
SEQ Sequential Encoder/Decoder.
ULL Ultra Low Latency LDPC
LL Low Latency LDPC
HP High Performance LDPC
514

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Option
Settings
Type
(Modulation)
BPSK, QPSK, or OQPSK are standard; 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM are optional. Note the
following:
BPSK Bi Phase Shift Keying.
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
8PSK 8 Phase Shift Keying.
8QAM 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
16QAM 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
Rate
Viterbi 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8

Uncoded 1/1
Turbo 5/16, 3/4, 7/8, 17/18, or 21/44
Sequential 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
ULL 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
LL - .382, .456, .547, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 7/8
HP 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
RS
Reed-Solomon Decoder: On or Off.
Diff
Differential Decoder: On or Off.
Descram
Descrambling: V.35, MOD-V.35, IBS, TURBO, OM73, Synch, or Off. Note the following:
V.35 ITU standard;
MOD-V.35 (modified V.35) Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed-Solomon
compatible;
IBS Used for IESS-309 operation;
Turbo Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Turbo block;
OM-73 OM-73 Linkabit modem compatibility mode;
Synch Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon frame.
When changing Modulation type, the data rate must be set to a rate supported
by the modulation type, or the change to the modulation type will not be
allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible
CONFIG: Rx DataRate
Rx Data Rate:
Sym Rate:
020000.000 kbps
0266666.666 ksps(E)
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Rx Data Rate (in kilobits per second):
Method
Procedure
Use the number keypad and enter the desired data rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONS GUIDE).
Use the arrow keys to scroll through and select the desired data rate or symbol rate. When
scrolling through the data rates, the symbol rate is automatically recalculated and displayed.
515

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
account:
If the modulation type selected is 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM the minimum data rate
allowed is 256 kbps.
When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to 64
kbps or 256 kbps.
The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for determining
the occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type, code rate and
overhead.
CONFIG: Rx Overhead
Rx:
Overhead:None
RS-CW:N/A
Rate: N/A
Depth:N/A (E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Overhead, Rate, RS-CW, and Depth, and then press
[ENT]. Then, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press [ENT] once
again when done.
Option
Settings
Overhead
(IESS-308, IESS-309 are standard; AUPC is optional).
Rate
96 kbps (IESS-308), 1/15 (IESS-309 or AUPC), N/A (none).
RS-CW
Reed-Solomon Code Rate, N/K: 126/112, 194/178, 208/192, 219/201, 220/200, 225/205.
Depth
De-interleaving depth: 4, 8 or 16
Some selections will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible
CONFIG: Rx Frequency
Rx Frequency:
Spectrum:
1955.0000 MHz
Normal
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Rx Frequency or Spectrum, and then press [ENT].
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Rx Frequency:
Method
1
Procedure
Use the number keypad and enter the desired frequency. Press [ENT] when done.
516

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Select the digit to be edited using thearrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by
For 70/140 MHz: Valid range is 5288, 104176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
For L-Band: Valid range is 9502000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead, and will
not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of
the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.
Select Spectrum to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum. Use the arrow
keys to select Normal or Invert, and then press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Rx Acquisition
Acquisition:
Range: 0001.000 KHz

Reacq: 000 Seconds(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Range or Reacq, and then press [ENT]. Then, use Method
1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method
Procedure
Key in the desired frequency using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT] when done
Note the following:

Option
Settings
Range
Demodulator Acquisition range: 060 kHz (in 1 Hz steps).
Reacq
Holdoff time before the demodulator reverts to normal acquisition: 0 to 999 seconds. During the
holdoff, the demodulator will stay centered on the last known frequency position of the carrier for faster
reacquisition.
517

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx Buffer
Buffer: Src:RX-Sat Center: Y/N
ExtClk
Size:00001024 Mode:Bits Framing (E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Src, Center, ExtClk, Size, Mode, or Framing, and then
press [ENT]. Then, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press [ENT]
once again when done.
Option
Settings
Src
Rx-Sat, Int, Tx-Terr, or ExtClk. Note the following:

Rx-Sat is the recovered clock from the received carrier.
Int is a clock synthesized from the modems reference (internal or external).
Tx-Terr is the transmit clock supplied by the user.
ExtClk is the external clock supplied by the user when using the optional G.703 interface.
Center
Select Yes or No. By selecting Center, the buffer can be manually centered the buffer is
automatically centered when the demodulator locks.
ExtClk
Sets the frequency of the external G.703 clock:. Select RxDataRate, 5MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz.
Size
If Mode is set to Bits valid range is 1284194304 (in 16 bit steps).

If Mode is set to mSec (milliseconds) valid range is 260 (in 1 mSec steps).
Mode
Buffer size format: Set to Bits or mSec.
Framing
If selected, permits buffer to operate in a plesiochronous mode when running externally framed
data. Select T1, E1, T2, or E2. Note the following:
T1 G704 or None.
E1 G704 or None.
T2 G704, G743, G747, or None.
E2 G704, G742, G745, or None.
If Mode is set to mSec and Rx data rate is 1544 kbps (T1), 2048 (E1), 6312 kbps (T2), or 8448
kbps (E2), and then the selected framing card will be used to calculate the required buffer size so
that the buffer will slip properly.
While the framing selections show up in the menus regardless of which interface is
plugged in, they will only have effect if the Buffer Mode is set to mSec.
CONFIG: Rx Misc
Rx Misc:
Clk/DataPhase BitOrdering
Eb/No Threshold
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Clk/DataPhase, BitOrdering, or Eb/No Threshold, and then
press [ENT].
518

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx Misc Clk/DataPhase

Rx Clock Phase: Normal
Data Phase: Normal
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Rx Clock Phase or Data Phase, and then press
[ENT]. Then, for either, use the arrow keys to select Normal or Invert. Press
[ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Rx Misc BitOrdering

BPSK Bit Ordering: Standard
Non-Standard
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select BPSK Bit Ordering (for BSPK compatibility) as
Standard or Non-Standard, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Tx Misc Eb/No Threshold

Eb/No Threshold: 00.1 dB
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the arrow keys to edit
the value of that digit. This sets an Eb/No threshold such that, when the received carrier
Eb/No is less than the set value, the Rx threshold alarm is set. The valid range is 0.120 dB
(in 0.1 dB steps). Press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Rx CnC
Carrier-in-Carrier(CnC): Mode:Off
Acquisition SearchDelay (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Mode, Acquisition, or SearchDelay, and then press [ENT]. If
Mode is selected, use the arrow keys to select either On or Off. Press [ENT] when done.
519

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx CnC Acquisition

CnC Acquisition: Range: 60.000 KHz
Reacq: 120 Sec
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Range or Reacq, and then press [ENT]. Then, use Method
1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method
Procedure
Note the following:

Option
Settings
Range
CnC Interfering Carrier Frequency Offset Search Range: 060 kHz (in 1 Hz steps).
Reacq
Holdoff time before the demodulator starts a new search.
CONFIG: Rx CnC SearchDelay

CnC Search Delay:
Min: 000 mSec

Max: 290 mSec
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Min or Max, and then press [ENT]. Then, use Method 1 or
Method 2 to configure these options:
Method
Procedure
Note the following:

Option
Settings
Min
Minimum Delay value to use when searching for the Interfering Carrier.
Max
Maximum Delay value to use when searching for the Interfering Carrier.
520

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx Spreading
Rx Spreading: Factor:001 Equation:1
Chip Rate: 000128.000 kcps
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Factor or Equation, and then press [ENT]. Then, use
Method 1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method
Procedure
Note the following:

Option
Settings
Factor
Rx Spreading Factor (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128), where 1 is Spreading Off.
Equation
Use one of the four built-in Pseudo PN patterns, designated 1 through 4.
521

5.2.3.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG Mode
Mode: Modem:TURBO
Interface:EIA-530
FreqBand:L-Band
Mode:N/A
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Modem Type, FreqBand, Interface, or (when applicable)
the Network Processor Working Mode,, and then press [ENT]. Then, use the arrow keys to
scroll through the available settings. Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option
Modem:
Settings
OM-73 Select Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.

MIL-165A Select functionality defined by MIL-STD-188-165A.
IESS-308 Select functionality defined by IESS-308, the Intelsat Intermediate Data Rate standard.
IESS-309 Select functionality defined by IESS-309, the Intelsat Business Services standard.
IESS-310 Select functionality defined by IESS-310, the Intelsat 8-PSK Intermediate Data Rate
standard.
TURBO Select functionality defined by IESS-315 plus Comtech EF Data Turbo mode
interoperability.
16QAM Select 16-QAM as a modulation type.
AUPC Select Automatic Uplink Power Control.
RXBURST Select when unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to
Standard.
TXBURST Select when unit is a Vipersat Remote Modem.
TURBO-FA Select when unit is in Vipersat SCPC operation.
RXBRSTFA Select when unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to
Long.
LDPC Select Low Density Parity Check and Spreading.
FreqBand
70/140 MHz (5288 MHz, 104176 MHz);

L-Band (9502000 MHz).
Interface
Mode
EIA-530 Native interface (standard equipment);

HSSI Native interface (standard equipment);
Network Processor Optional data interface;
GigaBit Ethernet Optional data interface;
G.703 (BAL) Optional data interface;
G.703 (UNBAL) Optional data interface;
LVDS Optional data interface.
Select N/A if the optional Network Processor is not plugged in; otherwise, select the Network
Processor Working Mode:
RtrVSHub
RtrVSHEx
RtrVSRem
RtrVSREx
RtrMPHub
RtrMPRem
RtrPtoP
Bridge
522

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Vipersat mode should not be selected from the front panel under most
circumstances. Refer to the supplementary Vipersat User Guide (CEFD P/N MN0000035) for detailed information on configuring the Vipersat features.
When selecting an IF frequency band, both transmit and receive operate in the
selected band. Operation of transmit in one IF frequency band and the receive in
the other IF frequency band is not permitted.
When selecting a data interface type, a native interface can be selected even if an
optional interface is installed, but an optional interface can only be selected if it is
installed. Both transmit and receive must use the selected interface type.
Transmitting using one interface type and receiving using another interface type is
not permitted.
5.2.3.4
CONFIG: AUPC
The user must first go to CONFIG: MODE to set the modem type as AUPC in order to
select this menu.
AUPC: Local Remote

Logging
ASYNC
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Local, Remote, ASYNC, or Logging, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: AUPC Local

Local AUPC: Enable: Off Power Settings
Target Setting Carrier Loss Action (E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Enable, Power Settings, Target Setting, or Carrier
Loss Action, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: AUPC Local Enable

Use the arrow keys to select to enable AUPC on the local modem as On or Off, and then
press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: AUPC Local Power Settings

Local AUPC Power: Nominal: -10.0 dBm
Min: -30.0 dBm Max: -05.0 dBm
(E)
First, use thearrow keys to select Nominal:, Min:, or Max:, and then press [ENT].
Then, for all selections, use thearrow keys to first select the digit to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] once again when done.
523

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Setting
Valid Operational Range
Nominal:
Nominal Output Power: : -40 to +10 dB.
Min:
Minimum Output Power: -40 to +10 dB.
Max:
Maximum Output Power: -40 to +10 dB.
CONFIG: AUPC Local Target Settings

Target Settings: Eb/No: 0.60 dB
RateOfChange: 1.0 dB/Minute
(E)
First, use thearrow keys to select Eb/No or RateOfChange, and then press [ENT].
Then, for either selection, use thearrow keys to first select the digit to edit, and then use
the arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] once again when done.
Setting
Valid Operational Range
Eb/No
To set the Target Eb/No for AUPC: 3.216.0 dB.
RateOfChange
To set the maximum tracking rate: 0.56.0 dB per minute (in 0.5 dB increments)
CONFIG: AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action

Carrier Loss: Local: HOLD
Remote: HOLD
(E)
First, use thearrow keys to select Local or Remote, and then press [ENT]. Then, for
either selection, use the arrow keys to select HOLD, NOMINAL, or MAXIMUM.
Option
Function
Local
Sets the action of the local modem when it loses carrier detect.
Remote
Sets the action of the local modem when the remote modem loses carrier detect.
CONFIG: AUPC Remote

Remote AUPC: Enable: Off BasebandL: Off
Tx Pattern: Off BER: Loss
(E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Enable, BasebandL, Tx Pattern, or BER, and then press
[ENT]. Then, typical for all selections, use the arrow keys to select operation as On or Off.
Option
Function
Enable
View or modify the status of the remote modems AUPC Enable.
524

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Option
Function
BasebandL
View or modify the status of the remote modems I/O Loopback #1 setting.
Tx Pattern
View or modify the status of the remote modems Tx pattern substitution.

Note: In order to maintain compatibility with older Comtech EF Data modems, only 2047
pattern substitution is supported.
BER
Monitor BER of the remote modem. The remote modem shall have Tx Pattern set to On and
the local modem shall be transmitting a 2047 pattern.
CONFIG: AUPC ASYNC

ASYNC: TxBaud:1200 TxFormat:7E2 (E)
Type:232
RxBaud:1200 RxFormat:7E2
First, use thearrow keys to select TxBaud, TxFormat, Type, RxBaud, or RxFormat, and
then press [ENT]. Then, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press
[ENT] once again when done.
Option
Settings
TxBaud
Select the Async Channel Tx Baud Rate: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
or 38400.
TxFormat
Select the Async Channel Tx Character Format: 7N1, 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1, 8E1,
8O1, 8N2, 8E2 or 8O2.
Type
Select the Async Channel communications protocol: 232, 485-2W or 485-4W.
RxBaud
Select the Async Channel Rx Baud Rate: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
or 38400.
RxFormat
Select the Async Channel Rx Character Format: 7N1, 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1, 8E1,
8O1, 8N2, 8E2 or 8O2.
Max Tx or Rx baud rate is limited to 1.875% of the primary data rate.
CONFIG: AUPC Logging

AUPC Statistics: View
Clear-All
Config
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or Config, and then press [ENT].
Option
Settings
View
Use the arrow keys to view/scroll through the stored AUPC statistics. Press [CLR] or
[ENT] to return to the previous menu.
525

5.2.3.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Option
Settings
Clear-All
Use the arrow keys to select No or Yes to clear all stored AUPC statistics, and then
press [ENT].
Config
Use the arrow keys to set the interval that the statistics are stored, and then press
[ENT]. Valid selections are 10 minutes through 90 minutes (in 10-minute increments), or
Disabled.
CONFIG: Transec
TRANSEC: State: Encrypted
Module IP Address
Gateway
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select State, Module IP Address, or Gateway, and then press [ENT].
5.2.3.6
Option
Settings
State
Select Encrypted or Bypass.
Module IP
Address
Set the TRANSEC Modules Management IP Address and subnet mask length.
Gateway
Set the TRANSEC Modules IP Gateway.
CONFIG: AntHndOvr
AntHndOvr: Mode: Off State: ONLINE
PwrOffset: +01.2 Delay: 040ms (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Mode, State, PwrOffset, or Delay, and then press [ENT].
5.2.3.7
Setting
Function
Mode
Select the Antenna Handover Mode as Off, Man, or Auto.
State
Select the current modem state as ONLINE or OFFLINE.
PwrOffset
Select the offset that is added to the Tx power level to compensate for system loss.
Delay
Select the size of the buffer used during Handover events.
CONFIG: Ref
Reference: Internal Ext-1Mhz
Ext-5Mhz Ext-10Mhz
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Internal, Ext-1Mhz, Ext-5Mhz or Ext-1Mhz, and then press
[ENT].
526

5.2.3.8
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Setting
Function
Internal
Select the Internal high stability ovenized 10 MHz oscillator.
Ext-1Mhz
Select an external 1 MHz reference (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the
internal reference to the 1 MHz).
Ext-5Mhz
Ext-10Mhz
CONFIG: Mask
Mask: TxData RxData
DemodFaults
Eb/No
Threshold
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select TxData, RxData, Eb/No Threshold, or DemodFaults, and
then press [ENT].
Option
Settings
TxData
This alarm monitors data activity on the transmit data interface: Select Masked, Activity, or
AIS.
RxData
This alarm monitors the received data activity: Select Masked, Activity, or AIS.
Eb/No
Threshold
This alarm monitors the receive Eb/No of the demodulator and compares it to the Eb/No
threshold value: Select Masked or Active.
Demod Faults
This alarm will mask all demod faults and alarms: Select Masked or Active.
When selecting masked for a given alarm, if the condition occurs the alarm will not
be set. Activity or active means the alarm is enabled. AIS (Alarm Indication
Signaling) will put out all ones, allowing the connected equipment to recognize that
there is an alarm condition.
5.2.3.9
CONFIG: Reset
Are you sure that you want to default
the modem configuration? No Yes (E)
Use the arrow keys to select No to retain all current configuration settings and return to the
CONFIG: menu, and then press [ENT]. Otherwise, select Yes to immediately reboot the modem
with is factory-shipped settings.
527

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.3.10 CONFIG: Remote

Remote Control:
SerialConfig
Mode:Serial
EthernetConfig (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Mode, SerialConfig, or EthernetConfig, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Remote Mode

Use the arrow keys to select Local, Serial, or Serial+Ethernet, and then press [ENT].
Note: Local mode will limit the remote control to only be able to monitor the status of the
modem.
CONFIG: Remote SerialConfig

Remote Control:
Interface
Baudrate
Format
(E)
For serial communications, use the arrow keys to select Interface, Format, or Baudrate,
and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Remote SerialConfig Interface

M&C Bus Interface: RS232 RS485-2W
RS485-4W TTL(Switch) CRS-500
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select RS232, RS485-2W (2-wire), RS485-4W (4-wire), TTL
(Switch), or CRS-500, and then press [ENT].
The TTL (Switch) selection enables interoperation with the CRS-311 (1:1) or CRS-300
(1:N) redundancy switches.
Local M&C Bus Address:

0000
When selecting RS-232 the local M&C Bus Address displays 0000.
Addressing is not supported by RS-232 or TTL (Switch) because they are not
multi-drop communication standards. If RS-485 is selected, the display will
show address 0001 to 9999. This address can be changed using the front
panel. The most significant digit is for Comtech EF Data redundancy
switches.
528

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Remote SerialConfig Format

Local M&C Bus Format:
8N1
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select the character format 7N1, 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1
(default), 8E1, 8O1, 8N2, 8E2, or 8O2, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Remote SerialConfig Baudrate

Local M&C Bus Baud Rate:
38400 Baud
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select a Baud Rate of 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 (default),
57600, or 115200, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig

Ethernet Config: IP Address/Range
MAC
Gateway SNMP Option Card Addr
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select IP Address/Range, MAC, Gateway, SNMP, or Option Card
Addr, and then press [ENT].
Option
Function
IP Address/Range
Select the IP Address.
MAC
Displays the modems MAC Address: This is programmed at the factory and is not user
changeable. If installed, the Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces MAC Address will also be
displayed.
Gateway
The IP Gateway Address is the default address that the modem will send all IP responses
when the message originated from a source outside the modems local attached network.
SNMP
Select and control Communities or Traps. Detailed information follows.
Option Card Addr
Select to set the optional Gigabit Ethernet or Network Processor Modules Ethernet
interface IP Address and subnet mask (range). When Network Proc is selected, module
configuration options are also available. (Detailed information for configuring either option
card follows.)
CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig SNMP

SNMP: Communities
Traps
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Communities or Traps, and then press [ENT].
529

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Communities

SNMP Communities: Read
Write
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Read or Write, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Communities Read

SNMP Read Community:
public
(E)
To edit the SNMP Read Community string, first use thearrow keys to select the character
to edit, and then use the arrow keys to edit that character.
Note: Only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are available.
All printable ASCII characters are available with the exception of the backslash / (ASCII
code 92) and tilde ~ (ASCII code 126).
Once the string has been composed, press [ENT]. All trailing spaces are removed from the
Read Community string upon entry.
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Communities Write

SNMP Write Community:
private
(E)
To edit the SNMP Write Community string, first use the arrow keys to select the
character to edit, and then use the arrow keys to edit that character.
Write Community string upon entry.
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Traps

SNMP Traps: Address #1
Community
Address#2
Version (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Address #1, Address #2, Community, or Version, and then
press [ENT].
530

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Address #1/#2

SNMP Traps IP Address #X:
000.000.000.000
(E)
Where X indicates IP Address #1 or IP Address #2: To edit the SNMP Trap Destination IP
Address, first use the arrow keys to select the digit to edit, and then use the arrow
keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] when done.
Note: If both Trap IP Addresses are 000.000.000.000, it means that Trap is disabled.
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Community

SNMP Trap Community:
comtech
(E)
To edit the SNMP Trap Community string, first use the arrow keys to select the
character to edit, and then use the arrow keys to edit that character.
Trap Community string upon entry.
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Version

SNMP Version: SNMPv1
SNMPv2
(E)
Select SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 using the arrow keys, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr

Option Card Addr: Gigabit Ethernet
Network Proc
Select Gigabit Ethernet or Network Proc using the arrow keys, and then press [ENT].
CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Gigabit

Ethernet
Option Card Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.002/24
(E)
531

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
To edit the Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces Management IP Address and Range, first use the
arrow keys to select the digit to edit, and then use the arrow keys to edit the value of that
digit. Press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network

Proc
NP Card:
AddrMode:Dual
BPM:Off
Traffic IP
Security: Low
Mgmt IP (E)
Use the arrow keys to select AddrMode, Security, BPM, Traffic IP, or Mgmt IP , and
then press [ENT].

Proc AddrMode
Use the arrow keys to select the Address Mode as Local or Dual, and then press [ENT].
When in Single Address Mode, select Traffic IP to edit the NP Modules
Ethernet IP Address and Range.
When in Dual Address Mode, select Mgmt IP to edit the NP Modules Ethernet
IP Address and Range.

Proc Security
Use the arrow keys to select the FAST-enabled Management Security level as Low or
High, and then press [ENT].

Proc BPM
Use the arrow keys to select the FAST-enabled BPM mode as On or Off, and then
press [ENT].
532

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

Network Proc Traffic IP
Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.054/24
(E)
To edit the Network Processor Modules Traffic IP Address and Range (when the module is
in Single Address Mode), first use the arrow keys to select the digit to edit, and then use
the arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] when done.

Network Proc Mgmt IP
Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.002.072/16
(E)
To edit the Network Processor Modules Management IP Address and Range (when the
module is in Dual Address Mode), first use the arrow keys to select the digit to edit,
and then use the arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] when done.
533

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.4 SELECT: Monitor

Monitor: Alarms Event-Log Rx-Params
CnC Stats GigaBit I/F Stats
Use the arrow keys to select Alarms, Event-Log, Rx-Params, CnC, Stats, Gigabit I/F, or
Stats, and then press [ENT].
5.2.4.1
Submenu
Function
Alarms
Select and view Transmit, Receive, or Unit alarms.
Event-Log
Select to View or Clear-All stored events and view modem parameters.
Rx-Params
Select to view FC, RSL, BERT, Buffer, Eb/No, or BER.
CnC
Select to view CnC Delay, FreqOffset, Eb/No, or Ratio
Stats
Select to View, Clear-All or Config statistics.
GigaBit I/F Stats
Select to View or Clear-All Gigabit Interface link statistics.
Monitor: Alarms
Live Alarms: Transmit
Receive
Unit
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Transmit, Receive, or Unit, and then press [ENT].
Monitor: Alarms Transmit

Mod: ---Intf: ----
Press <ENT> for

detailed status
Press [ENT] to enable access to the available read-only Modulator and Intf (Interface)Tx alarm
status screens. Use the arrow keys to then page through the available Modulator and
Interface character positions (Mod#1 through #4, and Tx Intf#1 through #4). The status message
to the right changes based on the current position, as per the following table:
Transmit (Tx) Alarm Position
Description
Top row
Modulator symbol clock Phase Lock Loop status.

Modulator RF Synthesizer Phase Lock Loop status.
Modulator IQ activity status.
Modulator Nyquist filter Over range.
Bottom row
Mod #1
Mod #2
Mod #3
Mod #4
Tx Intf #1
Tx Intf #2
Tx Intf #3
Tx Intf #4
Transmit data interface clock Phase Lock Loop status.

Transmit data interface terrestrial clock activity status.
Transmit data interface SCT (send clock timing) Phase Lock Loop status.
Transmit data interface AIS (alarm indication signal) status.
534

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The examples that follow depict alarm status screens displayed for the Mod 1st and Intf Tx 1st
character positions. If the Mod 1st character position is selected:
Mod: +--Intf: ----
Mod symbol clk

not locked.
If the Intf Tx 1st character position is selected:
Mod: ---Intf: +---
TXIntf data
not locked.
Monitor: Alarms Receive

Demod: --------Intf: ----------
Press <ENT> for

detailed status
Press [ENT] to access the available read-only Demodulator and Intf (Interface) Rx alarm screens.
Then, use the arrow keys to navigate through the displayed Demodulator and Interface
character positions (Demod#1 through #6, and Rx Intf#1 through #10). The status message to the
right changes based on the current cursor position, as per the following table:
Receive (Rx) Alarm Position
Description
Top row
Demod #1
Demod #2
Demod #3
Demod #4
Demod #5
Demod #6
Demodulator carrier Phase Lock Loop status.

Demodulator FEC (forward error correction) lock status.
Demodulator RF Synthesizer Phase Lock Loop status.
Demodulator IQ activity status.
Composite Power exceeds 40 dBc.
Composite Power exceeds 20 dBm.
Bottom row
Rx Intf #1
Rx Intf #2
Rx Intf #3
Rx Intf #4
Rx Intf #5
Rx Intf #6
Rx Intf #7
Rx Intf #8
Rx Intf #9
Rx Intf #10
Demultiplexer lock status.

Doppler buffer status.
Doppler buffer fill status.
Doppler buffer overflow status.
Doppler buffer underflow status.
Doppler buffer Phase Lock Loop status.
Doppler buffer reference clock activity status.
Receive data interface AIS (alarm indication signal) status.
Receive Eb/No lower than Eb/No threshold status.
Internal BERT sync status.
The examples that follow depict the alarm status screens displayed for the Demod 1st and Intf Rx
1st character positions. If the Demod 1st character position is selected:
Demod: +--Intf: ---------
Demod IF not
locked.
If the Intf 1st character position is selected:
535

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Demod: ---Intf: +--------
Demux not
locked
Monitor: Alarms Unit

Unit: ----------------------
Press <ENT> for

detailed status
Press [ENT] to access the available read-only SLM-5650A Unit alarm screens. Then, use the
arrow keys to navigate through the displayed character positions (Unit#1 through #23). The
status message to the right changes based on the current cursor position, as per the following
table:
Unit Alarm Position
Description
Top row
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #8
Unit #9
Unit #10
Unit #11
Unit #12
Unit #13
Unit #14
Unit #15
Unit #16
+ 5 volt power supply is out of range.

+ 3.3 volt power supply is out of range.
- 12 volt power supply is out of range.
Cooling fan fault.
External reference activity status.
192 MHz clock Phase Lock Loop status.
10 MHz reference Phase Lock Loop status.
M&C FPGA configuration fault.
Modulator FPGA configuration fault.
Demodulator FPGA configuration fault.
Decoder FPGA configuration fault.
Transmit interface FPGA configuration fault.
Bottom row
Unit #17
Unit #18
Unit #19
Unit #20
Unit #21
Unit #22
Unit #23
Receive interface FPGA configuration fault.

FEC #1 FPGA configuration fault.
FEC #2 FPGA configuration fault.
Optional data interface card (module) FPGA configuration fault.
FPGA DCM Phase Lock Loop fault.
Network Processor mailbox communications error.
TRANSEC mailbox communications error.
The example that follows depicts the alarm status screen displayed if the Unit 1st character
position is selected:
Unit: +-------------------
536
+5.0V Power is
out of range.

5.2.4.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Monitor: Event-Log
Stored Events: View Clear-All
ModemParameters(E)
Use the arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or ModemParameters, and then press [ENT].
Monitor: Event-Log View

Event 001:003 1:43:02
Mod: ---- ++ --
27/09/05
(E)
To view the details of a stored fault, first use the arrow keys to scroll
through the event numbers, and then press [ENT] to select. Then, use the
arrow keys to navigate the listed fault character positions, displayed on the
bottom line, to view the fault description If the faulted listed is Power On or
Power Off, nothing will be displayed if that event is selected.
Monitor: Event-Log Clear-All

Clear All Stored Events?
No
Yes
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select No (to retain) or Yes (to clear all) stored faults, and
then press [ENT].
Monitor: Event-Log ModemParameters

Current Temp: +41
Comp Power< -70.0
Max Temp:
+56
Max Power> +25.0
(E)
This read-only screen displays the units Current Temperature, Max Temp, Comp Power and
Max Power. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
537

5.2.4.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Monitor: Rx-Params
Fc=+05917 RSL<-60.0 dBm
BERT=N/A
Buf=000% Eb/No=Loss
BER <1.0E-12 (E)
This read-only screen displays the following Rx operating parameters:

Item
Description
Fc
Displays the received carrier frequency offset in Hz. The range is the same as the acquisition range
of the modem 60 kHz.
RSL
Displays the signal level of the received carrier in dBm. The range supported is (+)15(-60) dBm.
BERT
Displays the measured BER. This requires that the modem be set to Test mode for Rx. If a
Fireberd is supplying a data pattern, only the Test mode for the Rx needs to be turned on. The
Fireberd data pattern and the modems data pattern must match to work properly.
Buf
Displays the buffer fill status in a percentage format.
Eb/No
Displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
BER
Displays the estimated BER based on the demodulators measurement of the carrier to noise.
The difference between BER and BERT is that BER is estimated in the
demodulator, while BERT is measured when the Test mode is turned ON.
Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
5.2.4.4
MONITOR: CnC (DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier)

CnC: Delay=000,005uS
Eb/No=Loss
FreqOff=008.7kHz
Ratio<-10dB
(E)
If enabled and locked, the display will show the CnC performance data. This read-only screen
updates once every second.
Item
Description
Delay
Displays the current search delay value.
FreqOff
Displays the current frequency offset between the outbound interferer and the desired inbound.
Eb/No
Displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
Ratio
Displays the ratio of outbound interferer power to desired inbound power. The range is 10 dB.
538

5.2.4.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Monitor: Stats (Statistics)

Link Statistics: View Clear-All
Config
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or Config, and then press [ENT].
Monitor: Stats View

Event 001:003 1:43:02 27/09/11
Min: Loss
Avg: Loss
(E)
Use the arrow keys to scroll through the stored statistics. The statistics are limited to
Minimum, Average, and Maximum Eb/No. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous
menu.
Monitor: Stats Clear-All

Clear All Stored Statistics?
No
Yes
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select No (to retain) or Yes (to clear all) stored statistics, and then
press [ENT].
Monitor: Stats Config

Statistics Logging Interval:
10 minutes
(E)
Use the arrow keys to set the Statistics Logging Interval to 10 minutes through 90 minutes
(in 10-minute increments), or Disabled, and then press [ENT].
539

5.2.4.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Monitor: GigaBit I/F Statistics

This menu is visible only when a GigaBit Ethernet Interface is installed in the
modem.
GigaBit Ethernet Card Statistics:

View Clear-All
Use the arrow keys to select View or Clear-All, and then press [ENT].
Option
Description
View
Select to view the link statistical counters.
Clear-All
Select to clear or reset the FPGA link error counter.
5.2.5 SELECT: Test

TEST: Carrier Loopback
LampTest
BERT
(E)
Select Carrier, Loopback, BERT, or LampTest, and then press [ENT].

Carrier Test Modes, Loopback, and Tx BERT are not allowed when the modem is
set to Demod Only.
5.2.5.1
TEST: Carrier
Carrier Test Modes: Normal
Tx-1,0
Tx-CW
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Normal, Tx-CW, or Tx-1,0 then press [ENT].
Carrier Test Mode
Description
Normal
Not a test mode: Select for standard modem operation.
TX-CW
The modulator produces a pure carrier that can be used for frequency and power
measurements.
TX 1,0
The modulator produces an offset (single upper side band suppressed) test carrier. Use this
test mode to check for quadrature error in the modulator.
540

5.2.5.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
TEST: Loopback
Loopback Test Modes: Normal
IF
I/O1
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Normal, IF, or I/O1, and then press [ENT].
5.2.5.3
Loopback Test Mode
Description
Normal
Not a test mode: Select for standard modem operation.
IF
IF Loopback Loops the output of the modulator back to the demodulator (inside the
modem) to verify transmit and receive configurations match as well as the data inputs
and outputs.
I/01
Baseband Loopback Loops the transmit data (after the interface) back to the receive
data path interface. This mode is useful for checking interface cabling and clocking.
TEST: BERT
BERT: Tx:Off Pattern:2047 ErrIns
Reset Rx:Off Errs:=0000000 BER:NoSync
Use the arrow keys to select Tx, Pattern, ErrIns, Reset, Rx, Errs, or BER, and then press
[ENT]. Then, use the arrow keys to select the desired setting. Press [ENT] to execute the test.
BERT Mode
Description
Tx
Select to turn the transmit test pattern generator On or Off.
Pattern
Select from the available patterns:

Mark All ones.
Space All zeros.
1:1 A one followed by a zero and then repeats.
1:2 A one followed by two zeros and then repeats.
2E15-1 A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^15 1, compatible with standard BERTs.
MIL188 A modified pseudo-random data pattern of 2^11 1, compatible with the MIL-188165 test data pattern requirement of a continuous stream of 50 zeros every 10,000 bits.
This pattern has 5 normal 2047 patterns, with the fifth patterns longest string of zeros (11)
stretched an additional 39 bits to create a lack of transitions for 50 bits approximately every
10,000 bits.
2047 A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^11 1, compatible with standard BERTs.
ErrIns
Select to insert a single error into the data stream by pressing [ENT].
Reset
Select to restart the BER test and clear the error and BER displays.
541

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BERT Mode
Description
Rx
Select to turn on the receive bit error test set.
Errs
Select to view the absolute number of errors counted.
BER
Select to view the bit error rate as measured by the modem.

The BER function can work with a Fireberd supplying the transmit data test pattern,
while only turning on the Rx Bit Error Rate tester. The transmit test pattern generator
can be turned on at the far end of the link as long as the test patterns match the Rx
BERT. An external bit error test set can be used even when the internal bit error test
set is enabled. If AIS is enabled the data will be overwritten with all ones.
5.2.5.4
TEST: LampTest
Select LampTest to perform a diagnostic run on the front panel LEDs and VFD.
5.2.6 SELECT: Save/Load

Save/Load: Loc:0
Empty
Action: View
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Loc or Action, and then press [ENT].
Option
Settings
Loc
There are 10 locations available [0 9]. Use the arrow keys to select the location to
either save or load a stored configuration, and then press [ENT].
Action
View is the default setting to select and view the location before loading or saving. Otherwise,
select Save or Load at the selected location:
To save a configuration, go through the modems menus and configure all the necessary
parameters. Then, select a location, select Save, and then press [ENT].
To load a saved configuration, select the desired configuration, select Load, and then press
[ENT].
Resetting the modem will cause all configurations to be cleared!
Note the following:
If a location has no saved configuration present, the bottom line will display Empty as
per the example shown above.
If a location has a configuration saved to it, the bottom line will display the date stamp
for that saved configuration in HH:MM:SS DD/MM/YY format:
542

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Save/Load: Loc:0 Action: View

16:18:00 08/07/10
(E)
If a location has a configuration saved, and the user attempts to save a new configuration
to that location, the screen will display the following message:
This configuration contains data. Would

you like to overwrite it? No (E)
The default to this question is No. To overwrite, use the arrow keys to change the
answer to Yes, and then press [ENT].
A programming sequence message will briefly display, and then the screen will display
the following message before returning back to the Save/Load menu screen:
The current configuration has been saved

to the selected location.
5.2.7 SELECT: Utility

UTILITY: RT-Clk RefAdjust ID Display Temp
Agc Alarm PwrCal Firmware FAST (E)
Use the arrow keys to select RT-Clk, RefAdjust, ID, Display, Temp, Agc, Alarm, Alarm,
PwrCal, Firmware, or FAST, and then press [ENT].
5.2.7.1
Utility: RT-Clk
Edit Real-Time Clock:
15:34:25 27/09/05
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select and set the Real-Time Clock. Hours are in 24 hour time
(HH:MM:SS) format. The date is shown in DAY/MONTH/YEAR format in accordance with
European format.
5.2.7.2
Utility: RefAdjust
Internal 10 MHz Ref Freq
Fine Adjust: 3F3
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select and adjust the internal high stability 10 MHz oscillator to
counteract aging. The control value is in hex not decimal and has a range of 000 to FFF. The
typical calibration point for a modem is nominally around 400.
543

5.2.7.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Utility: ID
Edit Circuit ID:
------------------------
(E)
Use the arrow keys to name the communications link. This name can be any
combination of alphanumeric characters up to 24 characters in length.
Additional characters supported are: ( ) * + / . (period) , (comma) and space.
5.2.7.4
Utility: Display
Edit Display Brightness
100%
(E)
Use the arrow keys to adjust the front panel display brightness. Valid settings are 25%,
50%, 75% or 100%.
5.2.7.5
Utility: Temp
Modem Temp (Deg C): RF=+61 PS=+40
M&C=+35
Mod=+43
Demod=+51
(E)
This read-only screen allows the user to view the modem internal temperatures (RF, PS, M&C,
Mod and Demod).
5.2.7.6
Utility: AGC
AgcMan:
Min Value: 00.0 Volts

Max Value: 10.0 Volts (E)
Use the arrow keys to select, and then set the Minimum and Maximum voltage levels
for the external AGC monitor voltage that is available on the AUX connector.
Option
Setting
Min Value
Specifies the voltage to output on the External AGC voltage signal when the demodulator RSL
is at its minimum level.
Max Value
Specifies the voltage to output when the demodulator RSL is at its maximum level.
544

5.2.7.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Utility: Alarm
Audible Alarm: Disable
Enable
(E)
Use the arrow keys to either Disable or Enable the alarm, and then press [ENT].
5.2.7.8
Utility: PwrCal
Burst L-Band Pwer Cal: The modem will
Be (re)calibrated. Continue? No Yes
To execute calibration of the L-Band board for burst operation, use the arrow keys to select
Yes, and then press [ENT].
5.2.7.9
Utility: Firmware
Firmware Images: Information
Select
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Information or Select, and then press [ENT].
Item
Description
Information
View information on the firmware residing in the Bootrom, Image#1, or Image#2 slots.
Select
Select which image (Active Image) will be loaded into the modem: #1 or #2.
Utility: Firmware Information

Firmware Info: Bootrom
Image#2
Image#1
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Bootrom, Image#1, or Image#2 to view information on the
firmware and software used by the modem.
Utility: Firmware Information Bootrom

Bootrom:
10/18/07
FW-00000291.1.1
This screen displays the Bootrom release date, the Firmware number and the revision number.
545

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Utility: Firmware Information Image#X

Image#X: Bulk App M&C Mod Demod Decoder
Filters TxIntfc RxIntfc Turbo
(E)
Where Image #X denotes selection of Image#1 or Image#2, both images display similar
information the Firmware number with revision letter (shown as x), its release date
(shown as MM/DD/YY), and version (shown as #.#.#) may differ for each firmware load.
Information is displayed as follows:
Image#X Item
Example
Bulk
(The bulk is the sum of all the individual pieces) FW-0000030x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
App
FW-0000031 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
M&C
FW-0000032 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
Mod
FW-0000033 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
Demod
FW-0000034 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
Decoder
FW-0000038 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
Filters
FW-0000034 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
TxIntfc
FW-0000040 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
RxIntfc
FW-0000041 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
Turbo
FW-0000042 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
Opt
FW-####### x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# (Varies depending on the installed optional interface)
Utility: Firmware Select

Current Active Image#2
Next Reboot Image#1 #2
Select Image #1 or #2, and then press [ENT].
To reboot the modem, cycle the power.
546
(E)

5.2.7.10
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Utility: FAST
FAST: Configuration
View Options
S/N 000000012
(E)
Select Configuration or View Options, and then press [ENT].
Utility: FAST Configuration

FAST Configuration:
Demo Mode
Enter New FAST Codes

(E)
Select New FAST Codes or Demo Mode, and then press [ENT].
Option
Description
New FAST Codes
This is a 20-digit code, purchased from Comtech EF Data, which permits upgrading the
modem functionality.
Legal characters are hexadecimal, 0-F.
Demo Mode
This Comtech EF Data feature allows the user to try out any capability of the installed
hardware for up to 168 hours (seven 24-hour days).
Utility: FAST View Options

View Options: 01
Installed
Full Range Data Rate
Use the arrow keys to list the options that the modem supports, and identify whether or not
they are installed/enabled. There are 27 options, listed as 01 27:
FAST Option
Description
01
Modem Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
02
8PSK/8QAM modulation
03
16QAM modulation
04
16APSK/32APSK Modulation
05
AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) Overhead
06
ASYNC ESC
07
Reed-Solomon Coding
08
Turbo FEC Option
09
Adv FEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
10
Network Processor I/F Card (Module)
11
Sequential Encode/Decoder
12
TRANSEC Module
547

FAST Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
13
Carrier-In-Carrier Date Rate: Not Installed, 512 kbps, 1Mbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10
Mbps, 15 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 25 Mbps, 30 Mbps, 40 Mbps, 51.84 Mbps, <70 Mbps
14
NP QOS
15
NP Management Security
16
NP Vipersat
17
Demodulator Only
18
Asymmetrical Rx Data Rate: 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
19
TRANSEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
20
Vipersat Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
21
NP OW Serial Commands
22
NP BPM Mode
23
Customer Options
24
NP Antenna Handover
25
LDPC FEC Option
26
Extended Temperature Range (FUTURE)
27
Spectrum Spreading
548
Chapter 6. ETHERNET-BASED
MANAGEMENT
6.1
Introduction
The base SLM-5650A Satellite Modem features an RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet management
interface for the purpose of non-secure monitor and control (M&C) of the modem.
Installation of the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface and/or TRANSEC Module Interface
adds security layers to network management that serve to expand or restrict the available modem
M&C parameters.
This chapter provides an overview of the functionality provided by this interface under all
configurations, and references other chapters for further details.
6.2
Ethernet Management Interface Protocols

A Windows-based user PC facilitates Ethernet-based remote monitor and control (M&C) of the
SLM-5650A through four separately-operated management protocols:
SSH (Secure Shell) Interface. This interface is used for secure remote product M&C
(for optional NP Interface and optional TRANSEC Module Interface operations only).
Web Server (HTTP or HTTPS) Interface. The non-secure (HTTP) or secure (HTTPS)
interface requires a compatible user-supplied web browser such as Internet Explorer.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) with Public and Private MIB. This
interface requires a user-supplied Network Management System (NMS) and a usersupplied Management Information Base (MIB) File Browser.
Telnet Interface. This non-secure interface requires use of the user PCs Command-line
interface, or a user-supplied terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal.
61

Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.2.1 Ethernet-Based Management via Secure Management Interfaces

The varying degrees of Ethernet Management are dependent on the modem configuration The
SLM-5650As Management Security option requires the Network Processor (NP) Interface
and/or the TRANSEC Module to be installed in the SLM-5650A Base Modem.
1. Base Modem The Management Security option is not available for the Base Modem-only
configuration:
Non-secure serial-based network management is allowed via Telnet, using the Base
Modems J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type DB-9F serial port and the menu-driven
Command Line Interface (CLI).
Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is allowable via the HTTP (nonsecure) Web browser and SNMPv2 interfaces, using the Base Modems J5 Ethernet
RJ-45 port.
2. Base Modem + optional NP Interface When the optional NP Interface is installed in the
SLM-5650A without the optional TRANSEC Module Interface, Management Security is
optional and the following secure network management operating alternatives apply:
When Management Security is disabled (i.e., Low Level Security is selected):

o
Non-secure serial-based network management is allowed for the Base Modem via
Telnet, using the J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type DB-9F serial port and the menudriven Command Line Interface (CLI).
Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over the NP Interface

using the HTTP (non-secure) Web browser and SNMPv2.
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem M&C
parameters are available via the NP HTTP Interface. Similarly, a limited number of
status-only NP parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.
When the modem is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode or
Dynamic Point-to-Point (DPP) Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4
transparently bridge data traffic, and network management is only possible using the
Base Modems J5 Ethernet port.
When Management Security is enabled (i.e., High Level Security is selected):

o
Secure network management is supported by the NP Interface, but not by the Base
Modem. The Base Modems J5 Ethernet port (external Ethernet connectivity to the
Base Modem) is disabled.
Secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over HTTPS via Secure

Socket Layer (SSL); Secure Shell (SSH) menu-driven Command Line Interface
(CLI); and SNMPv3.
62

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem parameters
are available via the NP HTTPS Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only
NP parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.
When the modem is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode or
Dynamic Point-to-Point (DPP) Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4
J5 Ethernet port on the Base Modem.
When the modem is operating in (Static) Bridge Mode, Ethernet communication
between the Base Modem and the NP Interface is disabled, as the Base Modem does
not support secure network management interfaces.
3. Base Modem + optional NP Interface + optional TRANSEC Module When the optional
NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the optional TRANSEC Module
Interface, and Management Security is enabled, the network management operating
restrictions as previously described (i.e., when High Level Security is selected) therefore
always apply. Additionally, the NP HTTPS Interface provides a status parameter associated
with the TRANSEC Module a second TRANSEC Key.
The TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base
Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC Module therefore
enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters securely through this
indirect proxy connection. The Secure Management interfaces supported by this configuration are
summarized as follows:
Base Modem
Network Processor
TRANSEC Module
HTTPS Proxy via TRANSEC Module
HTTPS
SSH
SNMPv3
HTTPS (Proxy via TRANSEC Module)
HTTPS
SSH
63

6.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
HTTP/HTTPS (Web Server) Interfaces

The SLM-5650As embedded Web Server application provides the user with an easy to use
interface to configure and monitor all aspects of the modem. At present, three independent Web
Server Interfaces are available for the SLM-5650A, each designed for optimal performance when
using the supported browsers:
SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface (standard) Requires Microsofts Internet

Explorer 5.5 (or higher) via HTTP.
Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE
Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface (optional) Available when the

optional Network Processor (NP) Interface is installed. This interface requires
Microsofts Internet Explorer 7.0 (or higher) and Mozilla Firefox 2.0 (or higher), via
HTTP or HTTPS (depending on the interfaces security level setting).
Chapter 8.5 NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) HTTP/HTTPS INTERFACE
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface (optional) Available when the optional

TRANSEC Module is installed. This interface requires Microsofts Internet Explorer 7.0
(or higher) and Mozilla Firefox 2.0 (or higher), via HTTPS.
Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE
All Web Server Interfaces are accessible by typing (depending on the interface and/or
management mode) http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx or https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx into the browsers
Address box (where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the modem or optional installed
interface):
For all interfaces, the user is prompted to type in a valid User name
and Password, whether via an integrated Web page or a dialog box
similar to the one shown to the right. For all interfaces, the default
for both is comtech.
64

6.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
SNMP Interface
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet-standard protocol for managing
devices on IP networks. An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components:
The managed device. This includes the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
The SNMP Agent. The software that runs on the SLM-5650A. The SLM-5650A SNMP
Agent supports SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3.
The user-supplied Network Management System (NMS). The software that runs on
the manager.
6.4.1 Management Information Base (MIB) Files

MIB files are used for SNMP remote management of a unique device. A MIB file consists of a
tree of nodes called Object Identifiers (OIDs). Each OID provides remote management of a
particular function. These MIB files should be compiled in a user-supplied MIB Browser or
SNMP Network Monitoring System server.
The following MIB files are associated with the SLM-5650A:
MIB File/Name
( x indicates revision letter)
fw10874-2x.mib
ComtechEFData MIB file
Description
ComtechEFData MIB file gives the root tree for ALL Comtech EF Data products and
consists of only the following OID:
Name: comtechEFData
Type: MODULE-IDENTITY
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247
Full path:
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).comtechEFData(6247)
Module: ComtechEFData
FW-0000049x.mib
SLM-5650A OID MIB File
MIB file consists of all of the OIDs for management of the modem functions.
FW-0000050x.mib
SLM-5650A Traps MIB file
Trap MIB file is provided for SNMPv1 traps common for base modems.
6.4.2 SNMP Community Strings

In SNMP v1/v2c, the SNMP Community String is sent unencrypted in the SNMP
packets. Caution must be taken by the network administrator to ensure that
SNMP packets travel only over a secure and private network if security is a
concern.
The SLM-5650A uses Community Strings as a password scheme that provides authentication
before gaining access to the modem agents MIBs. They are used to authenticate users and
determine access privileges to the SNMP agent.
65

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Type the SNMP Community String into the user-supplied MIB Browser or Network Node
Management software.
The user defines three Community Strings for SNMP access:
Read Community
default = public
Write Community default = private
Trap Community
default = comtech
Note: Maximum number of characters for community strings shall not exceed 20. All printable
ASCII characters, except \ and ~ are allowed. No trailing spaces for community strings.
For proper SNMP operation, the SLM-5650A MIB files must be used with the
associated version of the SLM-5650A base modem M&C. Please refer to the
SLM-5650A SW Release Notes for information on the required FW/SW compatibility.
6.4.3 SNMP Traps

These include unit faults, TX faults, and RX faults. A trap is sent both when a fault occurs and is
cleared.
The Traps file only needs to be compiled if SNMPv1 traps are to be used. SNMPv3 does not
currently support traps. Which style of traps the modem sends can be configured by the user
using the slm5650SNMPTrapVersion OID.
The modem supports the following MIB2 SNMPv1traps / SNMPv2 notifications:
MIB2 SNMPv1 trap: Authentication Failure
MIB2 SNMPv2 notifications: Authentication Failure
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
The modem supports the following Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps / SNMPv2 notifications:
Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps
slm5650TxTrafficAlarmV1
6247472
slm5650UnitAlarmV1
6247471
slm5650RedundancyStateV1
6247473
6247474
Alarms and Faults SNMPv2 notification

slm5650UnitAlarmV2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.1
slm5650TxTrafficAlarmV2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.2
slm5650RxTrafficAlarmV2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.4
66

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.4.4 SNMPv3 (NP Interface Only)

When the optional Network Processor (NP)
Interface is installed, the user may activate the
SNMPv3 option by changing the interfaces IP
Interface Security Mode security level setting to
"High". While in this mode, SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2c will not function. Instead of using the
public and private community strings identified
in Chapter Sect. 6.4.2, a username and
password are defined and used to authenticate
and encrypt SNMP communication to and from
the modem.
Four parameters are available to configure SNMPv3 on the NP Interfaces Admin | SNMP Web
page:
Engine ID a 5 to 32character length hex number that is used to encrypt/decrypt the

SNMP data. The default Engine ID is 0000000c000000007f000001.
User Name A user-defined string used to authenticate SNMP communications (the

default is comtech).
Password A user-defined string used to authenticate SNMP communications ( the

default is comtech).
Security Model Using the drop-down menu, the user has a choice between two
security models to authenticate communications: md5 and sha (the default is md5).
Note the following:

1. Although the customer can choose the security model used, there is no choice on the
encryption method data is always encrypted using DESC as a scheme.
2. The User Name and Password defined here are the ones used in an SNMP client, and are
separate from the user name/password used to access the SLM-5650A HTTP/HTTPS/Telnet
interfaces.
3. It is not necessary to change the Engine ID to have an acceptable level of encryption.
However, it should be noted that changing the Engine ID does affect the generation of
authentication keys.
67

6.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Telnet Interface
See Chapter 9. NP INTERFACE TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION for further details on
operations via this non-secure interface.
A Telnet interface is provided for the purpose of Equipment M&C via the standard Remote
Control protocol. The Telnet interface requires login at the Administrator and Read/Write User
Access Levels.
An example of the login
process is shown in this
example to the right:
Once logged into the Telnet

interface, the standard remote
control interface (as defined in
Appendix C. REMOTE
CONTROL) is accessible as
shown in this next example:
68

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.5.1 Telnet Operation via HyperTerminal

There is a disadvantage when using Windows Command-line as a Telnet client. Since Commandline cannot translate a \r (i.e., carriage return or CR) to a \r\n (i.e., CR+line feed LF) for
the messages coming from Telnet Server, any multi-line Target-to-Controller response (e.g., the
response to the FRW? query) will be displayed as one line, with the latter lines overwriting the
previous lines.
In order to view the full response messages, CEFD recommends using HyperTerminal configured
as Telnet Client. To do so, configure HyperTerminal as follows:
1. Ensure that connection is made
using TCP/IP (Winsock) instead
of COM1 or COM2, as shown in
the example to the near right.
2. ASCII Setup (File Properties
Settings ASCII Setup):
Check the "Send line ends with
line feeds" option in the ASCII
Sending section and the
Append line feeds to incoming
line ends" option in the ASCII
Receiving section, as shown in the example to the far right.
Examples of login and remote command/query execution, when using HyperTerminal as the
interface, appear as follows:
5650A00000000000000
The Telnet interface is also available for use with the menu-driven Command Line Interface
(CLI) provided with the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface but only when the security
level setting for the NP Interface has been set as Low.
69

6.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
SSH (Secure Shell) Interface

See Chapter 9. NP INTERFACE TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION or Chapter 11.
TRANSEC MODULE SSH CLI OPERATION for further details on operations via this
secure interface.
When the modem is equipped with the optional NP or TRANSEC Module Interfaces, the security
and encryption features for either require that administrative maintenance and control operations
are accomplished using a Secure Shell (SSH) Command Line Interface (CLI).
For demonstration purposes, this manual uses PuTTY, a free and open source
terminal emulator application used as a serial console client for SSH, Telnet, rlogin
and raw TCP computing protocols. While the TRANSEC Module CLI main and nested
screens will be identical across terminal emulator applications, setup may differ slightly
the chapter assumes users familiarity with their preferred SSH interface.
To initiate a SSH CLI session:

1. From the SSH terminal emulation programs
folder, double-click the program filename (e.g.,
putty.exe), shortcut, icon, etc. to open the SSH
application and its configuration window.
2. (Using PuTTY as the example program) Type in
the IP address of the NP Module or TRANSEC
Module interface (in the example to the right, the
Host Name (or IP Address) window) and select
SSH as the Connection Type.
3. Click Open to open the session. The session login
window will appear as per the first example
shown below (the default for both user name and
password is comtech).
4. Once the login is accepted, the user is granted access to the CLI as per the second example
shown below.
610
Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP

INTERFACE
7.1
Overview
This chapter describes the functionality of the SLM-5650As Base Modem HTTP Interface. The
operational parameters available from this non-secure interfaces HTTP pages complement
operation of the SLM-5650As front panel menus.
7.2
Base Modem HTTP Interface Introduction

A user-supplied web browser allows the full monitor and control (M&C) of the SLM-5650A from
its Base Modem HTTP Interface. The SLM-5650As embedded web applications are designed
for, and work best with, Microsofts Internet Explorer Version 5.5 or higher (the examples shown
use Internet Explorer Version 7.0).
See Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION and the Remote Commands Specifications
tables found in Appendix D. REMOTE CONTROL for detailed descriptions of the
configuration parameters featured on the individual HTTP pages shown in this chapter.
7.2.1
HTTP Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces

Chapter 8.6 NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) HTTP/HTTPS INTERFACE
Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE
The Management Security option is not available for the SLM-5650As base modem operations.
Non-secure network management operations therefore apply as follows:
Non-secure Serial-based network management is allowed via Telnet, using the Base
Modems J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type DB-9F serial port.
Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is allowable via the HTTP Interface

browser and SNMPv2 interfaces, using the Base Modems J5 Ethernet RJ-45 port.
For modems with installed upgrades (i.e., the Network Processor (NP) Interface and/or the
TRANSEC Module Interface), enhanced Web interface functionality is afforded through the
dedicated HTTP/HTTPS interfaces provided with those upgrades. The NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface, specifically, is designed to be used as an enhanced version of the Base Modem HTTP
Interface featured in this chapter.
71

Base Modem HTTP Interface
7.2.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
User Login
To initiate a standard HTTP session over the Base Modem HTTP Interface: From the PC
type http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address of the SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem) into the Address area of the Web browser:
You are then prompted to type in a valid User name and Password,
similar to the dialog box shown to the right. For all interfaces, the
default for both is comtech.
Type the User name and Password, and then click [OK].
Once the valid User name and Password is accepted, the browser window displays the
SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface splash (Home) page:
72

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.2.3
HTTP Interface Operational Features
7.2.3.1
Navigation
This manual uses a naming format for all HTTP pages to indicate the depth of navigation needed
to view the referenced page: Top Level Tab | HTTP Page Hyperlink.
For example: Home | Support is interpreted to mean first click the top-level Home
navigation tab; then, click the Support page hyperlink.
Roll the cursor over the navigation tabs located at the top
of each page, and then select from the available hyperlinks.
7.2.3.2
HTTP Page Sections
Each page is divided into operational content sections.

Whether there is one section to a page, or there are multiple
sections, the title at the upper-left corner of each page and
its sections provide a reference to its operational features.
This manual explains the purpose and operation for each HTTP page on a per-page, per-section
basis. For detailed information, see Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION or Appendix
C. REMOTE CONTROL.
7.2.3.3
Execution Buttons
Configuration changes generally do not take effect until a selection has been
saved to Flash memory. There may be anywhere from one execution button
per page up to multiple execution buttons within a page section. The label
for each of these buttons is generally self-explanatory, e.g., [Submit],
[Clear], [Refresh], etc.
All execution buttons serve the same purpose to save the configuration changes to Flash
memory, or to execute an update of the active page display.
Always make sure to click the execution button before selecting another HTTP
page. Any changes made on that previous page will not be saved if the execution
button for those functions is not clicked.
73

7.2.3.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Feature Selection
Drop-down menus provide access to multiple setting

selections, where available, for a specific function. Move
the cursor to the drop-down tab, and then left-click the tab.
The drop-down will open and list the available selections.
Move the cursor to the desired choice and then left-click
once again to select that choice.
7.2.3.5
Text or Data Entry
Text boxes are provided any time an alphanumeric entry is required for access or configuration.
Move the cursor to the text box, and then left-click
anywhere inside the box. Then, use the keyboard to type in
the desired alphanumeric string. Press Enter when done.
7.2.4
HTTP Interface Menu Tree

The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the Base Modem HTTP Interface:
Home
Admin
Config Mdm
Stats
Maint
Home
Access
Page 1
Modem Status
Unit Info
Contact
Remote
Page 2
Event Log
Page 3
Statistics
Spreading
Config Log
AUPC
Router Stats
Support
Ether Stats
This interface provides access to five navigation tabs (shown in blue):
Home
Admin (Administration
Stats
Maint (Maintenance)
Config Mdm (Modem Configuration)
Beyond this top-level row of navigation tabs, the diagram illustrates the available nested
hyperlinks (shown in grey) that afford more specific user functionality.
Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
74

7.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface Page Descriptions
7.3.1
Home pages
Select the Home, Contact, or Support hyperlink to continue.
7.3.1.1
Home | Home
From any location within the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface, click the Home top
navigation tab and/or the nested hyperlink to return back to this top-level page. Use this page to
identify the product and its current operating firmware version.
Figure 7-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Home page
75

7.3.1.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Home | Contact
Use this page to reference the basic contact information needed to reach Comtech EF Data Sales
and Customer Support via phone, fax, or Web/e-mail hyperlinks.
Figure 7-2. Home | Contact page
76

7.3.1.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Home | Support
For this page to operate correctly, the modems administrator is required to specify
the SMTP server, domain name, and destination on the Admin | Access page (see
Chapter Sect. 7.3.2.1).
This page uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) to compose and send an e-mail message
to Comtech EF Data Modem Support (cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com). Use this
communications portal for questions about or problems with the modem.
Figure 7-3. Home | Support page
Contact Information
Use this section to provide your contact information to Comtech EF Data.
Problem Report
Use this section to compose the required message up to 256 characters maximum are permitted.
Once the desired message is created (and the pertinent Contact Information has been filled in),
click [Submit Email] to send the message.
77

7.3.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin pages
The Administrator may use these pages to: Set up user names, passwords, the e-mail server, and
the host IP Addresses as required to facilitate communication with the SLM-5650A Base Modem
HTTP Interface.
The Admin pages are available only to users who have logged in using the
Administrator Name and Password.
Click the Access or Remote hyperlink to continue.
7.3.2.1
Admin | Access
Figure 7-4. Admin | Access page

Click [Submit Admin] once the desired configuration settings have been made on this page.
78

7.3.2.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin | Remote
Chapter 6.4 SNMP INTERFACE
Use this page to set and return administration information for the SLM-5650A Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) feature.
Figure 7-5. Admin | Remote page

Click [Submit Admin] to save any changes made on this page.
79

7.3.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Config Mdm (Modem Configuration) pages

The Config Mdm pages are used to configure the Modulator, Demodulator, and installed
interfaces (e.g., EIA-530, HSSI, Balanced and Unbalanced G.703, Gigabit Ethernet, Network
Processor, and LVDS).
Select the Page 1, Page 2, Page 3, Spreading, or AUPC hyperlink to continue.
7.3.3.1
Config Mdm | Page 1
Use this page to configure modem configuration parameters including Modem Operating Mode;
Transmit/Receive; Tx Power Level; and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC).
Figure 7-6. Config Mdm | Modem Config (Page 1)

Click [Submit] as needed in each section to save any changes.
710

7.3.3.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Config Mdm | Page 2
Use this page to configure modem operating parameters, including Date and Time; Redundancy;
Test Mode; Miscellaneous Tx and Rx Parameters; Circuit ID; and Configurations.
Figure 7-7. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities (Page 2)

Click [Submit] as needed in each section to save any changes.
711

7.3.3.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Config Mdm | Page 3 (FAST Feature required)
Use this page to allow configuration when this FAST feature is enabled of the optional
Antenna Handover feature.
Figure 7-8. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities (Page 3)

Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page.
712

7.3.3.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Config Mdm | Spreading (FAST Feature required)

Section D.9 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) in Appendix D. MODEM
OPTIONS
Use this page to allow configuration when this FAST feature is enabled of the optional Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) spectrum spreading and anti-jamming applications.
Figure 7-9. Config Mdm | Spreading page
713

7.3.3.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Config Mdm | AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control)
Use this page to enable the Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) feature.
Figure 7-10. Config Mdm | Automatic Uplink Power Control page

AUPC enables the modem to automatically adjust its output power to maintain as constant the
Eb/No of the remote end of the satellite link. This provides protection against rain fading, a
particularly severe problem with Ku-Band links.
You must use the AUPC mode of operation to accomplish this protective adjustment. With
AUPC mode enabled, the distant end modem constantly sends back information about the
demodulator Eb/No, using reserved bytes in the overhead structure. The local modem uses Eb/No
to adjust its output power, and a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link.
714

7.3.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats (Statistics) pages

The Stats (Statistics) pages provide read-only status windows: General operating and
configuration information about the modem; Installed Options (FAST, assorted Interface
modules, etc.); Alarms; Tx and Rx Parameters; and Ethernet information.
Select the Modem Status, Event Log, Statistics, Config Log, Router Stats, or Ether Stats
hyperlink to continue.
7.3.4.1
Stats | Modem Status
Use this read-only page to view the modems current configuration and operation parameters:
General Information
Installed Options
Live Faults
Rx Parameters
Modem Symbol Rates
Assigned Ethernet MAC and IP Addresses.
Figure 7-11. Stats | Modem Status page
715

7.3.4.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | Event Log
Use this read-only page to view a scrollable display of recorded modem events.
Figure 7-12. Stats | Modem Event Log page
Modem Event Log
(Event #) Date / Time: The first three columns display the event by the order in which it was
logged, along with the date and time the event was recorded.
Type: The event is identified by its type in this column. Four event types are classified:
o
o
o
o
Info
Unit.
Tx Traffic
Rx Traffic.
Code: Click on a hyperlinked fault code to display a page that describes the error code bit
positions.
Click [Refresh] to update the display with the most recently logged events.
Click [Clear Log] to clear the log. Once the log is cleared, the next time [Refresh] is clicked any
new events are logged and numbered beginning with 1.
716

7.3.4.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | Statistics
Use this read-only page view a scrollable display of recorded modem statistics.
Figure 7-13. Stats | Modem Statistics Log page
Modem Statistics Log
(Statistic #) Date / Time: The first three columns display the statistics by the order in which
it was logged, along with the date and time the event was recorded.
Min Eb/No
Avg Eb/No
Click [Refresh] to update the display with the most recently logged statistics.
Click [Clear Log] to clear the log of all visible statistics. Once the log is cleared, the next time
[Refresh] is clicked any new statistics will be logged beginning with the number 1.
717

7.3.4.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | Config Log
Use this read-only page to view a scrollable display of a number of configuration change logs.
Figure 7-14. Stats | Configuration Change Log page
Configuration Change Log

Select a feature to query from the drop-down menu, and then click [Refresh] to display the
attribute statistics for that feature. The available change log pages are as follows:
Logging Off
SNMP.
Front Panel
Telnet.
Serial Remote
NP Mailbox
Web
TRANSEC Mailbox
The visible display provides the selected configuration change log information:
Date / Time / Command
Date / Time / Response
Intf
Click [Clear Log] to clear the visible display.
718

7.3.4.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | Router Stats
Use this read-only page to view statistics for the modem FPGA, and the Ethernet operating
statistics for the modem WAN ports, M&C ports, and when the optional Network Processor (NP)
Interface is installed, the NP Interfaces LAN ports 1 through 4.
Figure 7-15. Stats | Router Statistics page
Router Statistics
Select a feature to query from the drop-down menu, and
then click [Refresh] to display the attribute statistics for
that feature.
In the example shown at right, LAN Port 2 (on the optional
NP Interface) queries, and then displays the most recent
statistics for NP Interface LAN Port 2:
Click [Clear Stats] to reset the statistics counts for the
visible display.
On the next page, Table 7-1 defines the seven selectable pages of statistics available via the dropdown menu.
719

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Table 7-1. Summary of Attributes for Router Stats Pages

Stats Selection / Feature Page
Attribute
FPGA Link Errors
FPGA Overrun Errors
FPGA
FPGA Rx Packet
count
FPGA Overflow Errors
FPGA TX Packet
counts
LAN Port 2
(NP Interface Traffic
Port marked as 2)
(Ethernet)
LAN Port 3
Port marked as 3)
LAN Port 4
Port marked as 4)
Count of received frames that overflowed the HDLC

buffer.
Total Number of transmitted frames.
Total good Ethernet frames received, that is frames
that are not bad frames.
Bad Octets (in)
Total bad Ethernet frames received.
Broadcast (in)
Multicast (in)
Pause (in)
The number of good frames received that have a

Unicast destination GMAC address
The number of good frames received that have a
broadcast destination GMAC address.
The number of good frames that have multicast
destination GMAC address.
Note: this address not included 802.3 Flow Control
messages counted in Pause (In) or does it included
Broadcast frames counted in Broadcast (in).
The number of good Flow Control frames received.
Undersize (In)
Fragments (in)
Oversized (in)
WAN
Jabber (in)
(Traffic port connected
to satellite interface)
Rx Err (in)
Management
(Management port for
accessing M&C)
Total number of received frames.
Good Octets (in)
Unicast (in)
LAN Port 1
Port marked as 1)
Description
The count of received frames that did not match the
proprietary HDLC address, bad HDLC CRC, bad
alignment, and under run.
Count of received frames that exceeded max frame
length of 2K bytes in length.
Total frames received with length of less than 64

octets but with valid FCS.
Total frames received with length of less than 64
octets but with invalid FCS.
Total frames received with length of more than
Maxsize (1643 in bridge mode and 1522 in all other
modes) but with valid FCS.
Total frames received with length of more than
Maxsize (1643 in bridge mode and 1522 in all other
modes) but with invalid FCS.
Total frames received with RxErr signal from PHY.
FCS (in)
Total Frames received with a CRC error not counted

in Fragments (In), Jabber (In) or RxErr (In).
Octets (Out)
Total Ethernet frames sent from this GMAC
Unicast (Out)
Broadcast (out)
Multicast (Out)
720
The number of frames sent that have a Unicast

The number of frames sent that have a Broadcast
The number of frames sent that have a Multicast

7.3.4.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | Ether Stats
Use this read-only page to view the base modems Ethernet statistics. The most commonly used
statistics are provided on pages accessed via the drop-down menu.
Figure 7-16. Stats | Modem Ethernet Statistics page
Modem Ethernet Statistics

Select a page to query from the drop-down menu, and then click [Refresh] to display the attribute
statistics for that feature. The available statistics pages are as follows:
Arp Table
TCP Stats
IP Stats
IP IF Stats
ICMP Stats
ARP Stats
UDP Stats
ENET Stats
For example, if UDP Stats are queried, the resultant statistics appear as follows:
721

7.3.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info

Use this read-only page to view a scrollable status window that contains the modems firmware
information for Boot, Active and Inactive Bulks.
Figure 7-17. Maint | Unit Information page
722
Chapter 8. NETWORK
PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
8.1
Introduction
Figure 8-1. Network Processor (NP) Interface Module

The optional SLM-5650A Network Processor (NP) Interface Module (also referred to as the NP
Interface or the card), shown in Figure 8-1, is Comtech EF Datas third generation IP router
and Ethernet bridge device. The NP Interface supports a number of primary operating modes:
Layer 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode
Layer 2 and Layer 3 SCPC Ethernet BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
Layer 2 and Layer 3 Vipersat BPM Mode
Layer 3 SCPC IP Router Mode
Layer 3 Vipersat STDMA Router Mode
The NP Interface is designed to process more than 150,000 packets per second (pps) in Layer 2,
Layer 3, or BPM mode of operation. It provides four RJ-45 connectors for user data, wired as
described in Table 8-1. The NP Interface also has a single RJ-11 console interface that is
intended only for factory-use initial interface configuration. The Maximum Ethernet Frame size
for the SLM-5650A is 1636 bytes for Bridge Mode or 1514 bytes for Router Mode.
To prevent network failure, there should be no more than one Ethernet
connection to a single external switch at any time.
81

Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
User access to management and control of the NP Interface via the built-in HTTP/HTTPS
Interface or Telnet server (port 23) is possible using the available RJ-45 connectors (see Figure
8-2) as follows:
8.2
When in Router Mode, access is possible using any of the NP Interface RJ-45 Ports 1
through 4.
When in BPM Mode (see Chapter Sect. 8.5), only the base modems J5 Ethernet RJ45 port can be used for management and control.
Functional Hardware Description

The NP Interface employs the very high performance Intel IXP2350 network processor/32-bit
microcontroller with four embedded MicroEngines to perform the high-speed Layer 3 routing
functions.
A functional block diagram is provided in Figure 8-2. The front-end of the NP Interface design
incorporates a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) switch device that provides all Layer 2 management. The
back-end of the NP Interface design incorporates an FPGA to provide the WAN framing and
deframing, plus the interface into the main SLM-5650A modem design.
Figure 8-2. NP Interface Block Diagram
82

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.2.1 Connector Pinout

The LAN interface is comprised of four IEEE 802.3ab 10/100/1000 BaseT copper interfaces via
four female RJ-45 connectors wired as shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1. LAN Interface Connector Pinout (Typical)
8.3
Pin #
Description
Direction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BI_DA+
BI_DABI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DCBI_DBBI_DD+
BI_DD-
Bidirectional
Interface Specifications
8.3.1 Physical Description

Dimensions
4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x 2.16H cm)

SLM-5650A connection: (1) 96-pin DIN receptacle
Connectors
Console interface for board bring-up and factory use only:

(1) RJ-11 connector
LAN interface: (4) RJ-45 female connectors, 100
Indicators
Link Status and Activity Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
8.3.2 General Specifications

Data Framing
10/100/1000 BaseT Interface: RFC-894 Ethernet
Data Framing Format (WAN)
CEFD proprietary
Electrical Properties
Per IEEE 802.3ab
Max Ethernet Frame
1636 Bytes (Bridge mode)

1541 Bytes (Router mode)
Packet Types
Burst, distributed, or IPV4
Signal Types
Serial data
Voltage Level
Per IEEE- 802.3ab
Packet Latency
50 ms maximum
Cable Length, Maximum
100 meters CAT 5 cable, patch cords and connecting hardware, per ISO/IEC
11801:1995 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A (1995)
Hot Pluggable
Card No
Cable Yes
83

8.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
NP Interface Module Removal and Installation
Ensure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the equipment
could result if the unit is powered during module removal or installation.
Care must be taken not to damage the modules components during removal or
installation.
8.4.1 NP Interface Module Removal Procedure

Step
Task
Turn off the power to the modem.
Disconnect the RJ-45 cable(s) from the NP Interface Module.
Loosen the (two) captive thumb screws securing the module to the chassis.
Remove the module by pulling it straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.
8.4.2 NP Interface Module Installation Procedure

Step
Task
Install the NP Interface Module by inserting it straight into the chassis slot, using the chassis
internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.
Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive thumb screws.
Connect the RJ-45 cable(s) to the module.
Turn on the power to the modem.
84

8.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode

Networks where modems traditionally act as routers e.g., Vipersat-based satellite communications
systems and include encryption devices are sometimes incompatible or require difficult and
unwieldy configurations. Additionally, the NP Interface limits the number of allowable route tables.
This, in turn, can limit the overall size of the network, particularly when OSPF (Open Shortest Path
First) dynamic routing protocol is used in the NP Interface.
In order to increase the flexibility and scalability of the satellite network with SLM-5650A
modems, the optional BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode is a feature available with NP
Interface operation whereby Layer 2 and Layer 3 networks can operate simultaneously. When
BPM Mode is selected, users can operate two independent Layer2 networks and one Layer3
network simultaneously without interfering with each other.
See Appendix E. APPLICATION EXAMPLES for in-depth information about using this
optional FAST Feature.
8.6
Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface

The remainder of this chapter describes the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface functionality that not
only integrates a good portion of the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface non-secure
operations (outlined in detail in the previous chapter), but also provide operations unique to the NP
HTTP/HTTPS Interface.
8.6.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Introduction

The pages for the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface have been designed to work using either
Microsofts Internet Explorer Version 7.0 or higher, or Mozilla Firefox Version 2.0 or higher.
(The examples shown in this chapter use Internet Explorer Version 7.0 most, but not all, pages
will display properly with Internet Explorer Version 6.0.)
Operation of the Network Processor may be fully monitored and
controlled from the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface. By rolling the
cursor over the tabs located at the top of each page, the user can
select from the available nested hyperlinks (as shown to the right).
In order to make any Network Processor modifications permanent, all changes made
on any of the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface pages must be saved before rebooting the
unit.
8.6.2 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces

Non-secure and secure network management operations are controlled by the Interface Security
Mode setting provided on the Admin | Security page (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.3 for more
information). Its use is dependent on the options installed in the SLM-5650A Base Modem.
85

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
When the SLM-5650A is equipped with the Network Processor (NP) Interface only, Management
Security is an optional feature.
8.6.2.1
Secure Management NP Interface Only
When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A without the optional TRANSEC
Module Interface, Management Security is optional and the following secure network
management operating alternatives apply:
When Management Security is disabled (i.e., Low Level Security is selected):

o
Non-secure serial-based network management is allowed for the Base Modem via
Telnet, using the J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type DB-9F serial port and the menudriven Command Line Interface (CLI).
Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over the NP Interface

using the HTTP (non-secure) Web browser and SNMPv2.
When the modem is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) or Dynamic
Point-to-Point (DPP) Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently
bridge data traffic, and network management is only possible using the Base
Modems J5 Ethernet port.
When Management Security is enabled (i.e., High Level Security is selected):

o
Secure network management is supported by the NP Interface, but not by the Base
Modem. The Base Modems J5 Ethernet port (external Ethernet connectivity to the
Base Modem) is disabled.
Secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over HTTPS via Secure

Socket Layer (SSL); Secure Shell (SSH) menu-driven Command Line Interface
(CLI); and SNMPv3.
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem parameters
are available via the NP HTTPS Interface.
When the modem is operating in BPM or DPP Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1
through P4 transparently bridge data traffic, and network management is only
possible using the J5 Ethernet port on the Base Modem.
When the modem is operating in (Static) Bridge Mode, Ethernet communication
between the Base Modem and the NP Interface is disabled, as the Base Modem does
not support secure network management interfaces.
86

8.6.2.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Secure Management NP Interface PLUS TRANSEC Module

Interface
When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the optional
TRANSEC Module Interface and with Management Security enabled. The network management
operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when High Level Security is selected)
therefore always apply. Additionally, the NP HTTPS Interface provides a status parameter
associated with the TRANSEC Module a second TRANSEC Key.
The TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base
Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC Module therefore
enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters securely through this
indirect proxy connection. The Secure Management interfaces supported by this configuration are
summarized as follows:
Base Modem
Network Processor Interface
TRANSEC Module
HTTPS
SSH
SNMPv3
HTTPS
SSH
8.6.3 User Login

Access to the SLM-5650As NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface depends on the IP Interface Security
Mode setting selected for the interface (via the Admin | Security page see Chapter Sect.
8.6.6.2.3 for more information).
From any compatible Web browser, enter the NP Interface IP Address into the browsers
Address area as follows (where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP Address of the NP Interface):
For non-secure HTTP session (Low Level Security selected) http:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx;
For secure HTTPS session (High Level Security selected) https:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
When prompted, type in a valid User Name and Password,

similar to the dialog box shown to the right. The default for
both is comtech. Click [OK] to continue.
Note: The NP Interface User Name and Password are each
restricted to a minimum of 7 characters and a maximum of 25
characters, excluding < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62),
(ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
87

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Once the valid User Name and

Password is accepted, the NP
HTTP/HTTPS Interface displays its
splash page similar to the example
shown at right:
8.6.4 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Operational Features

See Sect. 7.2.3 HTTP Interface Operational Features for an overview of the navigational and
operational features common with using this interface.
8.6.5 HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree

The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface:
Info
Admin
Modem
LAN
WAN
Routing
Stats
Vipersat*
Redundancy
Save
Home
Vipersat
Mode*
Config
Interface
QoS*
Routes
Ethernet
Tx
Vipersat
1:1
Redundancy
Save
Contact
FAST
Features
Monitor
Ethernet
Ports
QoS
Stats*
OSPF
Ethernet
Rx
STDMA
Logoff
Security
Events
ARP
Loopback
Test
IGMP
IP
Stats
SNMP
Stats
WAN
Switching
Upgrade
Utility
Clear All
DPC
Home
State
Defaults
Time
Event Log
Reboot
This interface provides access to up to 10 navigation tabs (shown in blue). The diagram further
illustrates each tabs available nested hyperlinks (shown in grey), which afford more specific
functionality.
Info
Admin
Modem
LAN
WAN
Routing
Stats
Vipersat*
Redundancy
Save
88

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Note: * indicates a FAST Feature that is available on the interface only after that option has been
purchased. Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information.
8.6.6 HTTP/HTTPS Page Descriptions

8.6.6.1
Info (Information) pages
Select the Home, Contact, or Logoff hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.1.1
Info | Home
Use this page to identify pertinent information about the SLM-5650A NP Interface, including the
installed firmware for the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2.
Figure 8-3. Info | Home Page
89

8.6.6.1.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Info | Contact
Use this page to reference basic contact information needed to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and
Customer Support via phone, fax, or Web/e-mail hyperlinks
Figure 8-4. Info | Contact page
8.6.6.1.3
Info | Log Off
Use this page to formally disconnect from the interface.
Figure 8-5. Info | Logoff page

At the prompt, click [YES, Logoff Now] to execute the logoff process.
Upon disconnection, you will be required to close the Web browser in order to delete
the Network Processors security cookie.
810

8.6.6.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin (Administration) pages
Depending on the enabled features and options, select the Vipersat Mode, FAST Features,
Security, SNMP, Upgrade, Defaults, Time, Event Log, or Reboot hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.2.1
Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Feature required)
Use this page to specify how the modem/NP Interface is to behave in Vipersat or non-Vipersat
working modes. Once the role of a particular modem in the network is determined, this single
point of configuration is intended to simplify deployment.
Figure 8-6. Admin | Vipersat Mode page
Vipersat Modes
Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A
Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for configuration and use of these optional
features.
This FAST Feature-enabled page allows the user to select the following Vipersat modes:
Vipersat Hub Router
Vipersat Hub Expansion Router
Vipersat Remote Router
Vipersat Remote Expansion Router
811

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Non-Vipersat Multipoint Modes

Item
Multipoint Hub Router
Multipoint Remote Router
Description
When in static SCPC (non-Vipersat mode), the option exists for configuring the
modems into a hub and spoke network with a shared outbound at the hub. All of the
modems at the hub should be put in Multipoint Hub Router mode.
Note: If a modem at the remote is configured to be a Hub router there will be
significant degradation to network performance due to the potential for routing loops.
Select Multipoint Remote Router for all remote modems in a non-Vipersat multipoint
network. A Remote router would be classified as a modem which receives the shared
outbound and transmits back to the hub on a dedicated SCPC channel
Non-Vipersat Point-to-Point Mode

Item
Point-to-Point Router
Description
Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link where there are different IP subnets on
either side of the link.
Routing Mode
Item
Description
Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link when you wish to bridge traffic (no IP
network routing).
Gigabit Ethernet Bridge
Note: This mode is currently only compatible with the Gigabit Ethernet bridge card for the
SLM-5650A. Ethernet communication between the Base Modem and the NP Interface
is disabled, as the Base Modem does not support secure network management
interfaces
When BPM Mode is selected, the NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4
Base Modems J5 Ethernet port.
Router
BPM
Note: In BPM Mode, the Gigabit Ethernet Bridge option becomes inaccessible and the
appearance of the Routing Mode section changes as follows:
Click [Submit] once the appropriate Vipersat or non-Vipersat operating mode is selected on this
page.
812

8.6.6.2.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin | FAST Features
This section describes the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface with Vipersat, Quality of Service (QoS),
and Management Security installed on the SLM-5650A.
If the SLM-5650A does not have these QoS or Vipersat FAST options installed, the
QoS and QoS Stats hyperlinks located under the WAN navigation tab, and the
hyperlinks located under the Vipersat navigation tab will not be visible/available to the
user.
If the SLM-5650A does not have the Management Security FAST option installed, the
IP Interface Security Mode and SSH sections on the Admin | Security page and the
SNMP v3 section on the Admin | SNMP page will not be visible.
This read-only page displays available FAST Features as Installed or Not Installed.
Figure 8-7. Admin | FAST Features page
Network Processor and Modem FAST Features

Comtech EF Data offers Vipersat, Management Security, NP BPM, Quality of Service (QoS),
NP OW Serial Commands, and NP Antenna Handover functionality as optional FAST
Features for the NP Interface. The modems Demodulator Only FAST feature status is also
provided. To install these options, a modem FAST code must be purchased by contacting
Comtech EF Data Customer Support.
Once the 20-digit modem FAST code is obtained, the purchased FAST Feature(s) is installed via
the SLM-5650A front panel (Utility: FAST Configuration Enter modem code).
See Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed information on installing FAST
Features.
Upgrading the FAST features requires a modem reboot in order for FAST features to
be activated, and may require reconfiguration of all modem parameters.
813

8.6.6.2.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin | Security (Account Information)
The Admin user may use this page to control access to all base modem HTTP and NP Interface
HTTP/HTTPS pages. However, the Admin user does not have access to the optional TRANSEC
Module parameters; this functionality is only available via the Crypto Officer login provided
separately on the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface. See Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE
HTTPS INTERFACE for further information.
Figure 8-8. Admin | Security (Management Security) page
Admin Account Info

The login process requires a name and password as defined by the systems administrator of the
controlling equipment. This name and password is associated to the name and password of an
administrator account. Set the desired Admin User Name and Admin Password for the
administrator account, and then click [Submit] to apply these settings.
Note: The Admin User Name and Password settings are maintained separately from the IP
Interface Security Mode and SSH sections on this page.
IP Interface Security Mode

The desired IP Interface Security Mode can be set to either Low Level Security for HTTP/FTP/
SNMP/Telnet access, or High Level Security for HTTPS/SSH (Secure Shell) access only. Click
[Submit] to apply this setting. More specifically:
When Management Security is set to Low Level Security, the NP Interface can be
managed by non-secure protocols such as HTTP and Telnet.
When Management Security is set to High Level Security, the following restrictions
apply:
814

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The NP Interface can ONLY be managed via the secure HTTPS protocol the
the https:// address prefix must be specified in order to connect to the secure NP
HTTPS Interface.
Access via Telnet is not permitted however, while access to the CLI is not
permitted via the Telnet interface, the CLI is accessible via the SSH interface;
Access to the SLM-5650A HTTP and FTP server is disabled since non-secure
protocols are used.
Management Security can also be changed via the SLM-5650A front panel:
SELECT: Configuration Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Security
See Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed information on using this modem
control interface.
SSH (Secure Shell)

SSH Host Key: This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the NP when connecting
through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when they connect to a system
for the first time. The host key the SSH client shows can then be compared with the host key the
NP displays to verify that they are the same.
Click [Generate New Host Key] to generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the NP.
After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the NP before will usually note or warn that
the host key has changed when they connect again.
815

8.6.6.2.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin | SNMP
The Admin user may use this page to change the parameters associated with Simple Network
Management Protocol, an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of
management information between network devices. The SLM-5650A SNMP agent supports
SNMPv1, SNMP v2c, and SNMP v3. See Chapter 6.4 SNMP Interface for complete details on
SNMP and using this page.
Figure 8-9. Admin | SNMP page
SNMP
SNMP Read Community and SNMP Write Community cannot be changed; the default for Read
Community default is public; the Write Community default is private.
Click [Submit] to enable the SNMP configuration changes made to Trap Community, Trap,
System Contact, and System Location.
SNMP v3
This section is used to create user accounts under SNMPv3 protocol. SNMPv3 is available only
when the IP Interface Security Mode security level setting is set to High.
Using the provided text boxes, create an Engine ID (the default is 0000000c000000007f000001),
User Name and Password as needed (the default for both is comtech) then, using the available
drop-down menu, select the Security Model algorithm as md5 or sha. Note that this setting must
match the setting in the SNMP client, or the SLM-5650A will not allow communications.
Click [Submit] to enable the SNMP v3 configuration changes made in this section.
816

8.6.6.2.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin | Upgrade
Use this page to review information about and accessibility to the loaded NP Interface and modem
firmware (i.e., the Bootrom and image files), and to upgrade the operational firmware for the interface.
Figure 8-10. Admin | Upgrade page
Network Processor Firmware Info

These fields display the installed NP Interface Firmware (all information is read only):
Item
Network Processor Image 1
Description
A single Bootrom that initializes the hardware and loads the full bulk image as
selected by the user.
A full copy of software image stored in slot 1.
Network Processor Image 2
A full copy of software image stored in slot 2.
Network Processor Bootrom
Modem Firmware Info

These fields display installed SLM-5650A base modem firmware for the Bootrom, Image 1, and
Image 2 (all information is read only).
Upgrade
See Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING for complete details on using the NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface for upgrading the base modem, NP Interface and TRANSEC Module firmware.
817

Item
Current Running
Upgrade To
Upgrade Image File
8.6.6.2.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
(read only) displays current NP Interface Firmware Image as defined on the
Admin | Reboot page (e.g., Image1 or Image2).
(read only) displays the NP Interface Firmware Image that will be overwritten
with the new image as defined on the Admin | Reboot page (e.g., Image1 or
Image2).
Click [Browse] to locate the bulk image on the local computers file system, and
then click [Upload] to upload the image.
Admin | Defaults
Use this page to restore all previously-configured modem parameters with the exception of the
Admin User Name and the Admin Password (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.3) to their Factory
Default Configuration settings.
Figure 8-11. Admin | Defaults (Factory Default Configurations) page

Click [Restore Now] to begin the restoration process.
At the user prompt (shown at right), click OK to
execute the process, or Cancel to abort the command.
818

8.6.6.2.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin | Time (Date and Time)
Figure 8-12. Admin | Time (Date & Time) page
Time Zone
Use the drop-down menu to select the modems time zone, and then click [Submit] to save the
setting.
Internet Time
Use the drop-down menu to select automatic time synchronization (using network time protocol)
as Enabled or Disabled, and then click [Submit] to save the setting.
Internet Time Servers

These fields are editable only when the Internet Time synchronization has been Enabled.
Item
Description
Primary Internet Time Server
IP Address of primary network time server.
Secondary Internet Time Server
IP Address of secondary network time server.
Edit each address as needed, and then click [Submit] to save these settings.
819

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Current Date & Time

Item
Internet Time Status
Description
These fields display the date and time as of the moment this page was accessed.
The current date and time of the modem is set from the modems front panel and
kept current using a battery back-up clock. This means that the date and time will
be correct even if the modem loses power.
This displays the status of network time server (if NTP is enabled).
Update Date & Time
Click [Update Now] to refresh the Current Date and Current Time displays.
Current Date / Current Time
8.6.6.2.8
Admin | Event Log
Use this page to view logged events specific to the NP Interface, and to monitor or troubleshoot the
health of the interface and any issues found in the field.
Figure 8-13. Admin | Event Log page
Clear Event Log

Click [Clear Log] to delete all existing log entries. The event log is reset to one (1) entry:
Eventlog Cleared.
Event Logging
Logging On/Off Enables/disables logging of event messages.
Logging Level Allows the filtering of the highest displayed message level. Choices are
Errors Only, Errors and Warnings, and All Information.
Click [Submit] to execute these settings.
820

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Event Log Table

Column
Index
Type
Date
Time
Category
Description
8.6.6.2.9
Description
Event log entries are numbered in the order they are received.
Describes the severity of the event.
Displays the date that the event was logged. In accordance with European convention, the date is
shown in DAY/MONTH/YEAR format.
Displays the time of day that the event was logged.
For use by Customer Support.
Provides a brief description of the action logged.
Admin | Reboot
Use this page to display the currently available boot images for both the NP Interface and Modem,
or to select from which images the NP Interface and modem will boot.
Figure 8-14. Admin | Reboot page

Once the NP and/or Modem image boot selections are made, [Submit] MUST be
clicked for the boot parameter updates to take effect upon the next reboot.
Network Processor Boot From

Use the drop-down menu to select the Network Processor image to boot from Image 1, Image 2,
or Newest, and then click [Submit] to save the selection.
821

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem Boot From

Use the drop-down menu to select the Modem image to boot from Image 1 or Image 2, and then
click [Submit] to save the selection.
Reboot
Take care to allow time for the Network Processor Boot From or Modem Boot choices
to submit/save to flash memory, and for the Admin | Reboot page to refresh, prior to
executing a modem reboot.
Click [Reboot Now] to cause the entire modem to reboot; this includes the base modem, Network
Processor and TRANSEC Module.
822

8.6.6.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem pages
Use the Modem pages to configure or view the primary Transmit parameters and primary
Receive parameters of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Select the Config, Monitor, Events, Stats, or Utility hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.3.1
Modem | Config (Modem Configuration)
Figure 8-15. Modem | Config (Modem Configuration) page
Modem Operating Mode

Modem Type (read-only)
Modem Type
Description
OM-73
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.
MIL-165A
Functionality defined by MIL-STD-188-165A.
IESS-308
Functionality defined by IESS-308, the Intelsat Intermediate Data Rate standard.
IESS-309
Functionality defined by IESS-309, the Intelsat Business Services standard.
IESS-310
Functionality defined by IESS-310, the Intelsat 8-PSK Intermediate Data Rate standard.
TURBO
Functionality defined by IESS-315 plus Comtech EF Data Turbo mode interoperability.
16-QAM
16-QAM is selected as a modulation type.
AUPC
Automatic Uplink Power Control is used.
TX-BURST
The unit is a Vipersat Remote Modem.
RX-BURST
The unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to Standard.
RX-BURST-FA
The unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to Long.
TURBO-FA
The unit is a Vipersat Hub Expansion Modem.
823

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Reference
Selection
Description
Internal
Internal high stability ovenized 10 MHz oscillator

an external 1 MHz reference, (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal
Ext-1MHz
reference to the 1 MHz)
Ext-5MHz
Ext-10MHz
Click [Submit] to save the desired Reference setting type.
Unit Interface Type (read-only)
Unit Interface Type
Description
Network Processor
Identifies current data interface

Frequency Band
Selection
Description
70/140 MHz
52 88 MHz, 104 176 MHz
L-Band
950 2000 MHz
Click [Submit] to save the desired Frequency Band selection.
Transmit
Selection
Viterbi (standard)
None (standard)
Turbo (optional)
Description
Selection
BPSK
QPSK
OQPSK
8PSK
16QAM (optional)
Description
FEC Type
K = 7 convolutional encoder.
Uncoded.
Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
Modulation Type
Bi Phase Shift Keying

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
8 Phase Shift Keying
16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
FEC Code Rate
Selection
Description
Viterbi
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
Uncoded
1/1
Turbo
5/16, 21/44, 3/4, 7/8, or 17/18

Data Rate (kbps)
Enter a Transmit Data Rate (in kbps).
824

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Frequency (MHz)
Enter the Frequency: (70/140 MHz) 52-88, 104-176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps) or (L-Band) 950-2000 MHz (in 100 Hz
steps)
Spectrum
Selection
Description
Normal
Used to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum
Invert
Scrambler (for energy dispersal)

Selection
Description
V.35
ITU standard
Modified-V.35
Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed Solomon compatible (modified V.35)
IBS
Used for IESS-309 and AUPC operation
Turbo
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block
OM73
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode
Synch
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon.
Off
Tx Power Level (dBm)
Enter a Power Level from 40 dBm to +10 dBm (in 0.1 dB steps).
Carrier
Selection
Description
On
RTS
VSAT
Request to Send. RTS is an interface signaling control. If enabled, RTS can be used to
control the output state of the modulator. Only available when using either the EIA-530 or
HSSI interface.
VSAT mode ties control of the Transmit Signal to the status of the Receiver. If the receiver
is Locked the Transmitter is Enabled. If the receiver is Unlocked the Transmitter will be
disabled.
Off
When changing Modulation Type the data rate must be set to a rate supported by
the modulation type or the change to the modulation type will not be allowed. Some
choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option
is installed or enabled
When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account.
If the modulation type selected is 8-PSK or 16-QAM the minimum data rate allowed
is 256 kbps. When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will
default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps. The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user.
This is helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the selected
modulation type, code rate and overhead.
825

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead and will not
allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the
minimum or maximum IF frequencies.
Click [Transmit Submit] to save the desired configuration settings.
Receive
FEC Type
Selection
Viterbi (standard)
None (standard)
Turbo (optional)
Description
K=7 convolutional encoder.
Uncoded.
Turbo means Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
Selection
BPSK
QPSK
OQPSK
8PSK
16QAM (optional)
Demodulation Type
Description
Bi Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
8 Phase Shift Keying
16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
Selection
Viterbi
Uncoded
Turbo
FEC Code Rate

Description
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
1/1
5/16, 21/44, 3/4, 7/8, or 17/18
Data Rate (kbps)
Enter the Receive Data Rate (in kbps).

Frequency (MHz)
Enter a Frequency (70/140 MHz) 52-88, 104-176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps) or (L-Band) 950-2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
Spectrum
Select
Normal
Invert
Description
Used to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum
Descrambler (for energy dispersal)
Select
V.35
Modified-V.35
Description
ITU standard
Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed Solomon compatible (modified V.35)
826

IBS
Turbo
Select
OM73
Synch
Off
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Used for IESS-309 and AUPC operation

Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block
Descrambler (for energy dispersal) (continued)
Description
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon.
When changing Demodulation type the data rate must be set to a rate supported by
the demodulation type or the change to the demodulation type will not be allowed.
Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an
option is installed or enabled.
account. If the modulation type selected is 8-PSK or 16-QAM the minimum data rate
allowed is 256 kbps. When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data
rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps. The calculated symbol rate is displayed for
the user. This is helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the
selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.
calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead and will not
allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the
minimum or maximum IF frequencies.
Click [Receive Submit] to save the desired configuration settings.
827

8.6.6.3.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem | Monitor (Modem Status)
Use this read-only page to view the currently available modem receive parameters and operating
temperature.
Figure 8-16. Modem | Monitor (Modem Status) page
Receive Parameters
Displays the modems currently reported link values as follows:
Item
Description
BER
Displays the estimated BER based on the demodulators measurement of the carrier to noise.
Displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier.
The range is threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
Displays the received carrier frequency offset in Hz.
The range is the same as the acquisition range of the modem, 60 kHz.
Displays the signal level of the received carrier in dBm.
The range supported is +15 to 60 dBm.
Eb/No
Frequency Offset
Signal Level
Temperature
Reports the temperature of the modem in degrees Celsius.
828

8.6.6.3.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem | Events (Modem Events Log)
Use this read-only page to view operating events. When a fault condition occurs, it is timestamped and put into the log. Similarly, when the fault condition clears, this is also recorded.
Figure 8-17. Modem |Events (Modem Events Log) page
Clear/Refresh Modem Events

Click [Clear] to delete all log entries.
Click [Refresh] to refresh the Event Log to display the most recently recorded events.
Event Log
Column
Description
Index
Displays the internal table index.
Fault Detail
Provides a description of the fault or event.
Date
Date of the log entry (in YY/MM/DD format).
Time
Time of the log entry (in HH:MM:SS format).
829

8.6.6.3.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log)
Figure 8-18. Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) page
Clear/Refresh Modem Statistics

Click [Clear] to delete all log entries.
Click [Refresh] to refresh the Link Statistics Log to display the most recent entries.
Logging Interval
Use the drop-down menu to set the statistics recording interval. Valid settings are from every 10
minutes to every 90 minutes in 10-minute increments, or Disabled.
Click [Submit] to save all changes made to this page.
Link Statistics Log

Displays the following modem statistics (all information is read only):
Column
Description
Index
Displays the internal table index.
Min Eb/No
Minimum measured Eb/N0 during the configured time interval.
Avg Eb/No
Average measured Eb/N0 during the configured time interval.
Date
Date of the log entry (in YY/MM/DD format).
Time
Time of the log entry (in HH:MM:SS format).
830

8.6.6.3.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities)
Figure 8-19. Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities) page
Date and Time

To set the Date and Time of the modem:
Time (HH: MM: SS) Set the hours in 24-hour time format
Date (DD/MM/YY) Set the date in accordance with European convention

(DAY/MONTH/YEAR) format.
Click [Submit] to save any changes made to this section.
Circuit ID
CID Enter a name for the communication link in this text field. This name can be any
combination of alphanumeric characters up to 24 characters in length.
Additional characters supported are: ( ) * + / period (.) comma (,) and [space].
Click [Submit] to save any changes made to this section.
831

8.6.6.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
LAN pages
Select the Interface, Ethernet Ports, or ARP hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.4.1
LAN | Interface
Use this page to set LAN operating parameters, to view the MAC Address of the NP Interface,
and to set the IP Address and Mask of the NP Interface.
Figure 8-20. LAN | Interface page
LAN Interface
Item
Description / Settings
(Read-only) The MAC is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique address that cannot
MAC Address
be modified by the user.
Select Single or Dual. Note the following:
Single: In this mode, Traffic IP Address should used as M&C as well as NextHop
IP Address for adjacent routers.
IP Addressing Mode
Dual: In this mode, Management IP Address is used as M&C access to the NP
Interface, and Traffic IP Address is used as the NextHop IP Address for adjacent
Routers.
This is the IP Address of the NP Interface only. Once set to a valid value, it is the address
Traffic IP Address
that should be used for management and control connectivity as well as the Next Hop
Address.
832

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Item
Traffic Subnet Mask that should be used for management and control connectivity as well as the Next Hop
Address for other routers in the users network based on IP Addressing mode.
The Subnet Mask is used in conjunction with the Traffic IP Address to determine the
Traffic Subnet Mask
subnet locally attached to by the LAN interfaces.
Management IP
that should be used for management and control connectivity when IP Addressing Mode
Address
was set to Dual.
Management
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the Management IP Address to determine
Subnet Mask
the subnet locally attached to by the LAN interfaces.
Click [Submit] to save changes made to any of the above items.
VLAN Port Configuration

Item / Selection
Single Port VLAN
VLAN Port Select
VLAN ID
Using the drop-down menu, select Single Port as Enabled or Disabled. When Single
Port VLAN is Enabled, the SLM-5650As Ethernet port accepts the VLAN-tagged
packets from the NP Interface port specified in the "VLAN Port Select" drop-down.
Using the drop-down menu, select Port 1 through Port 4 to designate the Ethernet port
on which VLAN-tagged packet are ingress and egress.
Enter an ID value from 2 to 4095. Packets containing specified VLAN only will ingress
and egress from the NP Interface port specified in the "VLAN Port Select" drop-down.
Click [Submit] to save the desired Single Port VLAN setting.

When BPM Mode is enabled and any Vipersat
operating mode other than Vipersat Hub or
Vipersat Hub Expansion is selected (see Chapter
Sect. 8.6.6.2.1), the VLAN Port Configuration
portion of the LAN | Interface page becomes
disabled and is not visible, as shown to the right:
However, when BPM Mode is enabled and either

Vipersat Hub or Vipersat Hub Expansion is
selected (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.1), the VLAN
Port Configuration portion of the LAN | Interface
page is replaced with the Multi-TDM Tunneling
Mode controls, as shown to the right:
833

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode (ViperSat Hub or ViperSat Hub Expansion Mode

only)
Multi-TDM Tunneling is a technique where a VLAN tunnel is set up between the Hub unit and
any expansion units that are being used to create an SCPC link with a Remote that is Home Stated
to the specified Hub Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM) Modem.
When an Expansion unit is configured by VMS for an SCPC link, it queries its assigned hub for
the correct VLAN ID. If the feature is turned off, the Hub unit responds with a zero (0). If the
feature is enabled, the Hub will respond with a VLAN tag that is unique on the current LAN
segment.
Select Off, Automatic, or Manual. Note the following:
Selection
Description
Off
In this mode, the feature is not used and there is no VLAN tag used.
In this mode, the Hub generates the VLAN tag from the last 12 bits of its IP Address. In
most cases, this will guarantee a unique value.
This mode SHOULD ONLY BE USED if the network is configured in such a way that two
or more hub units on the LAN segment may have the same value in the low order 12 bits
of their IP Address. Once this mode is selected, a text box will appear to allow entry of a
unique ID in the range from 2 to 4095.
Automatic
Manual
In Manual mode, it is the users responsibility to ensure that each Hub box on the
segment is given a unique value in that range.
Click [Submit] to save the desired Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode setting.
Flow Control Enable

Ethernet Flow Control is a technique by which the receiver sends a message to the sender to
back-off traffic once congestion is encountered.
With Flow Control enabled, the NP Interface monitors the QOS queue depths to identify the
congestion, if any, of the QOS queue sizes. If the queue reaches 90% of the configurable QOS
queue depth, then the interface sends Ethernet Pause Frames (IEEE 802.3) with pass time 0xFFFF
to the LAN ports. Upon dropping all of the QOS depths to 50%, the interface again sends Pause
frames with pass time 0x0000 to resume the traffic back.
Using the drop-down menu, set Flow Control Enable as Enabled or Disabled. Click [Submit]
once this selection has been made.
Click [Submit] to save the desired Flow Control Enable setting.
Proxy ARP Enable

Proxy ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is a technique by which an NP Interface in Router
Mode on a given network answers the ARP queries for a network address that is not on this
network, but is reachable via the NP Interface.
834

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
With Proxy ARP enabled, the NP Interface (in Router Mode) 'snoops' all ARP_REQs; it will
send an ARP_REPLY (one if the ARP_REQ host address is an NP host address that is reachable
via one of the routes in the Route Table).
Using the drop-down menu, set Proxy ARP Enable as Enabled or Disabled. Then, click
Submit] to save the desired Proxy ARP Enable setting.
8.6.6.4.2
LAN | Ethernet Ports
Use this page to view the current status of the Ethernet ports and to set each port to manual or
auto-negotiate configuration. Only the NP Interface Ethernet ports are shown in this screen. The
base modem Ethernet port statistics and port information are set from the modems front panel.
Figure 8-21. LAN | Ethernet Ports page
Ethernet Link Status

This read-only section displays the status for each NP Interface Ethernet port.
Ethernet Speed/Duplex
Use the drop-down menus to configure each port to one of the following states:
Auto
1000 Full
100 Full
10 Full
100 Half
10 Half
Click [Submit] once the Ethernet ports have been configured to suit on this page.
835

8.6.6.4.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
LAN | ARP (ARP Table)
Figure 8-22. LAN | ARP page
ARP Table (Edit Static ARPs)

This table displays all current ARP entries (both Static and Dynamic). The current Static ARPs
may be directly edited here:
Column
Description
Index
Displays the internal table index (read-only, cannot be edited).
IP
Entry IP Address, format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
MAC
Entry MAC Address, format YY:YY:YY:YY:YY:YY
Type
Displays the Entry Type as Static or Dynamic (read-only, cannot be edited)
Click [Submit Changes] to save all changes made in this section.
Add Static ARP

Use this section to directly add a Static ARP entry, and then click [Add Entry] to add the entry.
Note that the index will automatically increment to the next available number.
Delete Static ARP

Enter Entry Index to Delete: Type in the Index number, and then click [Delete Entry] to
execute removal of the entry.
836

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Flush Dynamic ARPs

Click [Flush ARP Table] to execute the command as needed.
8.6.6.5
WAN pages
This section depicts the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface with Quality of Service (QoS) and
Vipersat installed on the SLM-5650A. QoS and Vipersat are FAST Feature options
which must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.2
Admin | FAST Features for more information.
Note that, if the SLM-5650A does not have the QoS option installed, the QoS
hyperlinks outlined in this section will not be visible/available to the user. When QoS
is disabled, a separate QoS status page is shown.
Select the QoS, QoS Stats, or Loopback Test hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.5.1
WAN | QoS (Quality of Service)
Figure 8-23. WAN | Quality of Service page
Quality of Service Feature

Select On or Off, and then click [Submit] to enable/disable the Quality of Service feature.
837

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Differential Services (DiffServ)

The option is available here for configuring each queue to one of the following attributes (the
minimum / maximum value range is shown in brackets):
Service Rate (kbps) [ 0.000 / (Tx Data Rate)]
Med. Drop Precedence (% full) [20 / 90 ]
High Drop Precedence (% full) [10 / 80]
Max Queue Depth (bytes) [1500 / 64000]
Click [Submit] after all values have been adjusted to enable settings.
8.6.6.5.2
WAN | QoS Stats (Quality of Service Statistics)
Figure 8-24. WAN | Quality of Service Statistics page
Clear / Refresh Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Stats

Click [Clear] to clear queue statistics.
Click [Refresh] to update queue statistics.
Differential Services (DiffServ)

This status table displays the following attributes (all information is read only):
838

Column
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
Priority
Per-Hop Behavior (PHB)
Traffic class that determines how packets will be forwarded.
Codepoint (DSCP)
Codepoint value in Type of Service (ToS) byte in IP header.
Sent Packets
Number of packets sent from queue associated with PHB class.
Dropped Packets
Number of packets dropped in queue associated with PHB class.
Queued Packets
Number of packets in queue associated with PHB class.
Queued Bytes
Number of bytes in queue associated with PHB class.
Queue Depth (% Full)
Percentage (%) full for queue associated with PHB class
Bandwidth (kbps)
Current data rate for queue associated with PHB class.
8.6.6.5.3
WAN | Loopback Test
Use this page for testing the operational integrity of the NP Interface M&C, WAN Interface, and IF
Interface.
Figure 8-25. WAN | Loopback Test page
Packet Loopback Test Results

This message window displays the results of the completed Loopback Test.
Packet Loopback Test

By clicking [Start Test], the NP Interface sends 50 multicast packets towards the WAN interface,
and enables the IF Loopback. All packets returned from the IP Loopback will count by the NP
Interface, and are displayed in the Packet Loopback Test Results window.
839

8.6.6.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Routing pages
Select the Routes or OSPF hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.6.1
Routing | Routes
Use this page to enter static routes into the NP Interface. This facilitates the routing of IP traffic
over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN. Route entries can be in any combination of
Unicast and Multicast routes.
Figure 8-26. Routing | Routes page
Route Table (Display)

This read-only table provides information on a per-route basis:
Column
Description
Index
Identifies the route entry [1 to 256].
Route Description
Label that helps users to maintain their network.
Destination IP/Mask
Identifies the route to the destination network.

There are two valid selections for routing to a destination network:
Interface
Next Hop IP
toWAN is selected when the route to the destination network is over the
satellite link. The toWAN routes do not need a Next Hop IP Address.
toLAN is used when the route to the destination network is attached to the LAN
interface.
When the route is of type toLAN, the Next Hop IP Address defines the locally attached
routers IP Address. which can be used to route to the destination network. This is the case
when there is another subnet addressed to the modem on the LAN side.
840

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Add New Route

Take care to accurately create and add new route entries. Existing routes cant be
modified. If a mistake is made when adding a new route entry, the incorrect entry
must be deleted, and then recreated and re-added.
Use this section to add a route entry to the route table. Enter the information, and click [Add
Entry] to add the route. The route is immediately added to the route table for processing.
Delete Route
Use this section to specify which route table entry to delete when a route is no longer needed, and
then click [Delete Entry] to delete that route table entry.
8.6.6.6.2
Routing | OSPF
Use this page to define the operating parameters for Open Shortest Path First routing.
Figure 8-27. Routing | OSPF page
OSPF Parameters
Item
Description / Setting
OSPF
To control OSPF routing, set the interface as Disabled or Enabled.
Area Network Address
Network address of an area. An area is a set of networks and hosts within an

Autonomous System (AS) that has been administratively grouped together.
841

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Item
Area Subnet Mask
Subnet mask of the Area Network.
OSPF Area
Cost
Retransmit Interval
Transmit Delay
Priority
Hello Interval
Dead Interval
Authentication Key
Message Digest Key
The SLM-5650A NP Interface supports only one OSPF Area at a time. A group of
(adjacent) routers which cooperate by exchanging their routing data base for the
specified network range; i.e. an OSPF router will only send its database to other
routers that advertise that they are in the same area.
Valid range is from 0 to 4294967295.
Specify the explicit cost of sending a packet via this interface.
Valid range is from 1 to 65535.
Specify the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for
adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface.
Parameters used to define the route to the destination network.
Valid range is from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Set priority to help determine the OSPF.
Valid range is 0 (default, or not designated) to 255.
Specify the length of time, in seconds, between the hello packets that are sent on an
OSPF interface.
Set the number of seconds that a devices Hello packets must not have been seen
before its neighbors declare the OSPF router down.
Assign a specific password to be used by neighboring OSPF routers on a network
segment that is using OSPFs simple password authentication.
Enable OSPG MD5 authentication.
842

8.6.6.6.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Routing | IGMP
Use this page to facilitate use of Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) with configured
multicast routes.
Figure 8-28. Routing | IGMP page

IGMP, when enabled, responds to IGMP queries for the configured multicast routes on the
transmit side and generates IGMP queries on the receive side. If there are no active IGMP
receivers on the LAN, it will stop forwarding the multicast traffic (received from the satellite) to
the LAN.
Selection
IGMP
Select IGMP as Enabled or Disabled.
Query Interval
This is the interval between general queries sent by the modem. By varying the query
interval, a modem administrator may tune the number of IGMP messages on the subnet;
note that larger numbers cause the IGMP queries to be sent less often.
Response Interval
Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 60 (default = 1 second).

This is the maximum response time inserted into the periodic general queries. By
varying the Response Interval, a modem administrator may tune the burstiness of
IGMP messages on the subnet; note that larger values make the traffic less bursty as
host responses are spread out over a large interval.
Last Member Query

Interval
Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 25 (default = 10 seconds).

Note: The number of seconds assigned to the Response Interval must be less than
what is assigned to the Query Interval.
This is the maximum response time inserted into group-specific queries that are set in
response to Leave Group messages, and is also amount of time between groupspecific query messages. This value may be tuned to modify the "leave latency" of the
network; a reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member
of a group.
Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 25 (default = 1 second).
843

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Selection
Robustness
The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a
subnet is expected to be lossy, the Robustness Variable may be increased. IGMP is
robust to (Robustness Variable-1) packet losses.
Version
Enter a value from 2 to 10 (the default value is 2). Note that the Robustness Variable
MUST NOT be 0, and SHOULD NOT be 1.
Version Enter 1 for IGMPv1 or 2 for IGMPv2.
Click [Submit] to save the desired IGMP configuration changes on this page.
8.6.6.7
Stats (Statistics) pages
Select the Ethernet Tx, Ethernet Rx, IP, WAN, or Clear All hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.7.1
Stats | Ethernet Tx
Figure 8-29. Stats | Ethernet Tx Statistics page
Clear/Refresh Ethernet Tx Stats

Click [Clear] to delete all Ethernet Tx statistics (this will also clear all Ethernet Rx statistics).
Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.
844

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Tx Valid Frames
Column
Unicast
Description
The corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and, when in BPM Mode, the
base modems J5 Ethernet port.
Number of valid unicast frames transmitted.
Broadcast
Number of valid broadcast frames transmitted.
Multicast
Number of valid multicast frames transmitted.
Pause
Number of PAUSE frames transmitted.
Port
Tx Collision Frames
The counters provided in this table are applicable in half-duplex only.
Column
Port
Collision
Late Collision
Single Collision
Multiple Collision
Maximum Collision
Description
The number of Collision events seen by the GMAC, not including those controls in a
single, Multiple, Excessive or Late.
The number of times a collision is detected later than 512 bits-times into the
transmission of the frame.
The total number of successfully transmitted frames that experienced exactly one
collision.
The total number of successfully transmitted frames that experienced more than one
collision.
The number of frames dropped in the transmit GMAC because the frame experienced
16 consecutive collisions.
Tx Discarded/Filtered
Column
Port
Discarded
Filtered
Description
The total number of frames received with either FCS errors or Tx Maximum Collision
frames.
Number of Tx frames filtered. Currently not implemented.
845

8.6.6.7.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | Ethernet Rx
Figure 8-30. Stats | Ethernet Rx Statistics page
Clear/Refresh Ethernet Rx Stats

Click [Clear] to delete all Ethernet Rx statistics (this will also clear all Ethernet Tx statistics).
Rx Valid Frames
Column
Unicast
Description
Number of valid unicast frames transmitted.
Broadcast
Number of valid broadcast frames transmitted.
Multicast
Number of valid multicast frames transmitted.
Pause
Number of PAUSE frames transmitted.
Port
846

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Rx Error Frames
Column
Alignment
Description
Total frames received with CRC error.
Total frames received with either Fragments Error or Jabber Error.
Undersized
Total frames received with a length of less than 64 bytes but with a valid FCS.
Oversized
Total frame received with a length of more than 1536 bytes but with a valid FCS.
Port
Invalid FCS
Rx Discarded/Filtered
Column
Port
Discarded
Filtered
Description
Total frames received with Undersized, Fragments, Oversized, Jabber, or invalid FCS
errors.
Number of Rx frames filtered. Currently not implemented.
847

8.6.6.7.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | IP
Figure 8-31. Stats | IP Statistics page
Clear/Refresh IP Statistics
Click [Clear] to delete all statistics.
Router Statistics
Item
Description
Received Packets
Total packets received by router.
Forwarded Packets
Dropped Packets
Total packets forwarded by router.

Total packets dropped by router.
End Station Packets
Total packets directed to the NP Interface.
848

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Router Errors
Item
No Route Packets
Description
Counts the packets received with IP header length are less than 20 bytes OR
IPV4 version is NOT 4. This only applicable in non-switch mode.
This Counter will be updated if the ingress packet total length (PACKET_SIZE)
less than the Ethernet header size (if present, only from LAN and END station)
and total length in IPV4 total length filed. This is only applicable in non-switch
mode.
If the IPV4 packet received with TTL zero and need to be forwarded. This is
only applicable in non-switch mode.
Counts the packets received with IPV4_DEST_ADDR has no match in Route
Table. This is only applicable in non-switch mode.
Length Too Small Packets
Counter will be updated if, total length filed in IPV4 header is less than 20 bytes
OR PACKET_SIZE is less than 20. This is only applicable in non-switch mode.
Bad Header Packets

Bad Total Length Packets
TTL Expired Packets
Bad Header Checksum

Packets
If incoming packet has Ethernet type was not IPV4, IPv6, ARP, PPP_SESSION,
or PPP_DISCOVERY and non-switch mode. In switch mode it accepts all the
Ethernet types.
Counts the packets received with bad IPV4 header checksum. This is only
applicable in non-switch mode.
Bad Header Destination

Address Packets
The counter will be updated, if the IPV4 destination address is either

255.255.255.255, or 0.X.X.X, or 127.X.X.X, or (224-255).X.X.X. This is only
applicable in non-switch mode.
Bad Header Protocol Packets
Non Switch mode: This counter will updated if, the Ingress packet cannot
traverse with in the ME components due to resources scarcity.
Internal Procesing Error
Packets
Switch mode: This counter will be update if either the ingresses packet
destination MAC address is NPs MAC, but the IP address is NOT the NPs IP,
or ingress packet cannot traverse within the MEs components due to internal
resources scarcity.
End Station Statistics

Item
Description
Received Packets
Total packets destined to the NP Interface.
Forwarded Packets
Total packets forwarded by router.

Number of packets delivered to management applications running on the NP
Interface.
Number of IP fragments created by the NP Interface because the packet being
sent exceeds the maximum transmit unit (MTU).
Local Delivery Packets

Created Fragment Packets
End Station Errors

Item
Invalid Header Packets
Invalid Address Packets
No Route Packets
Description
Total End Station packets dropped due to incorrect length or IP Header
Checksum.
Number of IP packets dropped by the NP Interface because of an invalid
destination address.
Number of IP Packets dropped by the NP Interface because no route
destinatioon matched in the rout table.
849

Item
Invalid Fragment Packets
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
Number of IP packets dropped by the NP Interface because IP fragments could
not be reassembled.
ICMP Statistics
Where ICMP is Internet Control Message Protocol:
Item
Created ICMP Message
Packets
Created ICMP Destination
Unreachable Packets
Created ICMP Time Exceeded
Packets
Created ICMP Parameter
Problem Packets
Created ICMP Redirect
Packets
Description
Total ICMP message packets.
Total ICMP Destination Unreachable message packets.
Total ICMP Time Exceeded message packets.
Total ICMP Parameter Problem message packets.
Total ICMP Redirect message packets
ICMP Errors
ICMP Send Errors Packets Number of ICMP packets dropped by the NP Interface because of
an unknown ICMP error.
850

8.6.6.7.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | WAN
Figure 8-32. Stats | WAN Statistics page
Clear/Refresh WAN Statistics

Click [Clear] to delete all statistics.
WAN Tx Frames
Column
Description
Network Layer
Total packets sent to data link layer.
Data Link Layer
Total frames sent to satellite layer.
Satellite Layer
Total frames sent over satellite.
WAN Tx Errors
Column
Data Link Layer
Description
Counter increments if the packets cannot traverse from WAN_DLL_OUT
component to ETH_TX-3 component to due to internal resource scarcity.
Total data link layer Tx errors.
Satellite Layer
Total satellite layer Tx errors.
Network Layer
851

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
WAN Rx Frames
Column
Description
Network Layer
Total packets received from data link layer.
Data Link Layer
Total frames received from satellite layer.

Total frames received over the satellite.
Satellite Layer
WAN Rx Errors
Column
Data Link Layer
Description
Counter updates for every WAN ingress packets with size more than 1700
bytes.
These are the total WAN_FPGA Errors
Satellite Layer
These are the total WAN_FPGA Errors.
Network Layer
Detailed Satellite Rx Errors

Item
WAN Rx Overrun Errors

WAN Rx Packet CRC Errors
Description
HDLC Address of the received frame does not match one of the eight
configured HDLC addresses.
For a given CEFD WAN Control byte setting, received frame is too short to be
valid.
Any one of the following HDLC error conditions: Abort, Octet Alignment, or
Frame Length shorter than 32-bits.
HDLC receive FIFO has overflowed.
The Packet CRC checksum failed.
WAN Rx HDLC CRC Errors
The received HDLC frame has failed the HDLC CRC checksum.
WAN Rx Bad Address Errors

WAN Rx Undersized Errors
WAN Rx HDLC Frame Errors
852

8.6.6.7.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats | Clear All
Use this page to simultaneously clear the statistics for the Ethernet Tx, Ethernet Rx, IP, and WAN
Stats pages.
Figure 8-33. Stats | Clear All Statistics page
Clear All Statistics (Ethernet / IP / WAN)

Click [Clear All Statistics] to execute.
853

8.6.6.8
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Vipersat pages
Figure 8-34 depicts the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface pages with Vipersat installed on the
SLM-5650A. Vipersat is a FAST Feature option which must be purchased from Comtech
EF Data. Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information.
Note that, if the SLM-5650A does not have this option installed, the hyperlinks
associated with the Vipersat navigation tab will not be visible or otherwise available to
the user.
Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A

Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for configuration and use of these optional
pages.
Figure 8-34. Vipersat pages
854

8.6.6.9
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Redundancy page
Appendix F. 1:1 REDUNDANCY
This page provides read-only status information on the configured redundant configuration.
Figure 8-35. Redundancy page

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, when connected to a Comtech EF Data CRS-311 1:1
Redundancy Switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet traffic in the case of
equipment failure.
If the the Redundancy tab is selected without a 1:1 Redundant Configuration, per Figure 8-35 the
1:1 Redundancy status is displayed as Unavailable.
855

8.6.6.10
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Save page
In order to make any Network Processor modifications permanent, the Unit
Configuration must be saved before rebooting the unit.
Figure 8-36. Save page

Use this page to save the current unit configurations to Flash memory. This makes all
configuration changes made under the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface permanent until either a new
round of setting updates is initiated and saved, or all settings are restored to the original factory
defaults via the Admin | Defaults page (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.6 for full details).
Click [Save Now] to begin the save process. At the user prompt
(shown at right), click OK to complete the process, or Cancel to
abort the command.
856
Chapter 9. NP INTERFACE
TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION
9.1
Overview
This chapter defines the Command Line Interface (CLI) user menu system provided with the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modems optional NP (Network Processor) Module Interface.
Access to the CLI depends on the IP Interface Security Mode setting that has been selected for
the NP Interface:
The CLI is accessible via Telnet when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to
Low Level Security.
SSH (Secure Shell) will not be available for CLI operations at this security level.
The CLI is accessible only via SSH when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to
High Level Security.
Telnet will not be available for CLI operations at this security level.
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.4.2.3 Administration | Security (Account Information) for detailed
information about the IP Interface Security Mode features for the NP Interface. For an overview
on using Telnet and SSH interfaces with the SLM-5650A, see Chapter 6. ETHERNET
MANAGEMENT.
91

NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.1.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Telnet User Access

Telnet operation is permissible only when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to Low
Level Security. See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.3 Administration | Security (Account
Information) for instructions on setting the security level to allow for Telnet (non-secure)
operation of the CLI.
When connecting via Telnet, the user must have network connectivity to the NP Interface. This
connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite link from another modem.
Telnet access is available on TCP Port 23. The default user name and password are both
comtech.
The user name and password are required to gain access to system through the
HTTP/HTTPS and CLI interfaces. For security reasons, the Restore Factory
Defaults command (see Chapter Sect. 9.2.4.5) does NOT reset the user name and
password.
9.1.1.1
Telnet Operational Guidelines

The CLI allows, at most, seven (7) concurrent logins to the Telnet menu via multiple
Telnet sessions.
Note that the CLI user name and password are the same as the NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface user name and password.
9.1.2
SSH (Secure Shell) User Access

SSH access and operation is permissible only when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to
High Level Security. See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.3 Administration | Security (Account
Information) for instructions on setting the security level to allow for SSH (secure) operation of
the CLI.
At login, note that the CLI user name and password when starting an SSH CLI session are the
same as the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface user name and password.
See Chapter Sect. 6.6 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface for initial setup and operational examples
for using an SSH terminal emulator application for CLI operations.
92

9.2
9.2.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Command Line Interface Pages

CLI Menu System Parallel Functionality
The CLI, accessible via Telnet and SSH, allows the user to change operating parameters in a
manner similar to the functionality, as provided, for the monitoring, configuration, and control via
the SLM-5650A Satellite Modems front panel menus (see Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION) and NP Module HTTP/HTTPS Interfaces (see Chapter Sect. 8.6 Network
Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface).
9.2.2
CLI Menu Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features

Note the following:
1. Certain operational menu selections (e.g., Vipersat Configuration) are visible/selectable only
when that FAST feature has been purchased and enabled for operation. The menu pages that
follow show all available options as installed the configuration in use may or may not
provide the level of functionality depicted in this chapter.
2. With some exceptions, the menu pages depicted in this chapter feature the following common
informational or navigational aids:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
[Text field
example]
[RO]
Description
Typically found in the body of the page. This designates the field as
a read-only status/informational message. There is no user action
required for this item.
Allows user to save the current configuration of the NP Interface to
permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each
successive power cycle.
Save Parameters to Flash
Logout of CLI Session
Allows user to log out of the CLI session.
Exit Menu
Allows user to exit the current menu and return to the parent menu.
Alternately, the user may press the Esc key to perform the same
action.
3. Typically, once any mnemonic is entered, the user is prompted to

type in a functional selection, an alphanumeric configuration string,
or an operational value. This prompt is provided at the bottom of the
active page and takes the form of a selection choice and/or a blank
prompt (a solid bar), as shown in the example to the right:
4. If a parameter is rejected for any reason, an error will appear at the top of the page, along with
an explanation that serves to assist the user in the re-entry of information, as per the following
example:
5. Any changes made via the CLI should be saved to permanent storage prior to terminating the CLI
session. Although changes are retained after a CLI session ends (as long as the SLM-5650A
93

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
remains running), take note also that changes will be lost if, for example, the modem is rebooted
or the NP Interface is reset or loses power.
Modified parameters can be saved by issuing the Save command S from any menu. The user is
prompted to confirm that all changes should be made permanent:
6. The user is prompted, when attempting to terminate a CLI session via Logout command L,
to verify that the CLI session should be ended:
94

9.2.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Main Menu
The Main Menu serves as the CLIs primary navigation page. All selections made on this page
take the user to submenus listed in this table (operation features nested under each of these
submenus, in turn, are described in the chapter sections listed):
Submenu
Entry
Administration
Satellite Modem
Configuration
LAN
WAN
Route Table
OSPF
IGMP
Vipersat Configuration
Redundancy
Configuration
Operations and
Maintenance
Function/Description
See
The Administration Menu provides a basic set of

standard admin functions to the NP Interface.
The Satellite Modem Configuration option displays
nested menus that allow the user to configure and
monitor the satellite base modem.
The LAN menu allows the user to change the IP
address and view the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) table.
The WAN menu allows the user to configure QoS
(Quality of Service) and DiffServ (Differentiated
Services).
The Route Table menu allows the user to configure the
Unicast/Multicast routing tables.
The OSPF Menu allows the user to configure Open
Shortest Path First routing parameters.
The IGMP Menu allows the user to configure Internet
Group Management Protocol parameters
The FAST-Feature-enabled Vipersat Configuration
menu allows the user to configure Vipersat
functionality. This menu selection is visible/available
only after the Vipersat option has been purchased.
The Redundancy Configuration Menu allows the user
to view the 1:1 IP redundancy status.
The Operations & Maintenance menu allows the user
to configure various options used to control and
maintain the system. This menu also provides
diagnostic tools for troubleshooting and statistics.
Sect. 9.2.4 (9.2.4.1

through 9.2.4.8)
95
Sect. 9.2.5 (9.2.5.1

through 9.2.5.6)
Sect. 9.2.6 (9.2.6.1
through 9.2.6.3)
Sect. 9.2.7
Sect. 9.2.8
Sect. 9.2.9
Sect. 9.2.10
Sect. 9.2.11
Sect. 9.2.12
Sect. 9.2.13,
9.2.13.1

9.2.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Administration Menu page (A)
The Administration Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or
fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Information
Entry Description
I
Displays information for NP and Modem Bootrom running status, load

images, and current configuration status.
Prompts user to select:
0 Vipersat Hub
1 Vipersat Hub Expansion
2 Vipersat Remote
3 Vipersat Remote Expansion
Non-Vipersat modes: 4 Multipoint Hub Router
5 Multipoint Remote Router
6 Point to Point Router
Bridge mode:
7 Gigabit Ethernet Bridge
Vipersat modes:
System Working Mode
BPM Mode
FAST Feature Code
Displays currently installed FAST options.
Security
Allows user to set admin user name and password, and set IP Interface
Security Mode.
SNMP
Displays SNMP configuration parameters.
Restore Factory Defaults
Allows user to restore factory default configuration settings.
Prompts user to select BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) mode of

operation:
0 Disabled
96
1 Enabled

Menu Options/Fields
9.2.4.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Entry Description
Set Time
Allows user to configure automatic time synchronization through Network

Time Protocol (NTP).
Event Log
Displays summary of faults and events.
Boot Network Processor From

[#]
Boot Base Modem From [#]
Reboot Now
Prompts user to enter NP boot image:

1 Image 1
2 Image 2
3 Newest
Prompts user to enter modem boot image:

1 Image 1
2 Image 2
Prompts user to enter Y to reboot, N to exit command without rebooting.
Administration Menu | Information page (I)
The read-only SLM 5650 Network Processor System Images page, opened from the
Administration Menu, displays the information for NP and Modem bulk images, and current NP
running bulk image:
Press any character to return to the Administration Menu page.
97

9.2.4.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Administration Menu | FAST Feature Code page (F)
The read-only FAST Features page, opened from the Administration Menu, displays the status
(i.e., Installed or Not Installed) of all available FAST options:
Press any character to return to the Administration Menu page.
98

9.2.4.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Administration Menu | Security page (A)

The HighLevel Security setting will disable the Telnet menu interface do not
enable High Level Security if using Telnet or connectivity will be lost! When the
High Level Security setting is selected, SSH can be used to interface with the
CLI menu system.
The Security Menu page, opened from the Administration Menu, contains the following options
or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description
Admin User Name
Allows user to set the Admin User Name (excluding < > ~, a
minimum of 7 / maximum of 25 characters is permitted).
Admin Password
Allows user to set the Admin Password (excluding < > ~, a minimum
of 7 / maximum of 25 characters is permitted).
Prompts user to select the IP Interface Security Level:
IP Interface Security Mode
SSH Host Key Signature
Generate New Host Key
Press
For
User Accessibility
Low Level Security
HTTP and Telnet allowed
High Level Security
Only HTTPS/SSH allowed
[RO]
This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the NP when

connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key
signature when they connect to a system for the first time. The user
can then compare the host key the SSH client shows with the host
key the NP displays to verify that they are the same
Generates a new host key that uniquely identifies the NP.

NOTE: After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the NP
before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when
they connect again.
99

9.2.4.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Administration Menu | SNMP page (P)
The SNMP page, opened from the Administration Menu, allows the user to change the parameters
associated with Simple Network Management Protocol, an application-layer protocol designed to
facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices.
The SLM-5650A SNMP agent supports SNMPv1, v2c and, when the IP Interface Security Level
has been set to High, SNMPv3. The page contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Read Community
[RO]
Write Community
[RO]
Trap Community
Trap
System Contact
System Location
Description
For complete details on SNMP and using this menu, refer to Chapter
6.4 SNMP Interface.
Once all changes have been made using this menu, in order for the configuration to take effect,
the user must press S to save these SNMP configuration changes, then reboot the modem using
the Reboot Now prompt (press R using the Administration Menu) as outlined in this chapter in
Chapter Sect. 9.2.4.8.
910

9.2.4.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Administration Menu | Restore Factory Defaults prompt (D)
Select D from the Administration Menu to restore all previously-configured modem parameters
to their Factory Default Configuration settings. The user is prompted:
Are you sure you wish to continue? (Y or N)

Press Y to begin the restoration process, or N to abort the command and return to the previous
menu.
Using Restore Factory Defaults does not change the user name and password
settings.
9.2.4.6
Administration Menu | Set Time page (T)
The Time Control (Set Time) page, opened from the Administration Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Time Zone
Automatic Synchronize
Primary Internet Time Server
Secondary Internet Time

Server
Current Date
[RO]
Current Time
[RO]
Internet Time Status
[RO]
Update Date & Time
Description
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.7 Admin | Time (Date and Time) for full
details on this pages functionality.
911

9.2.4.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Administration Menu | Event Log page (E)
Once the System Event Log page is opened from the Administration Menu, the system is polled
for summary events and faults, the following message appears:
Please wait for the event log to appear

This may take up to a minute
When ready, the page displays a scrollable list as per the following example:
From here, the page contains the following options or fields:

Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
Top
Bottom
Logging On/Off
Logging Level
Clear Event Log
Description
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and
end of the Event Log.
See Chapter 8.7.4.2.8 Admin | Event Log for full details on this
pages functionality.
912

9.2.4.8
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Administration Menu | Reboot Now prompt (R)

Before rebooting, the user must remember to SAVE PARAMETERS TO FLASH
(Select S from the Administration Menu); otherwise, all changes made prior to
reboot will be lost.
Select R from the Administration Menu to reboot the system. The user is prompted:
Are you sure you wish to continue? (Y or N)

Press Y to begin the reboot process, or N to abort the command and return to the previous
menu.
Note: Pressing Y causes the entire modem to reboot; this includes the base modem, NP
Interface, and TRANSEC Module.
913

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.5 Satellite Modem Configuration (Modem Menu) page (M)
The Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, opened from the Main Menu, contains
the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description
Modem Type
[RO]
Displays modem type
Interface
[RO]
Displays installed interface
Reference
[RO]
Displays active reference (internal / external)

Frequency Band
Modulator Settings
Allows user to configure modulator operating parameters
Demodulator Settings
Allows user to configure demodulator operating parameters
Receive Monitor
Read-only displays active Rx operating parameters
Events
Displays the Modem Event Log and allows user to set or adjust display
parameters for logging
Stats
Displays the System Event Log and allows user to set or adjust display
parameters for logging
Allows user to select/set:

T - Time (in HH:MM:SS format)
D - Date (in DD/MM/YY format), or
C - Circuit ID (exactly 24 characters).
Utility
0 70/140 MHz
914
1 L-Band

9.2.5.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Satellite Modem Configuration | Modulator Menu page (M)
The Modulator Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration)
page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
FEC Type
Modulation
Entry Description
T
Prompts the user to select:

0 None
1 Viterbi
2 Turbo
3 Sequential

0 BPSK
1 QPSK
2 OQPSK
3 8-PSK
4 16-QAM

0 1/1
1 1/2
2 3/4
3 7/8
4 2/3
5 5/6
6 21/44
7 5/16
8 17/18
FEC Code Rate
Data Rate
Allows user to edit Data Rate using arrow keys.
Frequency
Allows user to edit Frequency using arrow keys.
Spectrum

0 Normal
1 Inverted

Scrambler
Power Level
Carrier
0 Off
1 OM73
2 V.35
3 Modified V.35
4 SYNC
5 IBS
6 TURBO
Allows user to edit Power Level using arrow keys.

Prompts the user to select
0 OFF
1 ON
915
2 RTS
3 VSAT

9.2.5.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Satellite Modem Configuration | Demodulator Menu page (D)
The Demodulator Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration)
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
FEC Type
Demodulation

0 None
1 Viterbi
2 Turbo
3 Sequential

0 BPSK
1 QPSK
2 OQPSK
3 8-PSK
4 16-QAM

0 1/1
1 1/2
2 3/4
3 7/8
4 2/3
5 5/6
6 21/44
7 5/16
8 17/18
FEC Code Rate
Data Rate
Allows user to edit Data Rate using arrow keys.
Frequency
Allows user to edit Frequency using arrow keys.
Spectrum

0 Normal
1 Inverted

Descrambler
0 Off
1 OM73
2 V.35
916
3 Modified V.35
4 SYNC
5 IBS
6 TURBO

9.2.5.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Satellite Modem Configuration | Receive Monitor page (R)
The read-only Receive Parameters (i.e., Receive Monitor) page, opened from the Modem Menu
(Satellite Modem Configuration) page, displays the Rx parameters:
Press X to return to the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page.
917

9.2.5.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Satellite Modem Configuration | Events page (E)
The Modem Event Log page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration)
page, displays a scrollable list as per the following example:
When ready, the page contains the following options or fields:

Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
Top
Bottom
Clear Event Log
Description
end of the Event Log.
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.3.3 Modem | Events for full details on this
918

9.2.5.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Satellite Modem Configuration | Stats page (T)
Once the Modem Statistics (Stats) page is opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem
Configuration) page, as the system is polled for summary events and faults, the following
message appears:
Please wait for the event log to be read

This may take up to a minute
When ready, the page displays a scrollable list of as per the following example:
The page contains the following options or fields:

Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
Add Entry
Modify Entry
Delete Entry
Logging Level
Clear Event Log
Description
end of the Stats Log.
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.3.4 Modem | Stats for full details on this
919

9.2.5.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Satellite Modem Configuration | Utility page (U)
The Modem Utility Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration)
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description
Time
Allows user to set the time in HH:MM:SS format.
Date
Allows user to set the date in International format (DD/MM/YY).

Allows the user to define a name for the Circuit ID.
Circuit ID
Note: This ID must consist of exactly 24 characters in UPPER CASE

ONLY. No spaces are permitted in this ID; use a dash [-] instead.
920

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.6 LAN Menu page (N)
The LAN Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
Interface
The LAN Interface menu allows the user to view the MAC address
of the Network Processor and set the IP address and mask of the
Network Processor:
Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet Ports menu allows the user to view the current status
of the Ethernet ports and set each port to auto-negotiate or for
manual configuration.
ARP Menu
The ARP Menu allows the user to view and edit the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) table.
Flow Control
Proxy ARP
Port VLAN Enable
Port VLAN Select
Port VLAN Id
Prompts user to select

0 Disabled
1 Enabled

0 Disabled
1 Enabled

0 Disabled
1 Enabled

0 Port 1
1 Port 2
2 Port 3
3 Port 4
Enter an ID value from 2 to 4095. Packets containing specified

VLAN only will ingress and egress from the NP Interface port
specified via "VLAN Port Select" (Entry N).
921

9.2.6.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
LAN Menu | Interface page (I)
The Interface page, opened from the LAN Menu page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
MAC Address
[RO]
The MAC is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique address that

cannot be modified by the user.
IP Addressing Mode
0 Single (Traffic IP Address only)

1 Dual (Traffic and Management IP Addresses)
Traffic IP Address
Allows user to edit the Traffic IP Address using the arrow

keys.
Management IP Address
Allows user to edit the Management IP Address using the

arrow keys.
Submit Changes
Saves any changes made to the Traffic and Management IP

Addresses.
922

9.2.6.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu page (E)
The Ethernet Ports Menu page, opened from the LAN Menu page, provides read-only NP
Interface Ports 1 through 4 Link Status information, and allows the user to manually change the
Ethernet Port Speed/Duplex Configurations for each port by pressing 1 through 4 as needed.
9.2.6.2.1
LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu | Ports 1-4 Speed/Duplex

Configuration
When 1, 2, 3 or 4 is pressed on the Ethernet Ports Menu page, the user is then prompted to
configure NP Interface Ports 1 through 4, on a per-port basis, with one of the following
selections:
0 Auto
1 10 Mbps Half Duplex
2 10 Mbps Full Duplex
3 100 Mbps Half Duplex
Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports for an overview of this functionality.
923

9.2.6.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
LAN Menu | ARP Menu (A)
The ARP Table page, opened from the LAN Menu page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
Add entry
Modify Entry
Delete Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table) for an

overview of command functionality.
end of the ARP Table.
924

9.2.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
WAN Menu page (W)
The WAN Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
QoS Feature
Global Config & Statistics
Global Con Display
Global Statistics
Class Selector 6
Expedited Forwarding
Assured Forwarding Class 1
Default
Provides user with read-only display of the DiffServ default queue.
Clear (reset) Statistics
Allows user to reset all DiffServ statistics.
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.5 WAN Pages for an overview of

command functionality and/or information presented for these
functions.
925

9.2.8
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Routing Table page (R)
With the Routing Table page (opened from the Main Menu), static routes can be entered into the
IP Module to route IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN. Route
entries can be in any combination of Unicast and Multicast routes. The Routing Table page
contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
Add entry
Modify Entry
Delete Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.6.1 Routing | Routes for an overview

of command functionality.
end of the Routing Table.
926

9.2.9
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
OSPF Configuration page (F)
The OSPF Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
OSPF
Area Network Address
Area Subnet Mask
OSPF Area
Cost
Retransmit Interval
Transmit Delay
Priority
Hello Interval
Dead Interval
Authentication Key
Message Digest Key
Submit Changes
Enables or Disables the Open Shortest Path First operation. Typing

E prompts user to select:
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.6.2 Routing | OSPF for an overview of

functions.
Saves any changes made on this page to the OSPF operating

parameters.
927

9.2.10
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
IGMP Configuration page (I)
The IGMP Menu page, activated from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
IGMP
Query Interval
Response Interval
Last Member Query Interval
Robustness
IGMP Version
Submit Changes
Enables or Disables the Internet Group Management Protocol

operation. Typing E prompts user to select:
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.6.3 Routing | IGMP for an overview of

functions.
Saves any changes made on this page to the IGMP operating

parameters.
928

9.2.11
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Vipersat Configuration page (V)
Vipersat is an optional FAST Feature that must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. Refer to
Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information about FAST options.
If the SLM-5650A does not have this option installed, the functionality associated with this FAST
Feature option will not be visible/available to the CLI user.
The appearance of this page changes depending on the selected Vipersat Mode of operation (see
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Feature required)). The example
shown here depicts the menu when the Vipersat Remote mode is selected.
Otherwise, see adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A
Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for details on configuration and use of these
optional menu pages.
929

9.2.12
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Redundancy Configuration page (E)
The 1:1 Redundancy Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, provides the user with read-only
status information on the redundant operations configuration.
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, when connected to a Comtech EF Data CRS-311 1:1
Redundancy Switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet traffic in the case of
equipment failure. Refer to the pertinent redundancy switch Installation and Operation Manual
for detailed information on the use of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem in redundant operations.
If the user selects the Redundancy tab without a 1:1 Redundant Configuration, the 1:1
Redundancy status is displayed as Unavailable.
930

9.2.13
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Operations & Maintenance page (O)
The Operations & Maintenance page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
Statistics
Provides user with read-only access to Ethernet Tx/Rx, LAN, WAN

operating statistics; allows user to clear existing statistics.
Ping/TraceRoute Target IP
Allows user to edit target IP address for ping and trace route using
the arrow keys.
Ping Above Address
Allows user to ping on IP Address.
Max Trace Route Hops
Allows user to set the maximum number of trace route hops using
the arrow keys.
Trace Route Above Address
Allows user to trace route on IP address.
Base Management Port
Allows user to edit the Vipersat base management UDP/TCP port

using the arrow keys.
WAN to WAN Internal Mcast Addr
Allows user to edit the WAN-WAN Internal Multicast Address using

the arrow keys.
Debug Menu
Password-restricted for factory use only.
Note: Ping and Trace Route are only available through the CLI Operations & Maintenance page.
For ping and trace route to work, the user must enter a target IP address. The user can then choose
to issue a Ping or Trace Route to the Target IP Address. When doing a Trace Route, the
maximum trace route hops can also be specified.
931

9.2.13.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Operations & Maintenance | Statistics page (T)
The Statistics page, opened from the Operations & Maintenance page, provides read-only
statistics pages for varied operating parameters and commands used to clear those statistics.
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
Ethernet TX
Ethernet RX
IP
WAN
Clear Ethernet Statistics (Tx & Rx)
Clear IP Statistics
Clear WAN Statistics
Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.7 Stats (Statistics) pages for an

overview of the information provided on these read-only pages.
Allows user to clear all statistics.
932
Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE

HTTPS INTERFACE
10.1 TRANSEC Module Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is optionally equipped with the TRANSEC Module Interface,
either in standalone operation with the SLM-5650A Base Modem, or in tandem with the optional
Network Processor (NP) Interface module.
The SLM-5650A is fully compatible and interoperable in all specified modes of operation with
KIV-19 Provisional and KG-95-1 Provisional Transmission Security (TRANSEC) equipment
currently used by the Government.
EIA-422 data rates higher than 20 Mbps (for complete interoperability with the KG95-1) are provisional.
For either configuration, the TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS
connections to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the
TRANSEC Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C
parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The Secure Management interfaces
supported by the TRANSEC Module Interface are summarized as follows:
Base Modem
Network Processor (when installed)
TRANSEC Module
HTTPS
SSH
SNMPv3
HTTPS
SSH
When the TRANSEC Module Interface is installed, Management Security is mandatory and
therefore security is always enabled: Network management M&C limitations that are enacted
when High Level Security is in effect therefore always apply.
For more information on these available Web interfaces, see Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP
INTERFACE or Chapter Sect. 8.6 NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) HTTP/HTTPS
INTERFACE.
101

TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
10.2 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface

The user can fully control and monitor operation of the
SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module from its HTTPS (Secure HTTP)
Interface. By rolling the cursor over the tabs located at the top of
each page (shown at right), the user can select from the available
nested hyperlinks.
The pages in the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface have been designed for
optimal performance when using Microsofts Internet Explorer Ver. 7.0 or higher or Mozilla
Firefox Ver. 2.0 or higher (the examples shown use Internet Explorer Ver. 7.0).
10.3 Accessing the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface

From the PC, type https://www.xxx.yyy.zzz (where www.xxx.yyy.zzz represents the IP address
of the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module) into the Address area of the Web browser:
The user may be prompted with a Security

Alert. Should the advisory appear, click
[Continue to this website] to proceed.
From any page in the TRANSEC Module
HTTPS interface, the user may select one of
three modes of operation using the Interface
Navigator drop-down menu, located at the
top left-hand corner of all TRANSEC
Module HTTPS Interface pages:
Crypto Officer: Connects the user

to the secure TRANSEC Module
HTTPS Interface (User Name and
Password required).
Modem Operator: Connects the

user to the Base Modem HTTP
Interface. See Chapter 7. BASE
MODEM HTTP INTERFACE for
further information.
Network Operator: Connects the

user to the secure Network
Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS
Interface (User Name and Password
required). See Chapter Sect. 8.6 NP
HTTP/ HTTPS Interface for
further information.
To continue to the TRANSEC Module
102

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
HTTPS Interface pages, select Crypto Officer from the drop-down, then click [Go!].
Once the Login page appears, type in a valid Crypto Officer User Name and Crypto Officer
Password the default for both is comtech then click [Log On].
The TRANSEC Module User Name and Password are each restricted to a minimum
of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding: (ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code
60), > (ASCII Code 62), (ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
Once the User Name and Password are accepted, the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module home
page (Figure 10-1) appears. Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
While legacy IE browser versions ( e.g., Internet
Explorer 6.0), may be used, Comtech EF Data
Technical Support does not provide support services
for these older browsers. Should the user encounter
problems connecting to the secure web interface using
an older browser, follow this troubleshooting tip:
From the browser tool bar, go to the Tools | Internet
Options | Advanced tab, then under the Security
heading, use the available check boxes to disable the
Secure Sockets Layers (SSL 2.0 and SSL 3.0), then
enable the Transport Layer Security (TLS 1.0).
Remember to re-enable SSL once finished with
troubleshooting.
10.3.1
HTTPS Interface Operational Features
See Sect. 7.2.3 HTTP Interface Operational Features for an overview of the navigational and
operational features common with using this interface.
10.3.2
HTTPS Interface Menu Tree
The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the TRANSEC Module HTTPS
Interface:
Interface Navigator
Drop-down Menu
Page Navigation Tabs

Home
Admin
Stats
Maint
Crypto Officer
Home
Config
Module Status
Unit Info
Modem Operator
Contact
Update
Network Operator
Event
To the left, as described in previously, the Interface Navigator Drop-down menu and its selections
(shown in green) allow secure access to one of the SLM-5650As three distinct Web interfaces.
Once Crypto Officer (i.e., the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface) is selected, the interfaces
four available navigation tabs (shown in blue) may be accessed:
103

Home
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin (Administration)
Stats
Maint (Maintenance)
Beyond this top-level row of navigation tabs, the diagram illustrates the available nested
hyperlinks (shown in grey) that afford specific interface functionality.
10.4 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface Page Descriptions

The page figures provided throughout the remainder of this chapter omit the Interface
Navigator section that is typically located above the Comtech banner on each page;
the purpose and function of this common segment is defined in Sect. 10.3 Accessing
the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface.
10.4.1
Home pages
Select the Home or Contact hyperlink to continue.
10.4.1.1
Home | Home
Use this page to identify the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Modules operational (Firmware) Version.
The user may return to this page from anywhere within the HTTPS Interface by clicking the
Home tab or hyperlink.
Figure 10-1. Home | Home page
104

10.4.1.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Home | Contact
Use this page to reference basic contact information needed to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and
Customer Support via phone, fax, or Web/e-mail hyperlinks.
Figure 10-2. Home | Contact page
105

10.4.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin (Administrative) pages
The Admin pages provide configuration, firmware upgrade, and events log management functions.
Select the Config, Update, or Event hyperlink to continue.
10.4.2.1
Admin | Config
Figure 10-3. Admin | Config page
106

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Active Key
Item
Key Signature
(read-only)
Current TEK
(read-only)
Seed Key
(write-only)
Confirm Seed Key
(write-only)
Enter Passphrase
(write-only)
Description
This is a signature, or fingerprint, of the Transmission Encryption Keys (TEKs)
generated by the Seed Key and Passphrase. The user can compare signatures on
different modems to ensure that each has the same Seed Key and Passphrase.
NOTE: The TEKs are updated only when a Passphrase is submitted.
The user may generate 26 TEKs from the Seed Key and Passphrase (described
below). The active TEK (1 through 26) is displayed here. When it is desired to change
the encryption key being used to encrypt traffic, click [Next TEK] to select the next
key in the set of 26 TEKs.
Note the following:
The [Next TEK] button is disabled when the module is in secondary mode, and
the current TEK mirrors the TEK the connected primary modem uses.
The TEK only increments and never decrements; the user cannot re-use a
previous key. The only way to reset the TEK to 1 is by clicking [Activate Future
Key] (described below).
Enter a 32-character Seed Key in this text box to generate TEKs when the TRANSEC
Module is given a Passphrase (described below).
Re-enter the newly created Seed Key in this text box to ensure its accuracy.
Once the Seed Key is entered and confirmed, click [Update Seed Key] to finalize this
change.
Accepts a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously
entered Seed Key to generate TEKs.
Once the Passphrase is entered, click [Update Passphrase] to finalize this change.
Future Key
Item
[Activate Future Key]
Future Seed Key

(write-only)
Confirm Future Seed Key
(write-only)
Description
The user can program a second seed key and passphrase to generate a second set
of TEKs. These keys will lie dormant until the user activates them by clicking
[Activate Future Key]. At that time, the following happens:
1. The active TEKs are replaced by the ones generated with the Future Seed
Key and Future Passphrase.
2. The Current TEK gets reset to 1.
3. Secondary modems connected to this one will also activate their Future Keys.
NOTE: The [Activate Future Key] button is active only when the following conditions
are met:
1. The modem is in Primary mode (see Encryption Mode, explained below).
2. The Current TEK is greater than 1.
Enter a 32-character Future Seed Key in this text box to generate a TEK when the
TRANSEC Module is given a Future Passphrase (described below).
Re-enter the newly created Future Seed Key in this text box to ensure its accuracy.
Once the Future Seed Key is entered and confirmed, click [Update Seed Key] to
finalize this change.
107

Item
Future Passphrase
(write-only)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
Accepts a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously
entered Seed Key to generate TEKs.
Once the Passphrase is entered, click [Update Passphrase] to finalize this change.
Encryption Parameters
Item
Encryption Mode
Encryption
Description
Set encryption in the TRANSEC Module as Primary or Secondary.
Note the following:
If Primary is selected, the TRANSEC Module will allow the user to advance the
TEK and activate the future key independently of any other modems.
If Secondary is selected, the TRANSEC Module's TEK automatically mirrors the
TEK of the primary modem and the module will activate the future key when the
primary modem activates its future key.
Click [Update Mode] when done.
Click [Change Encryption State] to display the On and Off radio buttons. The
layered appearance of this control is intended to prevent the user from accidentally
toggling the Encryption State.
By selecting the Encryption State as On, this causes the data traffic to be encrypted by
the TRANSEC Module using the current TEK. This encrypted data is then delivered to
the base modem for transmission, regardless of the state of the receiving modem.
Three user-defined parameters must match in order for encrypted communication to
commence between two TRANSEC Module-equipped modems:
1. Seed Key.
2. Passphrase.
3. Encryption Frame Length.
Encryption Frame
Length
Reset all keys

Run self tests
Select the desired operational state, then click [Update Encryption] to save the
selected state and then return this selection to its protected mode; the On/Off radio
buttons will be hidden once again and the operational state message will update
accordingly (i.e., Encryption is On or Encryption is Off).
Use this text box to specify the length of the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)
256 encryption frame. Acceptable range is from 1 (fast acquisition, high overhead ) to
255 (slower acquisition, low overhead).
Once the desired Encryption Frame Length has been entered, click [Update Frame
Length] to implement this change.
Click [Zeroize] to reset all encryption keys in the modules memory and flash to
default values.
Click [Test] to run the modules cryptographic self tests.
Note the following:
If the tests succeed, the module will resume operation.
If the tests fail, the module will report an error to the event log.
If encryption is enabled and the tests fail, the module will stop transmitting data
to protect its integrity.
108

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Network Parameters
Item
Secure Management IP
Subnet Bits
Gateway IP
Description
Allows users to change the IP address of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own
operational environment.
NOTE: If this text box changes, it will be necessary to repeat the process in Section
10.3, using the newly-designated IP address, to regain access to the TRANSEC Web
Interface.
Allows users to modify the IP subnet mask of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own
Allows users to modify the default gateway of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own
NOTE: The IP address entered in the text box must match the subnet of the Secure
Management IP. If it does not then the Gateway IP text box will default to 0.0.0.0.
Click [Update Settings] to apply changes made to any of these parameters.
Crypto Officer Credentials

This section is used to create a TRANSEC Module Crypto Officer Username and Crypto
Officer Password. Note that are each restricted to a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25
characters, excluding : (ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), (ASCII Code
34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
The default for both the Crypto Officer Username and Password is comtech.
Item
Crypto Officer Username
Description
Use this text box to create the desired username.
Password
Use this text box to create the desired password for the username being created.
Confirm Password
Use this text box to re-enter the previously entered password.
Once the Username is entered and the Password is confirmed, click [Update Credentials] to
finalize this update.
SSH (Secure Shell) Console

Item
Host Key Signature
Description
This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the TRANSEC Module when
connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when they
connect to a system for the first time. The user can then compare the host key the
SSH client shows with the host key the TRANSEC Module displays to verify that they
are the same.
Click [Generate New Host Key] to generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the
TRANSEC Module. After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the TRANSEC
Module before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when they
connect again.
109

Item
SSH Console
10.4.2.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
Click On or Off to set administrative access to the console, then click [Update SSH]
to implement this setting.
Admin | Update
Figure 10-4. Admin | Update page

See Chapter 4. UPDATING FIRMWARE for instructions regarding the use of the Admin |
Update page (Figure 10-4) and for detailed information on the procedures associated with the
TRANSEC Module firmware update process.
1010

10.4.2.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Admin | Event
Use this page to display the events log specific to the TRANSEC Module, and to monitor and
troubleshoot the health of the TRANSEC Module.
Figure 10-5. Admin | Event page
Event Log Control

Item
Description
Logging On/Off
Enables/disables logging of event messages.

This drop-down menu controls the maximum filtering level of displayed messages.
Choices are Errors Only, Errors and Warnings, and All Information.
Logging Level
Click [Submit] to execute these settings.
Event Log
Column
Description
Index
Date
The event messages are numbered in the order they are received.
Describes the severity of the event. See Table 10-1 at the end of this section for an
overview of the event types and their recommended user responses.
Displays the date that the event was logged in using MONTH/DAY/YEAR format.
Time
Displays the time of day that the event was logged in 24-hour format.
Category
All messages in this log are categorized as EventLog.
Type
1011

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Table 10-1. Event Log Message Types

Event Type (By order of severity from least to worst case)
Event Type
Event Description
Level of Severity / User Action
Normal operational status change; e.g.,

Informational successful password or configuration setting
change.
Minimum. Event logged is for user reference only.
Warning
Status change that the system might not

accept or expect; e.g., setting the future
passphrase without first setting the future
seed key, entering an invalid remote
command, etc.
Moderate. User should consult the pertinent

sections of this manual to troubleshoot, then repeat
command or procedure as needed.
Minor
Error condition that the system should be

able to recover from without affecting the
operation of the system; e.g., encountering
software bug, etc.
Such events are not recorded into the
Events Log.
Moderate. User should report issues when

convenient to Comtech EF Data Customer Support
(i.e., via the means available through the SLM5650A TRANSEC Module Web Interface Home |
Contact page, or by using the SLM-5650 Web
Server Interface Home | Support e-mail interface,
etc.).
Major
Critical
A more severe error that may indicate a

degradation of the stability of the system;
e.g., out-of-range temperature readings for
the TRANSEC Module, etc.
The most severe error level indicating that
system failure has occurred or is imminent;
e.g., memory allocation failure, OS failure,
etc.
Maximum. User should contact Comtech EF

Data Customer Support as soon as possible to
address issue.
Maximum. User should contact Comtech EF
Data Customer Support immediately to arrange
for RMA / in-factory service.
Click [Clear Log] to clear the event log of all messages. The event log is reset to zero entries.
1012

10.4.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Stats (Statistics) | Module Status
Figure 10-6. Stats | Module Status page
Encryption Parameters
Item
Description
AES256 Firmware Version
Identifies the version of the AES 256 core.
Encryption Frame Length
Displays the currently configured AES 256 frame length.
Board Temp
Displays the temperature of the TRANSEC Module
TRANSEC Clock Status
Displays the DCM locked status for the AES 256 core.
Transmit Status
Item
Description
TX Frame Count
Displays the number of transmitted AES 256 frames.
TX Status
Describes the value of the Tx Status register.
DCM Lock
Displays the state of the Tx DCM lock.
Bypass Traffic
Displays the encryption status (Bypass on means Encryption off).

When Detected, the module has sampled outgoing traffic and verifies it has been
encrypted. When Not Detected, encryption is off, or the module cannot verify
encrypted traffic.
Indicates if the AES 256 core is analyzing the results of its Built-in Self Test (BIST)
for the TRANSEC Tx.
Crypto Traffic
BIST Done
Receive Status
1013

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Item
Description
RX CRC Errors
Displays the count of received CRC errors.
RX Frame Count
Displays the number of received AES 256 frames.
RX Status
Displays the value of the Rx Status register.
DCM Lock
Displays the state of the Rx DCM lock.

Indicates that the decryption engine has successfully found the unique word and
has been able to lock to it.
Indicates that an out-of-sync condition has been detected by the encryption engine.
Indicates whether the AES 256 core is analyzing the results of its Built-in Self Test
(BIST) for the TRANSEC Rx.
Unique Word Lock

Out of Sync
BIST Done
Automatic Refresh Status Timer

The page updates itself automatically for the duration of the countdown timer. When the timer
reaches 0:00, the page will stop updating to help conserve system resources.
To manually override the timer, click [Stop] to interrupt or [Reset] to restart the timer.
10.4.4
Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info
Use this scrollable read-only page to view the Firmware Information window. The information
provided here serves to verify that the correct firmware is loaded into the unit.
Figure 10-7. Maint | Unit Info page
1014
Chapter 11. TRANSEC MODULE

SSH CLI OPERATION
11.1 Overview
This chapter defines the Command Line Interface (CLI) user menu system provided with the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modems optional TRANSEC Module via a SSH (Secure Shell) interface.
The SSH interface allows the user to change operating parameters similar to those found on the
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface, and with the monitoring, configuration, and control
operations available via the modem front panel. Refer back to Chapter 10. TRANSEC
MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE or Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION,
respectively, for detailed information about the command functionality outlined in this chapter.
111

TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
11.1.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
SSH (Secure Shell) User Access
When connecting via SSH, the user must have network connectivity to the TRANSEC Module.
This connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite link from another
modem.
As explained in Chapter Sect. 6.6 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface, this chapter uses
PuTTY, a free and open source terminal emulator application used as a serial console
client for SSH, Telnet, rlogin and raw TCP computing protocols. While the TRANSEC
Module CLI main and nested screens will be identical across terminal emulator
applications, setup may differ slightly this chapter assumes users familiarity with
their preferred SSH interface.
Once connected to the TRANSEC Module via the SSH interface, the user will need to provide a
login name and password (the defaults for both are comtech). When the valid login and password
are provided, the user is taken directly to the CLI Main Menu, as shown in the following
examples:
112

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2 Command Line Interface (CLI) Pages

11.2.1
CLI Menu System Parallel Functionality
The CLI, accessible via SSH, allows the user to change operating parameters in a manner similar
to the functionality, as provided, for the monitoring, configuration, and control via the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modems front panel menus (see Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION) and the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface (see Chapter 10. TRANSEC
MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE).
11.2.2
CLI Menu Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features
Note the following:

1. With some exceptions, the menu pages depicted in this chapter feature the following
information or navigational aids:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
[Text field example]
[RO]
Logout of Administration
Session
Exit Menu
Description
Typically found in the body of the page. This designates the
field as a read-only status/informational message. There is no
user action required for this item.
Found at the bottom of the page. Allows user to log out of the
SSH session.
Found at the bottom of the page. Allows user to exit the current
menu and return to the parent menu. Alternately, the user may
press the Esc key to perform the same action.
2. Typically, once any mnemonic is entered, the user is

prompted to type in a functional selection, an
alphanumeric configuration string, or an operational
value. This prompt is provided at the bottom of the active
page and takes the form of a selection choice and/or a
blank prompt (a solid bar), as shown in the example to
the right:
3. If a parameter is rejected for any reason, an error will appear at the top of the page, along
with an explanation that serves to assist the user in the re-entry of information, as per the
following examples:
113

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Any changes made via the CLI should be saved to permanent storage prior to terminating the
CLI session. While changes will remain active so long as the modem remains in operation,
take note also that changes will be lost if, for example, the SLM-5650A loses power.
Modified parameters can be saved by issuing the Save command S from any menu. The
user is prompted to confirm that all changes should be made permanent:
4. The user is prompted, when attempting to terminate a CLI session via Logout command L,
to verify that the session should be ended:
114

11.2.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Main Menu
The Main Menu serves as the CLIs primary navigation page. All selections made on this page
take the user to submenus listed in this table (operational features nested under each of these
submenus, in turn, are outlined in the chapter sections listed):
Submenu
Entry
Configuration
Module Status
Event Log
Unit Info
Comtech EF Data
Information
Function/Description
See
The Configuration Menu page provides configuration

access to the TRANSEC Module encryption features.
Sect. 11.2.4
(11.2.4.1 through
11.2.4.6)
The Module Status page (no nested menus). This

read-only page compiles the TRANSEC Modules
current operating parameters.
Opens the Event Log page. The user monitors and
controls operational faults and alarms here.
Opens the Unit Info page. The firmware bootup
settings and system reboot controls are provided on
this page.
Opens the Comtech EF Data Information page (no
nested menus). This read-only page provides
customer support contact information.
115
Sect. 11.2.5
Sect. 11.2.6
Sect. 11.2.7
Sect. 11.2.8

11.2.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Configuration page [C]
The Configuration Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or
fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description
See
[Operating mode:]
[RO]
Identifies the modems active Encryption Mode as Primary

or Secondary (see Sect. 11.3.1.1.3 for details).
N/A
Active Encryption Key
Opens the nested Active Encryption Key Menu page.
Sect. 11.2.4.1
Future Encryption Key
Opens the nested Future Encryption Key Menu page.
Sect. 11.2.4.2
Encryption Settings
Opens the nested Encryption Menu page.
Sect. 11.2.4.3
Network Configuration
Opens the nested Network Menu page.
Sect. 11.2.4.4
Crypto Officer
Credentials
Opens the nested Credentials Menu page.
Sect. 11.2.4.5
SSH Console
Opens the nested SSH Console Menu page.
Sect. 11.2.4.6
See Chapter Sect. 10.4.2.1 Admin | Config for detailed information about the
configuration parameters and operations addressed by these nested menus.
116

11.2.4.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Configuration | Active Encryption Key Menu page [A]
The Active Encryption Key Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description/User Prompt
[Key Signature]
[RO]
Current Active Key Signature is identified here.
Seed Key
User is prompted to enter a 32-character Active Seed Key to generate a TEK

when the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase (described below).
Confirm Seed Key
User is prompted confirm to the Active Seed Key just entered.
[Seed Key fields]
[RO]
Passphrase
[Current TEK]
Next TEK
P
[RO]
N
Displays the status of the Active Seed Key in real time.

User is prompted to enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined
with the previously entered Active Seed Key to generate TEKs.
Identifies the Current TEK (1 through 26).
Generates the next available TEK. The [Current TEK] field will update
accordingly.
Note: This command is disabled when the module is in secondary mode and
the current TEK mirrors the TEK the connected primary modem uses.
117

11.2.4.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Configuration | Future Encryption Key Menu page [F]
The Future Encryption Key Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains options
or fields that are identical to those provided from the Active Encryption Key Menu, except that
all commands are applicable to management of Future Encryption Keys:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description/User Prompt
[Key Signature]
[RO]
Future Key Signature is identified here.
Seed Key
User is prompted to enter a 32-character Future Seed Key to generate a TEK

when the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase (described below).
Confirm Seed Key
User is prompted confirm to the Future Seed Key just entered.
[Seed Key fields]
[RO]
Passphrase
Activate Future Key
Displays the status of the Future Seed Key in real time.
User is prompted to enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined

with the previously entered Future Seed Key to generate TEKs.
Activates the future key and resets the TEK index to 1.
I
Note: This option appears only when the module is in primary mode, the user
(Not
has entered a Future Seed Key and Passphrase, and the user has advanced
shown)
the current TEK so it is anywhere from 2 to 26.
P
See Chapter Sect. 10.4.2.1 Admin | Config for further information about Active vs.
Future Encryption Keys.
118

11.2.4.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Configuration | Encryption Menu page [E]
The Encryption Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the following options
or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description
Prompts user to sets the Encryption Mode operation:
Encryption
Operating Mode
Frame Length
Specifies the length of the AES 256 encryption frame from 1 to 255.
Zeroize All Keys
Resets all encryption keys in the modules memory and flash to default values.
Runs the modules cryptographic self tests.

Note the following:
o If the tests succeed, the module will resume operation.
o If the tests fail, the module will report an error to the event log.
o If encryption is enabled and the tests fail, the module will stop
transmitting data to protect its integrity
Run Self Tests
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Prompts user to sets the Operating Mode operation:

0 Primary
119
1 Secondary

11.2.4.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Configuration | Network Menu page [N]
The Network Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the following options or
fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description
Secure Management IP
User changes the TRANSEC Module IP address as needed.

Note: If this address is changed, it will be necessary to repeat the login
process for the SSH interface, as described in Section 6.6, using the newlydesignated IP address, to regain access to the TRANSEC Module SSH CLI.
Subnet Bits
User changes the IP subnet mask of the TRANSEC Module as needed.
User changes the TRANSEC Module IP gateway address as needed.

Note: If this address is changed, it must match the subnet of the Secure
Management IP. If it does not then the Gateway IP text box will default to
0.0.0.0.
Gateway IP
1110

11.2.4.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Configuration | Credentials Menu page [C]
The Credentials Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the following options
or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description
Crypto Officer User Name
User is prompted to create the desired User Name.
Crypto Officer Password
User is prompted to create the desired Password.
Confirm Password
User is prompted to confirm the Password just entered.
[Password Fields]
[RO]
Provides the status of the password field in real time.
The Crypto Officer User Name and Password are each restricted to a minimum of 7
and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding: (ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code 60), >
(ASCII Code 62), (ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
1111

11.2.4.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Configuration | SSH Console Menu page [S]
The SSH Console Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
[Host Key Signature]
[RO]
Generate new host Key
SSH
Description
Displays the key signature, or fingerprint, which helps to identify the
TRANSEC Module when connecting through SSH.
User is prompted to generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the
TRANSEC Module.
User is prompted to toggle Secure Shell Console operation:
0 Off
1112
1 On

11.2.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Module Status page [M]
The read-only Module Status page, opened from the Main Menu, provides the user with the
TRANSEC Module Interfaces current operational parameters:
AES 256 Version;
Encryption Frame Length;
Operating Mode;
Board Temperature;
TRANSEC Clock Status;
Transmit Status;
Receive Status.
Pressing any key will return the user to the Main Menu page.
1113

11.2.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Event Log [E]
The Event Log Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Logging
Entry
M
Description
Sets recording of events and alarms:
0 Off
1 On
Sets the level of information collected for the Events Log:

Logging Level
0 Errors Only
1 Errors and Warnings
2 - All Information
View Event Log
Clear Event Log
Displays the tally of events logged since the last time the Log was cleared.
Clears the event log of all messages. Once selected, the user is prompted
with the following message:
This action will clear the event log.
Are you sure? (Y/N)
Enter Y or N. If Y is entered, the event log is reset to zero entries, and the
following message is displayed:
Event log cleared.
Press Any Character to Continue.
Pressing any key returns the user to the Event Log Menu page.
See Chapter Sect. 10.4.2.3 Admin | Event for detailed information about the
operating parameters addressed by this menu.
1114

11.2.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Unit Info [ I ]
See Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING for detailed information on the procedures

associated with the TRANSEC Module firmware update process.
The Unit Information page, opened from the Main Menu, provides information needed to verify
that the correct firmware is loaded for operation of the unit. Note the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
[Bootrom Info]
[RO]
Displays the bootrom firmware.
[Bulk 1 Info]
[RO]
Displays the firmware version loaded into the Slot 1 location.
[Bulk 2 Info]
[RO]
Displays the firmware version loaded into the Slot 2 location.
Boot From
Reboot
Selects the firmware boot source for modem operations as follows:

0 Newest (automatically selects the most current version firmware
residing in either Slot 1 or Slot 2);
1 Slot 1 (selects the firmware residing in the Slot 1 location;
2 Slot 2 (selects the firmware residing in the Slot 2 location.
Note: If the Boot From selection is changed, the user must reboot the
modem in order for that firmware selection to be loaded for operation.
Reboots the modem. When selected, the following message displays:
This action will reboot the TRANSEC module.
Are you sure? (Y/N)
Enter Y or N. If Y is entered, the reboot process begins by closing the

SSH CLI. On the SLM-5650A front panel VFD, three messages will display
at minimum (depending on the modems installed options):
THIS MODEM WILL REBOOT
IN FIVE SECONDS!
BOOTING MODEM
PLEASE WAIT
INITIALIZING MODEM
Once the modem reboots, the user must initialize a new SSH CLI session to
resume use of this interface.
1115

11.2.8
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Comtech EF Data Information page [Z]
The read-only Comtech EF Data Information page, opened from the Main Menu, provides the
user with basic contact information to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and Customer Support via
phone or e-mail.
Press any key to return to the Main Menu page.
1116
Chapter 12. 10/100/1000 BaseT

(GbE) INTERFACE
12.1 Introduction
Figure 12-1. 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module (AS/11985)

The 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Interface Module, shown in
Figure 12-1, acts as an Ethernet bridge for data traffic. Monitor and Control (M&C) information
is not supported on the GbE Interface but is available through the 10/100 BaseT remote port of
the modem. A functional block diagram is shown in Figure 12-2.
The GbE Interface supports data rates from 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps. IP traffic entering the GbE
Interface is encapsulated in HDLC protocol for transmission over the satellite link. HDLC
CRS-16 verification is performed on all received (from WAN) HDLC frames. The GbE module
user interface is a single IEEE 802.3ab 1000 BaseT copper compliant female RJ-45 connector,
wired as described in Table 12-1.
12.2 Physical Description

The GbE Interface is implemented on a 4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x
2.16H cm) PCB. Connectivity to the SLM-5650A is accomplished with a 96-pin DIN receptacle.
The LAN interface consists of an RJ-45 connector with link status and link activity LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicators.
121

10/100/1000 Base-T (GbE) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 12-2. GbE Interface Functional Block Diagram
12.2.1
Connector Pinout
The GbE Interface is comprised of one IEEE 802.3ab 1000BaseT copper interface via a single
RJ-45 type female connector (J1). The LAN interface supports 10/100/1000 BaseT operation.
Table 12-1. Connector Pinout
Pin #
Description
Direction
BI_DA+
bidirectional
BI_DA-
bidirectional
BI_DB+
bidirectional
BI_DC+
bidirectional
BI_DC-
bidirectional
BI_DB-
bidirectional
BI_DD+
bidirectional
BI_DD-
bidirectional
122

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
12.3 General Specifications

General Specifications
Data Framing
10/100/1000 BaseT Interface: RFC-894 Ethernet
Data Framing Format (WAN)
HDLC (Standard Single Channel)
Connector
RJ-45 female, 100
Electrical Properties
Per IEEE 802.3ab
Packet Types
Burst, distributed, or IPV4
Signal Types
Serial data
Voltage Level
Per IEEE- 802.3ab
Packet Latency
50 ms maximum
Flow Control
None
Cable Length, Maximum
100 meters CAT 5 cable, patch cords and connecting hardware, per
ISO/IEC 11801:1995 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A (1995)
Hot Pluggable
Cable
Yes
Module
NO
LEDs
Link Status, link activity
Ingress Packet Filtration Parameters
MAC, IP address match value configuration for media and management

packets, UDP port for media packets
Egress Packet Parameters
Destination IP address and UDP port for media packets
Packet Filtration Parameters (generic)
IP address match value configuration for management packets
1000 BaseT Link Statistics
Ingress good octets

Ingress bad octets
Ingress unicast packets
Ingress broadcast packets
Ingress multicast packets
Ingress pause packets
Ingress undersize packets
Ingress fragments
Ingress oversize packets
Ingress jabber
Ingress Rx errors
Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors
Egress oclets
Egress unicast packets
Egress broadcast packets
Egress multicast packets
123

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Monitor & Control

WAN Port Statistics
Ingress good oclets

Ingress bad oclets
Ingress fragments
Ingress jabber
Ingress Rx errors
Egress oclets
HDLC link errors
Rx packet count
Tx packet count
Management Port Statistics
Ingress good oclets

Ingress bad oclets
Ingress fragments
Ingress jabber
Ingress Rx errors
Egress oclets
Controlled Functions
TX data rate
Rx data rate
Tx enable/disable
Rx enable/disable
Management IP Address and Mask
124

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
12.4 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module Removal and Installation

Ensure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the
equipment could result if the unit is powered during module removal or
installation.
installation.
12.4.1
GbE Interface Module Removal Procedure

Step
12.4.2
Task
Disconnect the RJ-45 cable from the Interface Module.
Loosen the (two) captive screws securing the module to the chassis.
Pull the module straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.
GbE Interface Module Installation Procedure

Step
Task
Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis internal card guides,
until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.
Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive screws.
Connect the RJ-45 cable to the Interface Module.
125

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
126
Chapter 13. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2

INTERFACE
13.1 Introduction
Figure 13-1. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (AS/11579 shown)

The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (Figure 13-1) provides physical and electrical
connection between the external terrestrial device and the internal circuitry of the SLM-5650As
modulator and demodulator. By convention, a modem is Data Communications Equipment
(DCE), where Tx data enters the data interface and Rx data exits it.
The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module supports balanced or unbalanced, and differential/
single-ended operation. The plug-in interface has full duplex capability.
131

G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

Figure 13-2 shows the functional block diagram for this interface. (Refer back to Figure 13-1 for
the rear panel view of the Interface Module.)
Figure 13-2. G.703T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Functional Block Diagram

The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module provides:
Two (2) G.703 Interfaces:

o
Balanced T1/E1 and T2 (J1);

Unbalanced T1/E1, T2/E2 (J2 Tx / J3 Rx).
An External Clock Input (J4).
132

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
13.2.1
Connector Pinouts
13.2.1.1
J1 | BAL DATA Connector DB-15F (G.703 Balanced)

Table 13-1. J1 | BAL DATA Connector Pinout
Connector | REF DES
Pin #
G.703 (Non-D&I)
Direction
SD_A G.703
In
SD_B G.703
In
Ground
RD_A G.703
Out
RD_B G.703
Out
Ground
1
9
10
11
4
J1
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
13.2.1.2
J2 through J4 Connectors BNC (G.703 Unbalanced)

Table 13-2. 75 BNC Connectors (G.703 Unbalanced)
Connector | REF DES
Description
Characteristics
J2
Tx Data G.703 (Input)
BNC 75 Female
J3
Rx Data G.703
(Output)
BNC 75 Female
J4
Ext Clock Ref (Input)
BNC 75 Female
133

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
13.3 Summary of Specifications

Item
Requirements
Interface Balanced and Unbalanced G.703 ports, T1/E1, T2/E2
Note: Selection of a data rate requires TX and RX having the same data rate.
External Clock Input One input
G.703 Frame
Types
Rx Buffer
GENERAL
Type
Bits
Bytes
T1
G.704
9264
192
E1
G.704
512
64
T2
G.704
G.743
G.747
12624
2352
1680
1578
294
210
E2
G.704
G.745
G.742
2112
2112
1696
264
264
212
Minimum Buffer Size for any rate

Maximum Buffer Size:
Note: Programmable in 0.5 ms increments..
0.5 ms
G.751 61 ms
G.752 44 ms
G.753 61 ms
Clock Options
Tx Clock = Tx, Rx (satellite), or External

Rx Clock = Tx, Rx, External, or Internal
Acquisition Range Programmed Tx data rate 100 ppm

Baseband Loopback (at interface)
Test Interface Loopback (through interface card)
2047 test pattern generator
G.703 Unbalanced
1 channel supporting T1/E1, T2/E2, and G.703
Connector Type
Signals Supported
Data Rate
Tx and Rx Data Rates
Line Coding
Pulse Mask
Impedance
INTERFACES
External Clock Input
Connector
Impedance
Return Loss per G.703
Input Amplitude
Input Frequency
Signal Characteristics
Alarms
PHYSICAL and
ENVIRONMENTAL
Physical
Environmental
Temperature
Humidity
BNC, female
ITU-T-G.703 SD, RD
1544, 2048, 6312, and 8448 kbps
Tx and Rx data rates are programmed the same
HDB3, B8ZS, B6ZS, HDB3, AMI (Common)
ITU-T-G.703
75 Unbalanced, 150 Balanced Per ITU-T-G.703
BNC, female
75 5%
Synchronization XXXXX Interface
0.5 to 5.0 V peak to peak
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 1.544, 2.048, 6.312, and 8.448 MHz
Sine wave or square with duty cycle of 50 10%
Loss of Signal
All 1s
4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x 2.16H cm)
0 to 50 C (32 to 122F)
0 to 95% non-condensing
134

13.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal and Installation

installation.
installation.
13.4.1
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal Procedure

Step
13.4.2
Task
Disconnect all cables (DB-15 and BNC) from the Interface Module.
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Installation Procedure

Step
Task
Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis internal card guides,
until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.
Connect all cables (DB-15 and BNC) to the Interface Module.
135

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
136
Chapter 14. LOW VOLTAGE

DIFFERENTIAL (LVDS) INTERFACE
14.1 Introduction
Figure 14-1. Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (PL/12272-1)

The Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (Figure 14-1) provides a physical and
electrical interface between the SLM-5650As modulator or demodulator signal sources operating
with LVDS electrical characteristics. By convention, a modem is Data Communications Equipment
(DCE), where Tx data enters the data interface and Rx data exits it.
141

Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

Figure 14-2 shows the functional block diagram for this interface. It provides a single Type D
25-pin female (DB-25F) connector wired as described in Table 14-1. (Refer back to Figure 14-1
for the LVDS Interface Module as viewed from the rear panel.)
Figure 14-2. LVDS Interface Functional Block Diagram
142

14.2.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
J1 Connector Pinout
The J1 LVDS module user data interface is a single Type D 25-pin female (DB-25F)
connector.
Table 14-1. J1 Connector Pinout
PIN #
DESCRIPTION
DIRECTION
1 GND
14
15
16
SD_P
IN
2 SD_N
IN
SCT_N
OUT
3 RX_DATA_N
OUT
RX_DATA_P
OUT
4 RTS_N
17
IN
LVDS_RX_CLK_N
OUT
5 SPARE
18
19
RESERVED
6 SPARE
RTS_P
IN
7 GND
20
SPARE
8 RR_N
21
OUT
SPARE
9 LVDS_RX_CLK_P
22
OUT
SPARE
10 RR_P
23
24
OUT
SPARE
11 TT_P
IN
TT_N
IN
12 SCT_P
25
OUT
RESERVED
13 SPARE
143

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
14.3 General Specifications

Specification Type
General
Physical
Environmental
Characteristic
Description
Digital Data Rate
64 kbps to 42 Mbps, in 1 bps steps
Tx Clock Source
Rx, INT, Tx Terrestrial, and Data Source Sync
Transmit Clock and Data

Inversion
Interface can invert the Tx clock and data independently of

each other.
Buffer Clock Source
INT, Tx Terrestrial, Rx Satellite
Buffer Size
128 to 4,194,304 bits, or 2 to 60 mSec
Physical Size
4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches

(11.43 W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm)
Temperature
0 to 50C
(32 to 122F)
Humidity
0 to 95% non-condensing
144

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
14.4 LVDS Interface Module Removal and Installation

installation.
installation.
14.4.1
LVDS Interface Module Removal Procedure

Step
14.4.2
Task
Disconnect the DB-25M cable from the Interface Module.
LVDS Interface Module Installation Procedure

Step
Task
Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis internal card guides, until it plugs
securely into the internal card receptacle.
Connect the DB-25M cable to the Interface Module.
145

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
146
Chapter 15. DoubleTalk

Carrier-in-Carrier OPTION
Before attempting to commission a satellite link using Carrier-in-Carrier, the
user must ensure that the link is robust enough for normal operation. Only when
this has been done and all system issues (e.g., antenna-pointing, cabling,
terrestrial interference, satellite interference, etc.) have been resolved should
the user attempt the use of Carrier-in-Carrier.
15.1 Introduction
Space segment costs are typically the most significant operating expense for any satellite-based
service. Such costs have a direct impact on the viability and profitability of the service. For a
satellite transponder that has finite resources in terms of bandwidth and power, the leasing costs
are determined by bandwidth and power used. A satellite circuit should therefore be designed for
optimal utilization to use a similar share of transponder bandwidth and power.
The traditional approach towards balancing a satellite circuit once the satellite and earth station
parameters are fixed involves trade-off between modulation and coding. A lower order
modulation requires less transponder power, while using more bandwidth. Conversely, higher
order modulation reduces required bandwidth, albeit at a significant increase in power.
Comtech EF Datas DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier serves to resolve this issue.
15.2 What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier?

The SLM-5650As DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) option uses a patented signal processing
algorithm developed by Raytheon Applied Signal Technology that allows both the forward and
reverse carriers of a full duplex link to share the same segment of transponder bandwidth, using
patented Adaptive Cancellation. Raytheon Applied Signal Technology uses the term
DoubleTalk, and Comtech EF Data refers to it as DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC)1.
DoubleTalk is licensed from and is a registered trademark of Raytheon Applied Signal

Technology. Carrier-in-Carrier is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data.
151
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem

DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CnC was first introduced in Comtech EF Datas CDM-Qx Satellite Modem and, more recently, in
the CLO-10 Link Optimizer. The implementation of CnC in the SLM-5650A has been further
refined to address some of the limitations that existed in the CDM-Qx implementation.
This technology improves bandwidth and power utilization beyond what is possible with FEC
and modulation alone. This allows unprecedented user savings and, when combined with
advanced modulation and FEC, it allows for multi-dimensional optimization:
Reduced operating expense (OPEX) e.g., Occupied Bandwidth & Transponder Power;
Reduced capital expenditure (CAPEX) e.g., Block Up Converter/High-Power Amplifier

(BUC/HPA) size and/or antenna size;
Increased throughput without using additional transponder resources;
Increased link availability (margin) without using additional transponder resources;
A combination of any of the above to meet different objectives.
Summary: When carriers share common bandwidth, up to 50% savings in transponder

utilization is possible.
15.3 Application Requirements

The following conditions are necessary in order to operate DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier:
Link must be full duplex.
An SLM-5650A must be used at the end of the link where the cancellation needs to take
place.
The transponder is operated as Loopback. That is, each end of the link must be able to see
a copy of its own signal in the return (downlink) path from the satellite. The looped back
signal is then subtracted, which leaves the signal from the distant end of the link. CnC
cannot be used in spot beam systems.
The transponder needs to be bent-pipe meaning no on-board processing,

demodulation, regeneration can be employed. Demodulation/remodulation does not
preserve the linear combination of the forward and return signals, and the resulting
reconstituted waveform prevents recovery of the original constituent signals.
Figure 155-1 shows a simplified conceptual block diagram of CnC processing. The two ends of
the link are denoted A and B and the uplink and downlink are shown.
This performance is achieved through advanced signal processing algorithms that provide optimal
cancellation while tracking and compensating for the following common link impairments:
1) Time varying delay: In addition to the static delays of the electronics and the round-trip
delay associated with propagation to the satellite and back, there is a time-varying
152

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
component due to movement of the satellite. The CnC module tracks and compensates
for this variation.
2) Frequency offset and drift: Common sources are satellite Doppler shift, up and down
converter frequency uncertainties, and other drift associated with the electronics in the
SLM-5650A itself. The CnC module tracks and compensates for this frequency offset
and drift.
3) Atmospheric effects: Fading and scintillation can affect amplitude, phase, and spectral
composition of the signal and the degree to which it correlates with the original signal.
The CnC module tracks and compensates for these atmospheric related impairments.
4) Link Asymmetries: Various asymmetries in the forward and return link can produce
differences in the relative power of the two received signal components. These can be
both deterministic (static) or random (and time varying). An example of the former would
be the differences resulting from antenna size/gain variations between the two ends of the
link. An example of the latter would be transient power differences due to different levels
of atmospheric fading in the uplinks. CnC compensates for the asymmetries, up to a
certain extent.
Figure 155-1. Conceptual Block Diagram
153

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
In a number of ways, CnC carriers behave similar to conventional carriers in satellite links. They
are both exposed to adjacent carriers, cross-polarization and rain fade, and exhibit impairments
when any of these become too great. In addition, CnC operates in an environment where:
15.3.1
Carriers intentionally occupy the same spectral slot;
Performance depends upon desired and co-located interfering carrier.
Operational Recommendations
The rules for CnC operation are summarized as follows:
Both earth stations share the same footprint so each sees both carriers.
CnC carriers are operated in pairs.
One outbound with multiple return carriers is not allowed.
Asymmetric data rates are allowed (no restrictions).
The ratio of power spectral density is normally less than 11 dB.
CnC operates with modems not modulators only or demodulators only.
In addition, to minimize false acquisition, observe the following:
Use of IESS-315 V.35 Scrambler is highly recommended.
Keep the search delay range as narrow as possible once the modem has reported the
search delay, narrow the search delay range to the nominal reported value 5 ms for
example, if the modem reported delay is 245 ms, narrow the search range to say 240-250
ms.
Use external data source (e.g. Fireberd) or internal BER tester when testing CnC
performance.
To prevent self-locking in case the desired carrier is lost, it is recommended that the two
carriers have some configuration difference for example, use different settings for
Spectrum Inversion.
154

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.4 System Functionality and Operational Considerations

Figure 15-2 illustrates a conventional, full duplex satellite link where two carriers are placed in
non-overlapping channels. Figure 15-3 shows the same link using the SLM-5650A equipped
with the DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier option. Note that only 50% of the bandwidth is being
used, as both carriers are now occupying the same bandwidth.
The transponder downlinks the composite signal containing both carriers on the same band to the
SLM-5650A, which then translates the signal to near-baseband where it can be filtered
(decimated) and then processed as a complex envelope signal. The SLM-5650A then suppresses
the version of the near-end carrier on the downlink side, and then passes the desired carrier to the
demodulator for normal processing.
To further illustrate, as shown in Figure 15-4, without CnC, the two carriers in a typical full
duplex satellite link are adjacent to each other. With CnC, only the composite signal is visible
when observed on a spectrum analyzer. Carrier 1 and Carrier 2, shown here for reference only,
are overlapping, thus sharing the same spectrum.
Figure 15-2. Conventional FDMA Link
155

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 15-3. Same Link Using SLM-5650A and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier
Figure 15-4. Duplex Link Optimization

The SLM-5650A CnC module operates on the near-zero signal before the demodulator, and is
waveform-agnostic. This means that no prior knowledge of the underlying modulation, FEC, or
any other waveform specific parameter is required in order to perform the signal suppression
operation. The only caveat to this is that the waveform must be sufficiently random.
Because acquiring the delay and frequency offset of the interfering carrier is fundamentally a
correlation operation, anything deterministic in the interfering carrier (within the correlation
window of the algorithm) will potentially produce false correlation peaks and result in incorrect
delays and/or frequency. Normally, this is not a problem, since energy dispersal techniques are
used in the vast majority of commercial and military modems. However, it is something that must
156

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
be kept in mind when troubleshooting a system that uses the CnC technique for signal
suppression.
One possible way to mitigate false peaks is to narrow the correlation window. For example, if the
delay is known to be around 240ms, set the minimum search delay to 230ms and the maximum
search delay to 250ms.
As all advances in modem technologies including advanced modulation and FEC techniques
approach their theoretical limits of power and bandwidth efficiencies, CnC allows satellite users
to achieve spectral efficiencies (bps/Hz) that cannot be achieved with modulation and FEC alone.
Table 15-1 illustrates how CnC, when used with 16-QAM, approaches the bandwidth efficiency
of 256-QAM (8bps/Hz).
Table 15-1. Spectral Efficiency using DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier
Modulation
and Code Rate
Spectral Efficiency (bps/Hz)

Traditional SCPC
Carrier-in-Carrier
BPSK 1/2
0.50
1.00
QPSK 1/2
1.00
2.00
QPSK 2/3
1.33
2.67
QPSK 3/4
1.50
3.00
QPSK 7/8
1.75
3.50
8-QAM 2/3
2.00
4.00
8-QAM 3/4
2.25
4.50
8-QAM 7/8
2.63
5.25
16-QAM 3/4
3.00
6.00
16-QAM 7/8
3.50
7.00
As shown here, CnC allows equivalent spectral efficiency using a lower order modulation and/or
FEC Code Rate; CAPEX is therefore reduced by allowing the use of a smaller BUC/HPA and/or
antenna. And, as CnC can be used to save transponder bandwidth and/or transponder power, it
can be successfully deployed in bandwidth-limited as well as power-limited scenarios.
15.4.1
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Cancellation Process
The signal processing technology employed via CnC continually estimates and tracks all
parametric differences between the local uplink signal and its image within the downlink.
Through advanced adaptive filtering and phase locked loop implementations, it dynamically
compensates for these differences by appropriately adjusting the delay, frequency, phase and
amplitude of the sampled uplink signal, resulting in optimal cancellation performance.
When a full duplex satellite connection is established between two sites, separate satellite
channels are allocated for each direction. If both directions transmitted on the same channel, each
side would normally find it impossible to extract the desired signal from the aggregate due to
interference originating from its local modulator. However, since this interference is produced
locally, it is possible to estimate and remove its influence prior to demodulation of the data
transmitted from the remote location.
157

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
For the CnC cancellation, it is necessary to provide each demodulator with a copy of its local
modulators output.
As shown in Figure 15-5: Modem 1 and Modem 2 transmit signals S1 and S2 respectively. The
satellite receives, translates, and retransmits the composite signal. The downlink signals S1* and
S2* received at Modem 1 and Modem 2 differ from the transmit signals primarily in terms of
phase, frequency, and delay offsets.
Figure 15-5. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Signals

Referring to Figure 15-6: For round trip delay estimation, a search algorithm is used that
correlates the received satellite signal to a stored copy of the local modulators transmitted signal.
The interference cancellation algorithm uses the composite signal and the local copy of S1 to
estimate the necessary parameters of scaling (complex gain/phase), delay offset and frequency
offset. The algorithm continuously tracks changes in these parameters as they are generally timevarying in a satellite link.
Figure 15-6. Carrier-in-Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram

The resulting estimate of the unwanted interfering signal is then subtracted from the composite
signal. In practical applications, the estimate of the unwanted signal can be extremely accurate.
158

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Unwanted interfering signal suppression of 30 dB or more has been achieved in commercial

products with minimal degradation of the demodulator performance.
15.4.2
Margin Requirements
Typical interfering signal cancellation is 28 to 35 dB (depending on the product). The residual

interfering signal appears as noise causing a slight degradation of the Eb/No. To compensate for
the residual noise, a small amount of additional link margin is required to maintain the BER.
Margin requirements depend on the product, modulation and power ratios:
For the SLM-5650A, the additional margin requirements are as follows:
15.4.3
Modulation
Nominal Margin*
BPSK
0.3 dB
QPSK/OQPSK
0.3 dB
8-PSK
0.5 dB
8-QAM
0.4 dB
16-QAM
0.6 dB
* Equal power and equal symbol rate for the

interfering carrier and the desired carrier, i.e., 0 dB
PSD ratio. Measured at IF with AWGN, +10 dBc
Adjacent Carriers, 1.3 spacing.
Carrier-in-Carrier Latency
Carrier-in-Carrier has no measurable impact on circuit latency.
15.4.4
Carrier-in-Carrier and Adaptive Coding and Modulation
Carrier-in-Carrier is fully compatible with the VersaFEC Adaptive Coding and Modulation
(ACM) mode of operation in the SLM-5650A.
Carrier-in-Carrier combined with VersaFEC ACM can provide 100-200% increase in average
throughput.
15.4.5
Carrier-in-Carrier Link Design
Carrier-in-Carrier link design involves finding the FEC and modulation combination that
provides optimal bandwidth utilization. Just like conventional link design, it is an iterative
process that involves trying different FEC and modulation combinations with Carrier-in-Carrier
until an optimal combination is found.
For optimal Carrier-in-Carrier performance, it is recommended that the two carriers have similar
symbol rate and power. This can be achieved by selecting appropriate MODCODs as shown in
following sections.
159

15.4.5.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Symmetric Data Rate Link
Consider the following example:

Satellite & Transponder
Galaxy 18 @ 123 W, 13K/13K
Earth Station 1
Phoenix, AZ 4.6 m
Earth Station 2
Phoenix, AZ 2.4 m
Data Rate
512 kbps / 512 kbps
The traditional link was based on QPSK TPC 3/4 and required 0.96 MHz of leased BW. The
LST2 summary for the traditional link is as follows:
Carrier-in-Carrier link design involved trying different Modulation & FEC Code Rates to find the
optimal combination:
8-QAM, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier
QPSK, LDPC 3/4 with Carrier-in-Carrier
LST is Intelsats Lease Transmission Plan Program.

1510

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Link parameters and LST summary for QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier is as follows:
1511

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The link budget summary for the different MODCOD combinations is as follows:
Signal
No.
Modulation & FEC
Allocated
BW (MHz)
PEB (MHz)
Leased BW
(MHz)
Savings Compared
to Original
PSD
Ratio
(dB)
8-QAM, LDPC 2/3
0.3584
1.1468
1.1468
-20%
2.1
QPSK, LDPC 3/4
0.47785
0.6734
0.6734
30%
2.1
QPSK, LDPC 2/3
0.53735
0.5777
0.5777
40%
2.1
QPSK, LDPC 1/2
0.7168
0.5184
0.7168
25%
2.1
Based on this analysis, QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier provides the maximum savings
of 40%.
In addition to 40% reduction in Leased Bandwidth, using Carrier-in-Carrier also reduced the
required HPA Power by almost 40%:
15.4.5.2
HPA Power
Traditional Link
(QPSK, TPC 3/4)
CnC Link
(QPSK, LDPC 2/3)
HPA Power Reduction
HPA @ 4.6 m
0.7 W
0.5 W
40%
HPA @ 2.4 m
1.5 W
1.1 W
36%
Asymmetric Data Rate Link
As occupied (or allocated) bandwidth of a Carrier-in-Carrier circuit is dictated by the larger of the
two carriers, it is strongly recommended that the smaller carrier be spread as much as possible
using a lower order modulation and/or FEC, while meeting the PSD ratio spec. Spreading the
smaller carrier using a lower order modulation has multiple benefits:
Lower order modulation is always more robust
Lower order modulation uses less transponder power this reduces total transponder, and
increases available link margin
Lower order modulation uses less transmit power on the ground this can significantly
reduce the BUC/SSPA size by not only reducing the transmit EIRP, but also reducing the
BUC/SSPA backoff
Consider the following example:

IS-901 @ 342 W, 22/22 (EH/EH)
Earth Station 1
Africa 4.5 m
Earth Station 2
Africa 3.0 m
Data Rate
3000 Mbps / 1000 Mbps
While the traditional link was based on QPSK, TPC 3/4 and required 3.9 MHz of leased
bandwidth, the Carrier-in-Carrier link was based on QPSK, LDPC 3/4 and QPSK, LDPC 1/2 and
required 2.8 MHz of leased bandwidth.
1512

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The savings summary is as follows:

Item
Data Rate (kbps)
Modulation
FEC
Occupied BW
(MHZ)
Power Eq. BW
(MHz)
Leased BW (MHz)
Hub HPA (W)
Remote HPA (W)
Hub to
Remote
3000
QPSK
TPC 3/4
Original Link
Remote to
Hub
1000
QPSK
TPC 3/4
2.8
0.9
3.7
2.8
1.4
2.8
3.3
0.6
3.9
3.9
2.5
0.3
2.8
2.8
Total
With Carrier-in-Carrier and LDPC

Hub to
Remote to
Total
Remote
Hub
3000
1000
QPSK
QPSK
LDPC 3/4 LDPC 1/2
26.0
10.6
20.3
6.4
Savings
27.5%
22%
40%
If this link was designed using QPSK, LDPC 3/4 in both directions, it would have required:
Occupied BW
2.8 MHz
Power Eq. BW
3.0 MHz
7.2% increase in Power Eq. BW
Leased BW
3.0 MHz
7.2% increase in Leased BW
Hub HPA
20.3 W
Remote HPA
8.3 W
30% increase in Remote power
15.4.5.3 Power Limited Links

Carrier-in-Carrier can provide substantial savings even when the original link is power limited.
Spreading the carrier by using a lower modulation and/or FEC along with latest FEC such as
VersaFEC can substantially reduce the total power which can then be traded with bandwidth
using Carrier-in-Carrier. The concept is illustrated with the following examples:
The conventional link is using 8-PSK, TPC 3/4:
Switching to VersaFEC and using a lower order modulation e.g.,

QPSK, VersaFEC 0.803 increases the total occupied bandwidth, while
reducing the total power equivalent bandwidth:
Now using CnC, the second QPSK, VersaFEC 0.803 carrier can be
moved over the first carrier thereby significantly reducing the total
occupied bandwidth and total power equivalent bandwidth when
compared to the original side-by-side 8PSK, TPC 3/4 carriers:
1513

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
To continue, consider this example:

IS-901 @ 342 W, 22/22 (EH/EH)
Earth Station 1
Africa 9.2 m
Earth Station 2
Africa 4.5 m
Data Rate
2.048 Mbps / 2.048 Mbps
Whereas the original link used 8-PSK TPC 3/4, the Carrier-in-Carrier link used QPSK VersaFEC
0.803. The savings summary is as follows:
Item
Hub to
Remote
2048
8-PSK
TPC 3/4
Original Link
Remote to
Hub
2048
8-PSK
TPC 3/4
Total
With Carrier-in-Carrier and VersaFEC

Hub to
Remote to
Total
Remote
Hub
2048
2048
QPSK
QPSK
0.803
0.803
Data Rate (kbps)

Modulation
FEC
Occupied BW
(MHZ)
1.3
1.3
2.6
1.8
Power Eq. BW
(MHz)
2.2
1.0
3.2
1.1
Leased BW (MHz)
3.2
Hub HPA (W)
5.0
Remote HPA (W)
11.6
Note: 1 dB HPA BO for QPSK, 2 dB HPA BO for 8-PSK, 1 dB Feed Loss.
1.8
1.8
0.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
4.7
Savings
44%
60%
60%
Using Carrier-in-Carrier and VersaFEC reduced the leased bandwidth by almost 44% and HPA
power by 60%.
1514

15.4.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Carrier-in-Carrier Commissioning and Deployment
Prior to commissioning a Carrier-in-Carrier link, it is critical that the link is fully tested in non
Carrier-in-Carrier mode and all system issues including external interference, antenna pointing,
cabling, SSPA backoff are resolved. Only after the link is robust, should the user attempt turning
on Carrier-in-Carrier.
The following procedure is recommended for Carrier-in-Carrier commissioning and deployment:
Step
1
Task
Turn ON the carrier at Site A. Carrier from Site B is OFF. CnC function is OFF at
both sites.
Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at

Site A.

Site B.
Measure/record Eb/No at Site B. Make sure there is sufficient margin to

account for CnC.
Measure/record Receive Signal Level (RSL) at Site B.
Turn OFF the carrier at Site A. Turn ON the carrier at Site B. CnC function is OFF at
both sites.

Site A.

Site B.
Measure/record Eb/No at Site A. Make sure there is sufficient margin to

account for CnC.
Measure/record RSL at Site B.
Using Co+No/No readings calculate PSD ratio at Site A and Site B. If it is not within
specification, make necessary adjustments to bring it within specification and repeat
measurements in Steps 1 and 2.
Also verify that the RSL is within spec.
Now without changing the transmit power levels, turn ON both the carriers (on the
same frequency) and turn CnC ON.
Measure/record Eb/No at Site A and B.
Measure/record RSL at Site A and B.
Now compare Eb/No in presence of two over lapping carriers with CnC with
Eb/No when only one carrier was ON. Eb/No variation should be within spec
for that modulation, FEC and PSD ratio.
The test can be repeated for different PSD ratio and Eb/No.
1515

15.4.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Validating Carrier-in-Carrier Performance
Carrier-in-Carrier performance can be easily validated by verifying that Eb/No degradation due to
Carrier-in-Carrier is within published specification for the observed Power Spectral Density
Ratio.
The following procedure is recommended for validating Carrier-in-Carrier performance:
Step
1
Task
Setup a conventional side-by-side link of the desired Eb/No:
Carrier-in-Carrier should be OFF.
Record the Eb/No as displayed by the Modems.
Observe the 2 carriers on a spectrum analyzer and record the PSD ratio.
Example Link:
Full duplex 512 kbps, QPSK, LDPC 2/3 circuit between 4.6 m and 2.4 m
antennas
Recorded Eb/No = 2.6 dB (at both modems)
PSD Ratio = 1.2 dB (measured at larger Antenna)
Now relocate one of the carriers on top of the other carrier:

Enable Carrier-in-Carrier.
Record the Eb/No as displayed by the Modems.
Calculate change in Eb/No and verify against specification.

Example Link:
Recorded Eb/No = 2.4 dB
Change in Eb/No = 0.2 dB
Eb/No Degradation (Spec.) at 1.2 dB PSD = 0.3 dB
Modem performance is within spec
1516

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.5 Operational References

15.5.1
Carrier-in-Carrier Link Budget Calculation
The following procedure is required for calculating the link budget for a Carrier-in-Carrier Link:
Step
Task
Calculate the link budget for both carriers in the duplex link, with required CnC
margin:
Verify that the PDS ration is within spec for the SLM-5650A.
Calculate the Allocated Bandwidth (BW) and Power Equivalent Bandwidth (PEB) for
the duplex link:
BWDuplex Link = Greater of (BWCarrier 1, BWCarrier 2)
PEBDuplex Link = PEBCarrier 1 + PEBCarrier 2
Leased BWDuplex Link = Greater of (BWDuplex Link, PEBDuplex Link)
For an optimal link, the Leased Bandwidth and the Power Equivalent Bandwidth
should be equal / nearly equal.
Repeat the link budget process by selecting different Modulation and FEC, until the
BW and PEB is nearly balanced.
1517

15.5.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Estimating PSD Ratio
PSD can be estimated from a link budget using Downlink EIRP and Symbol Rate:
PSD = Downlink EIRP 10 * Log (Symbol Rate)

PSD Ratio Example:
Carrier
A to B
B to A
Downlink EIRP
27 dBW
24 dBW
Symbol Rate
500 ksps
375 ksps
PSD Ratio (@ A) = -29.99 (-31.74) = 1.75 dB

PSD Ratio (@ B) = -31.74 (-29.99) = -1.75 dB
15.5.2.1
Estimating PSD Ratio from LST
1518
Power Spectral Density

-29.99 dBW/Hz
-31.74 dBW/Hz

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.5.2.2
Estimating PSD Ratio from Satmaster
15.5.2.3
Estimating PSD Ratio Using Spectrum Analyzer
PSD Ratio or CnC Ratio can also be estimated using a Spectrum Analyzer capable of integrating
the signal power in a given bandwidth.
CnC Ratio (in dB) = PowerC1 (in dBm) PowerC2 (in dBm)
PSD Ratio (in dB) = (PowerC1 10 log BWC1 (in Hz)) (PowerC2 10 log BWC2 (in Hz))
= CnC Ratio 10 log (BWC1 / BWC2)
If the two carriers have same Symbol Rate / Bandwidth, then the CnC Ratio is same as the PSD
Ratio.
1519

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.6 DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications

Operating Mode
Requires the two links to share a common carrier frequency (Outbound and Inbound symbol
rates do not have to be equal)
Power Spectral Density Ratio BSPK/QPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM: 7 dB to +11 dB (ratio of power spectral density, outbound
interferer to desired inbound)
and CnC Ratio
16-QAM: 7 dB to +7 dB (ratio of power spectral density, outbound interferer to desired
inbound)
Note: With asymmetric carriers the absolute power ratio (or CnC ratio) would be different,
depending on the ratio of the symbol rates.
Example:
Outbound interferer = 1 Msymbols/sec
Desired Inbound = 500 ksymbols/sec
Ratio of power spectral density = +7 dB
Absolute power ratio (CnC Ratio) = +7dB + (10 log Outbound/desired symbol rate) = +10 dB
Maximum Symbol Rate Ratio 3:1 (TX:RX or RX:TX)
Inbound/Outbound
frequency uncertainty
Delay range
Eb/No Degradation
(equal Inbound/Outbound
power spectral density)
Monitor Functions
CnC Monitor Accuracy
Within the normal acquisition range of the demod, as follows:

Below 64 ksymbols/sec: 1 to (Rs/2) kHz, where Rs = symbol rate in ksymbols/sec
Between 64 and 389 ksymbols/sec: 1up to a maximum of 32kHz
Above 389 ksymbols/sec: 1 to (0.1Rs) kHz, up to a maximum of 200 kHz
0-330 ms
BPSK = 0.3dB QPSK = 0.3dB OQPSK = 0.3dB
8-PSK = 0.5dB 8-QAM = 0.4dB 16-QAM = 0.6dB
For +10 dB power spectral density ratio (outbound interferer 10 dB higher than desired
inbound) add an additional 0.3 dB
Delay, in milliseconds
Frequency offset (between outbound interferer and desired inbound). 100 Hz resolution
CnC ratio, in dB (ratio of absolute power, outbound interferer to desired inbound)
1.0 dB for symmetric symbol rate
15.7 Carrier-in-Carrier Summary

Comtech EF Datas DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier can provide significant savings in operational
expenses. The following should be considered when evaluating CnC:
CnC can only be used for full duplex links where the transmitting earth station is able to
receive itself.
CnC can be used in both bandwidth limited and power limited situations.
The maximum savings is generally achieved when the original link is symmetric in data
rate.
1520

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.8 Glossary
Bandwidth, Allocated or Occupied
Bandwidth or Allocated Bandwidth or Occupied Bandwidth is the frequency space required by a
carrier on a transponder.
For example: A Duplex 10 Mbps Circuit with 8PSK Modulation, FEC Rate 3/4 and 1.4 Spacing
requires:
Allocated BW = (DR / SE) * CSF [(Data Rate / Spectral Efficiency) * Carrier Spacing
Factor]
Allocated BW = 6.222 MHz = (10 / 2.25) * 1.4

For a 36 MHz transponder, 6.222 MHz corresponds to 17.3% Bandwidth Utilization.
Bandwidth, Leased (LBW)

Almost all satellite operators charge for the Leased Bandwidth (LBW). Leased Bandwidth or
Leased Resource is the greater of the Allocated Bandwidth and Power Equivalent Bandwidth.
For example: If a carrier requires 3 MHz of Allocated BW and 4.5 MHz of PEB, the Leased
Bandwidth is 4.5 MHz
Bandwidth, Power Equivalent (PEB)

Power Equivalent Bandwidth (PEB) is the transponder power used by a carrier, represented as
bandwidth equivalent.
PEB Calculation Example:
Transponder EIRP = 37 dBW
Output Backoff (OBO) = 4 dB
Available EIRP = 37 4 = 33 dBW = 103.3 = 1995.26 Watts
Transponder Bandwidth = 36 MHz
Power Available / MHz = 1995.26 / 36 = 55.424 W
If a carrier uses 24 dBW, its PEB = 102.4 / 55.424 = 4.532 MHz

This corresponds to 12.59% of available transponder power.
CnC Ratio
Ratio of Interfering Carrier Power to Desired Carrier Power (unit in dB).
The Interfering Carrier is the Tx Carrier from local modulator; the Desired Carrier is the carrier
from the distant end received by the local demodulator.
At the station transmitting C1: CnC Ratio (in dB) = PowerC1 (in dBm) PowerC2 (in dBm)
1521

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Eb/No
Ratio of Energy per bit (Eb) to Noise density (No) (unit in dB):
Eb/No = C/No 10log(DR) [where DR is the Data Rate]
Eb/No = Es/No 10log(SE) [where SE is Spectral Efficiency]
Es/No
Ratio of Energy per symbol (Es) to Noise density (No) (unit in dB):
Es/No = C/No 10log(SR) [where SR is the Symbol Rate]
Es/No = Eb/No + 10log(SE) [where SE is Spectral Efficiency]
C/N
Ratio of Carrier Power (C) to Noise (N) (unit in dB):
Equivalent to Es/No when calculated in the Symbol Rate
bandwidth.
C/No
Ratio of Carrier Power (C) to Noise Density (No) (unit in dBHz)
Co+No/No
Ratio of Carrier Density (Co) + Noise (No) to Noise Density (No) (unit in dB):
C/N = C/No 10log(B) [where B is bandwidth in Hz]
Eb/No = C/No 10log(DR) [where DR is data rate in bits/sec]
= C/N + 10log(B) 10log(DR)
= C/N 10log(SE) [where SE is Spectral Efficiency]
Eb/No = 10log (10 ((Co+No/No)/10) 1) 10log(SE) [where SE is Spectral Efficiency]
[Note: Spectral Efficiency is in bps / Hz]
Power Spectral Density (PSD)

Power Spectral Density (PSD) is the signal power per unit bandwidth: dBW / Hz or dBm /
Hz
For example: Signal power = 20 dBm
Signal bandwidth = 5 MHz
PSD = 20 10 *log (5,000,000) = -46.99 dBm / Hz
1522

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
PSD Ratio
Ratio of Power Spectral Density (PSD) of the interfering carrier to the desired carrier.
If looking at the two carriers side-by-side on a
spectrum analyzer:
Quasi Error Free (QEF)

Quasi Error Free (QEF) corresponds to PER ~10-7
[Note: PER (packet error rate) is based upon a 188-byte MPEG frame size]
Spectral Efficiency (SE)

Ratio of the Data Rate to the Symbol Rate.
Symbol Rate & Data Rate

Symbol Rate and Data Rate are related:
DR = SR * SE [Data Rate = Symbol Rate * Spectral Efficiency]
SR = DR / SE [Symbol Rate = Data Rate / Spectral Efficiency]
1523

Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
1524
Appendix A. TROUBLESHOOTING
A.1
Overview
This appendix provides information pertaining to the SLM-5650A Satellite Modems system
checkout and fault isolation and identification.
A.2
System Checkout
System checkout entails following the test instructions provided for the interface PCB, modem
PCB, TURBO PCB, and L-Band IF PCB. The instructions include tables and test points for
ensuring that the Eb/N0, typical output spectrums, typical eye patterns, and constellations are
correct. If a test failure occurs, refer to the fault isolation checkout procedures provided in this
appendix.
This section provides instructions for checking the modem setup within the earth
station. Due to the complexity of the modem circuitry, the checkout procedure
should be used only as a basic guideline. More complicated maintenance tests are
beyond the scope of this manual.
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
PCBs.
A1

Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.2.1 Interface Checkout

Use the test setup in Figure A-1 and the procedure that follows to verify the data interface.
NOISE
GENERATOR
TX IF
MODEM UNDER TEST

VAR ATTEN
RX IF
BERT
DATA
CONNECTORS
VAR ATTEN
BER
TEST SET
Figure A-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup

1. Ensure the correct data and IF interface is selected and configured for the proper mode of
operation.
2. Connect a BER test set to the appropriate modem data connector as shown in Figure A-1.
3. Set up the modem for baseband loopback operation by selecting I/O1 (TEST: Loopback I/O1)
from the front panel menu. The modem will run error-free.
A2

Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.2.2 Modulator Checkout

Use the following procedure for modulator checkout:
Step
Task
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using 70/140 MHz IF interface. Refer to Chapter 1.
INTRODUCTION for the modulator specifications.
Set up the modem for IF loopback operation by using TEST: Loopback IF from the front panel
menu, or use an external IF loop.
Clear all TX faults, Stored Faults, and Alarms using MONITOR: Event-Log Clear-All from the
front panel menu.
Measure the Eb/N0 with a receiver that is known to be properly operating:

a.
Refer to Table A-1 and Figure A-2 to check for proper Eb/N0 level. The (S+N)/N is measured
by taking the average level of the noise and the average level of the modem spectrum top.
b.
Use this measurement for the first column on Table A-1.
c.
Read across the page to find the S/N and Eb/N0 for the specific code rate.
Once the demodulator has locked to the incoming signal, using MONITOR: Rx-Params
from the front panel menu displays frequency offset, signal level, BERT data (if enabled),
buffer status, Eb/N0, and corrected BER.
Connect a spectrum analyzer to the modem as shown in Figure A-1. Ensure the IF output meets
the appropriate mask and spurious specifications. Measure the power output at different levels and
frequencies.
A typical output spectrum is shown in Figure A-3.
Check the frequency and phase modulation accuracy as follows:

a.
Set the modem to the continuous wave mode by using TEST: Carrier Tx-CW from the front
panel menu. This sets the Carrier modulation in the OFF condition. A pure carrier should now be
present at the IF output. This should only be used for frequency measurements. Spurious and
power measurements should be taken with the modulation on.
b.
Set the modem to the continuous wave Offset mode by using TEST: Carrier Tx-1,0 from
the front panel menu. This generates a single upper side band and suppressed carrier signal.
Ensure the carrier and side-band suppression are < -30 dBc.
Repeat steps 2-6 using the L-Band IF interface.
A3

Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Table A-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0 Chart

(dB)
(S+N)/N
Code
S/N
Rate 1/2
Eb/N0
Code
S/N
Rate 3/4
Eb/N0
Code
S/N
Rate 7/8
Eb/N0
4.0
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.0
1.8
-0.6
4.5
2.6
2.6
2.6
0.8
2.6
0.2
5.0
3.3
3.3
3.3
1.6
3.3
0.9
5.5
4.1
4.1
4.1
2.3
4.1
1.6
6.0
4.7
4.7
4.7
3.0
4.7
2.3
6.5
5.4
5.4
5.4
3.6
5.4
3.0
7.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
4.3
6.0
3.6
7.5
6.6
6.6
6.6
4.9
6.6
4.2
8.0
7.3
7.3
7.3
5.5
7.3
4.8
8.5
7.8
7.8
7.8
6.1
7.8
5.4
9.0
8.4
8.4
8.4
6.7
8.4
6.0
9.5
9.0
9.0
9.0
7.2
9.0
6.6
10.0
9.5
9.5
9.5
7.8
9.5
7.1
10.5
10.1
10.1
10.1
8.3
10.1
7.7
11.0
10.6
10.6
10.6
8.9
10.6
8.2
11.5
11.2
11.2
11.2
9.4
11.2
8.8
12.0
11.7
11.7
11.7
10.0
11.7
9.3
12.5
12.2
12.2
12.2
10.5
12.2
9.8
13.0
12.8
12.8
12.8
11.0
12.8
10.3
13.5
13.3
13.3
13.3
11.5
13.3
10.9
14.0
13.8
13.8
13.8
12.1
13.8
11.4
14.5
14.3
14.3
14.3
12.6
14.3
11.9
15.0
14.9
14.9
14.9
13.1
14.9
12.4
15.5
15.4
15.4
15.4
13.6
15.4
12.9
16.0
15.9
15.9
15.9
14.1
15.9
13.5
16.5
16.4
16.4
16.4
14.6
16.4
14.0
17.0
16.9
16.9
16.9
15.2
16.9
14.5
17.5
17.4
17.4
17.4
15.7
17.4
15.0
18.0
17.9
17.9
17.9
16.2
17.9
15.5
18.5
18.4
18.4
18.4
16.7
18.4
16.0
19.0
18.9
18.9
18.9
17.2
18.9
16.5
19.5
19.5
19.5
19.5
17.7
19.5
17.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
18.2
20.0
17.5
A4

Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
RL -49.00 dBm
ATTEN 10 dB
2.00 dB/DIV
RES BANDWIDTH
10.0 kHz
Modem Rate = 2144 kbit/s, 3/4 Rate Coding

with 7.7 dB Eb/No (S + N)/N = 10 dB
CENTER 70.000 MHz

*RB 10.0 kHz
*VB 10.0 Hz
SPAN 1.000 MHz

ST 30.00 sec
Figure A-2. Typical Output Spectrum With Noise
RL -20.29 dBm
ATTEN 10 dB
5.00 dB/DIV
CENTER FREQUENCY
140.000 MHz
CENTER 140.000 MHz

*RB 30.0 kHz
PASS
*VB 3.00 Hz
SPAN 5.000 MHz

ST 166.7 sec
Figure A-3. Typical Output Spectrum Without Noise
A5

Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.2.3 Demodulator Checkout

Use the following procedure for demodulator checkout:
Step
Task
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using the 70/140 MHz IF interface.
Set up the modem with an external IF loop and level. Use a properly operating modulator, and ensure
that power levels, data rates, code rates, etc. are compatible.
Allow the modem to lock up.
a.
Depending on the data rate and overhead type, lock-up may take several seconds.
b.
When the GREEN IF and Data Lock LED are ON and any fault has been cleared (where
applicable), the modem will run at the specified error rate.
c.
Run the Rx power level (input amplitude) over the full range and offset the Tx frequency from
the nominal Rx frequency by up to 30 kHz.
d.
Ensure the modem still runs within the specified error rate.
Set up the modem to check the constellation by hooking an oscilloscope that is set in the X-Y mode to
J9 pins 3 and 8. An alternative method is to use a computer and the IQ Mon program with an Ethernet
connection to the modem. Typical constellation patterns are shown with noise (Figure A-4) and without
noise (Figure A-5).
A6

Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
PC version IQ monitor with noise
Oscilloscope WITH NOISE
Figure A-4. Typical Constellation Patterns With Noise
A7

Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
PC version IQ monitor WITHOUT NOISE
Oscilloscope WITHOUT NOISE
Figure A-5. Typical Constellation Patterns Without Noise
A8

Appendix A
A.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Fault Isolation
The design of the modem allows for removal and replacement of some faulty components in the
field. The optional interface PCBs can be removed from the modem through the rear panel,
without requiring special tools. The TURBO PCB and power supply can be replaced if the top
cover is removed.
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
PCBs.
The fault monitoring capability of the modem assists the operator in determining which PCB has
failed. If possible, replace the faulty PCB and return the damaged board to the Comtech EF Data
Customer Support Department for repair. If not, return the complete modem.
The fault isolation procedure lists the following categories of faults or alarms:
Modulator
Demodulator
Transmit Interface
Receive Interface
Unit (Common Equipment)
1. Each fault or alarm category includes possible problems and the appropriate action required to
repair the modem.
2. If any of the troubleshooting procedures mentioned earlier in this appendix do not isolate the
problem and Comtech EF Data Customer Support assistance is necessary, have the following
information available for the representative:
Modem configuration. Modem configuration includes the modulator, demodulator, interface, or

local AUPC sections.
Faults (active or stored).
A9

Appendix A
A.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
System Faults/Alarms
System faults are reported in MONITOR: Alarms from the front panel menu, and stored faults
are reported in the MONITOR: Event-Log menu. To determine the appropriate action for
repairing the modem, refer to Table A-2 and the list of possible problems.
Table A-2. SLM-5650A Fault Tree
FAULT TYPE
MODULATOR
FAULTS
TX IF
OUTPUT
OFF
NONE
TX
STATUS
LED
TX FAULT
RELAY (1)
RX
STATUS
LED
RX FAULT
RELAY (2)
UNIT
STATUS
LED
UNIT FAULT
RELAY (3)
AUDIBLE
ALARM
TX
AIS
GREEN
MOD SYMBOL
CLOCK PLL
RED
MOD
SYNTHESIZER
PLL
RED
MOD I/Q
ACTIVITY
RED
MOD FILTER
CLIPPING
RED
TX INTERFACE
CLOCK PLL
RED
TX INTF CLOCK
ACTIVITY
ORANGE
TX INTERFACE
SCT PLL
RED
TX INTERFACE
DATA AIS
ORANGE
DEMODULATOR NONE
FAULTS
DEMOD CARRIER
LOCK
RX
AIS
X
X
GREEN
RED
DEMOD
DECODER LOCK
RED
DEMOD
SYNTHESIZER
PLL
RED
DEMOD I/Q
ACTIVITY
RED
DEMUX LOCK
RED
BUFFER
RED
BUFFER FILL
ORANGE
BUFFER
OVERFLOW
ORANGE
BUFFER
UNDERFLOW
ORANGE
BUFFER PLL
RED
BUFFER CLK REF

ACTIVITY
ORANGE
RX INTERFACE
DATA AIS
ORANGE
Eb/No
THRESHOLD
ORANGE
BERT SYNC
LOSS
ORANGE
A10

Appendix A
TX IF
OUTPUT
OFF
FAULT TYPE
UNIT FAULTS
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
TX
STATUS
LED
TX FAULT
RELAY (1)
RX
STATUS
LED
RX FAULT
RELAY (2)
UNIT
STATUS
LED
NONE
GREEN
+5.0V POWER
UNIT FAULT
RELAY (3)
AUDIBLE
ALARM
RED
+3.3V POWER
RED
+2.5V POWER
RED
+1.5V POWER
RED
+12V POWER
RED
-12V POWER
RED
+18V POWER
RED
COOLING FAN
RED
EXTERNAL REF
ACTIVITY
ORANGE
192 MHZ CLOCK

PLL
RED
10 MHZ REF PLL
RED
M&C FPGA
CONFIG
RED
MOD FPGA
CONFIG
RED
DEMOD FPGA
CONFIG
RED
DECODER FPGA
CONFIG
RED
RED
RED
TX INTF FPGA
CONFIG
RX INTF FPGA
CONFIG
FEC #1 FPGA
CONFIG
X**
RED
FEC #2 FPGA
CONFIG
X**
RED
OPTION CARD
FPGA CONFIG
RED
FPGA DCM phase

Lock Loop Fault
RED
NP MAILBOX
COMM ERROR
RED
TRANSEC
MAILBOX COMM
ERROR
RED
Legend
Test Note
Fault/Alarm Relay
Test Points Connector/Pins
TX FAULT
J8/Pin 2 (NO), 1 (COM), 6 (NC) ****
RX FAULT
J8/Pin 5 (NO), 4 (COM), 9 (NC) ****
UNIT FAULT
J8/Pin 8 (NO), 7 (COM), 3 (NC) ****
**
The IF output is only affected if that particular FEC card is currently passing traffic.
****
A connection between the common and N.O. contacts indicate no fault/alarm.
A11
TX
AIS
RX
AIS

Appendix A
A.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
LED Display and Description
The ten LEDs located on the modems front panel indicate status,
fault, and alarm information.
COLOR
LED STATUS
GREEN
GREEN indicates no faults or alarms currently exist.
ORANGE
ORANGE indicates an alarm currently exists. It is stored in the Event Log memory.
RED
RED indicates a fault currently exists. It is stored in the Event Log memory.
A total of 255 occurrences of any fault can be stored. Each fault or stored fault indicated by a
front panel LED could be one of many faults. Use the Fault or Stored Fault front panel menu to
determine which fault has occurred.
Alarms are considered minor faults. Alarms are shown in the Fault or Stored Fault front panel
menu by a reversed-contrast + that appears at the display panel (white on black).
LED
Description
Tx On
Modulator output status. If illuminated, output is turned on.
IF LOCK
Demodulator Carrier Detect. If illuminated, the carrier is locked
DATA LOCK
Decoder Data lock. If illuminated, the decoder is locked.
REMOTE
Modem remote control status. If the LED is green, the modem is in remote control; if off, the
modem is in local control.
TEST MODE
Modem test mode indicator. If illuminated, a test mode is enabled.
A12
Appendix B. OPERATIONS
REFERENCE
B.1
Overview
This appendix provides the end user with reference guides for the following operational
parameters:
B.2
Section B.2 Modes provides tables showing the various operating modes available data
rates and ranges.
Section B.3 Clocking Options provides information about common clocking options and
recommended configurations.
Section B.4 Buffering.
Modes
The Data Rates and Symbol Rates shown in the following tables all assume that Transmission
Security (TRANSEC) is turned off. In order to calculate the max data rate with TRANSEC on,
the max data rate shown in the table becomes a max aggregate data rate. The real data rate can be
calculated by dividing the TRANSEC overhead rate from the aggregate data rate. The TRANSEC
overhead rate can be calculated for any TRANSEC Frame Length (N) as follows:
TRANSEC Overhead Rate = (3 + 16 * N) / (16 * N)
B.2.1
OM-73 Mode
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/1
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/1
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/1
OQPSK 1/2
Data Rate (kbps)

Min
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Symbol Rate (ksps)

Max
8472
15000
22500
26250
20000
30000
45000
51840
20000
30000
B1
Min
64
128
85.333
73.142
32
64
42.666
36.571
32
64
Max
10000
30000
29999.999
30000
10000
30000
30000
29622.857
10000
30000

Appendix B
Revision 8
Data Rate (kbps)
Modulation Type
Min
64
64
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
B.2.2
Symbol Rate (ksps)

Max
45000
51840
Min
42.666
36.571
Max
30000
29622.857
MIL-STD-188-165A Mode
Modulation Type
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
BPSK 1/1
Off
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
Data Rate (kbps)
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
Min
Max
N/A
64
8472
64
10000
Off
N/A
64
15000
128
30000
Off
N/A
64
22500
85.333
29999.999
BPSK 7/8
Off
N/A
64
26250
73.142
30000
QPSK 1/1
Off
N/A
64
20000
32
10000
QPSK 1/2
Off
N/A
64
30000
64
30000
QPSK 3/4
Off
N/A
64
45000
42.666
30000
QPSK 7/8
Off
N/A
64
51840
36.571
29622.857
OQPSK 1/1
Off
N/A
64
20000
32
10000
OQPSK 1/2
Off
N/A
64
30000
64
30000
OQPSK 3/4
Off
N/A
64
45000
42.666
30000
OQPSK 7/8
Off
N/A
64
51840
36.571
29622.857
8-PSK 2/3
Off
N/A
256
51840
128
25920
8-PSK 5/6
Off
N/A
256
51840
102.4
20736
13333.333
144
13767.123
139.462
126,112
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
219,201
225,205
4, 8
64
29999.999
13666.666
140.487
29999.998
220,200
13636.363
140.8
29999.999
126,112
20000
96
30000
20650.684
92.975
29999.998
219,201
225,205
4, 8
64
20500
93.658
220,200
20454.545
93.867
126,112
23333.333
82.826
30000
219,201
24092.465
79.692
29999.999
225,205
4, 8
64
29999.999
23916.666
80.278
29999.999
220,200
23863.636
80.457
30000
126,112
26666.666
72
27534.246
69.371
219,201
225,205
4, 8
64
29999.999
27333.333
70.243
220,200
27272.727
70.4
126,112
40000
48
30000
219,201
41301.369
46.487
29999.999
225,205
4, 8
64
30000
41000
46.829
220,200
40909.090
46.933
126,112
46666.666
41.143
219,201
48184.931
39.846
47833.333
40.139
220,200
47727.272
40.229
126,112
26666.666
72
27534.246
69.371
27333.333
70.243
220,200
27272.727
70.4
126,112
40000
48
30000
41301.369
46.487
29999.999
41000
46.829
30000
225,205
219,201
225,205
219,201
4, 8
64
4, 8
64
4, 8
64
225,205
B2
30000
30000
29999.999
30000
29999.999
30000

Appendix B
Modulation Type
OQPSK 7/8
Revision 8
R-S Code Word
Data Rate (kbps)
R-S Depth
Min
220,200
40909.090
46.933
126,112
46666.666
41.143
219,201
48184.931
39.846
47833.333
40.139
47727.272
40.229
4, 8
64
220,200
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 5/6
Max
30000
29999.999
30000
126,112
144
29160
219,201
139.462
28241.194
225,205
4, 8
256
51840
140.487
28448.78
220,200
140.8
28512
126,112
115.2
23328
219,201
111.57
22592.955
112.39
22759.024
112.64
22809.6
225,205
4, 8
256
51840
220,200
B.2.3
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Max
225,205
Min
MIL-STD-188-165A Mode Sequential
Modulation Type
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
OFF
N/A
Data Rate (kbps)

Min
126/112
BPSK 1/2
219,201
225,205
64
4/8
220,200
OFF
N/A
126/112
QPSK 1/2
219,201
225,205
64
4/8
220,200
OFF
N/A
126/112
QPSK 3/4
219,201
225,205
64
4/8
220,200
OFF
N/A
126/112
QPSK 7/8
219,201
225,205
64
4/8
220,200
OFF
N/A
126/112
OQPSK 1/2
219,201
225,205
64
4/8
220,200
OFF
N/A
126/112
OQPSK 3/4
219,201
225,205
64
4/8
220,200
OFF
OQPSK 7/8
126/112
219,201
N/A
64
4/8
B3
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Max
Min
Max
1067
128
2134
1171
144
2634.750
1171
139.463
2551.731
1171
140.488
2570.488
1171
140.800
2576.200
2500
64
2222.222
72
2294.520
69.731
2277.777
70.243
2272.727
70.400
3750
42.667
3333.333
48
3441.780
46.487
3416.666
46.829
3409.090
46.933
4375
36.571
3888.888
41.142
4015.410
39.846
3986.111
40.139
3977.272
40.228
2500
64
2222.222
72
2294.520
69.731
2277.777
70.243
2272.727
70.400
3750
42.667
3333.333
48
3441.780
46.487
3416.666
46.829
3409.090
46.933
4375
36.571
3888.888
41.142
4015.410
39.846
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500

Appendix B
Modulation Type
B.2.4
R-S Code Word
Revision 8
Data Rate (kbps)
R-S Depth
Min
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Max
Min
225,205
3986.111
40.139
220,200
3977.272
40.228
Max
IESS-308 Mode Standard Higher Rates
Modulation Type
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4 (CONT)
QPSK 3/4 (CONT)
Overhead
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
Off
N/A
194,178
4, 8, 16
219,201
4, 8, 16
225,205
4, 8, 16
126,112
4, 8, 16
208,192
4, 8, 16
IESS-308
IESS-308
Off
N/A
194,178
4, 8, 16
219,201
4, 8, 16
225,205
4, 8, 16
126,112
4, 8, 1
IESS-308
B4
Data Rate (kbps)
Symbol Rate (ksps)
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
1640
2144
6408
8544
1778.787
2328.09
6975.371
9303.371
1778.269
2327.403
6973.254
9300.537
1790.634
2343.805
7023.805
9368.195
1833
2400
7197
9600
1776.708
2325.333
6966.875
8448
9292
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
1029.333
1365.333
4208
5632
21376
22912
29824
1217.858
1584.06
4682.247
6324.247
23393.438
25067.506
1217.512
1583.602
4680.836
6232.358
23386.269
25059.821
1225.756
1594.537
4714.537
6277.463
23557.463
25243.317
1254
1632
4830

Appendix B
Modulation Type
QPSK 7/8
Overhead
Revision 8
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
208,192
4, 8, 16
Off
N/A
194,178
4, 8, 16
219,201
4, 8, 16
225,205
4, 8, 16
126,112
4, 8, 16
208,192
4, 8, 16
IESS-308
B5
Data Rate (kbps)
Symbol Rate (ksps)
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
6432
24144
25872
1216.472
1582.222
4676.583
626.667
23364.667
25036.667
882.286
1170.286
3606.857
4827.428
20040.571
21473.714
27922.857
1057.592
1371.48
4027.069
5357.355
20065.233
21500.148
27957.265
1057.296
1371.087
4025.859
5355.736
20059.087
21493.561
27948.691
1064.362
1380.46
4054.743
5394.397
20205.826
26150.843
28153.422
1088.571
1412.571
4153.714
5526.857
20708.571
22189.714
28854.857
1056.405
1369.905
4022.214
5350.857
20040.571
21473.714
27922.857

Appendix B
B.2.5
Revision 8
IESS-308 Mode Extended
Modulation Type
Overhead
None
QPSK 1/2
IESS-309
None
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309
None
QPSK 7/8
IESS-309
None
OQPSK 1/2
IESS-309
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
N/A
Data Rate (kbps)

Min
4, 8, 16
N/A
64
8448
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
64
N/A
4, 8, 16
64
51840
46666.666
48184.931
48170.103
47833.333
48229.665
8448
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
45000
40000
41301.369
41288.65
41000
41339.713
8448
4, 8, 16
N/A
Max
30000
26666.666
27534.246
27525.773
27333.333
27559.809
64
30000
26666.666
27534.246
27525.773
27333.333
27559.809
8448
4, 8, 16
208,192
None
OQPSK 3/4
IESS-309
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
64
4, 8, 16
208,192
OQPSK 7/8
None
Off
126,112
N/A
4, 8, 16
B6
64
Symbol Rate (ksps)

Min
64
72
69.371
69.573
70.243
69.667
68.267
76.8
74.403
74.927
74.311
42.666
48
46.487
46.502
46.829
46.444
45.511
51.2
49.587
49.602
49.951
49.541
36.571
41.143
39.846
38.859
40.139
39.81
39.01
43.886
42.503
42.516
42.818
42.463
64
72
69.371
69.573
70.243
69.667
68.267
76.8
74.38
74.403
74.927
Max
30000
29999.999
29999.999
30000
29999.999
30000
9011.2
10137.6
9821.196
9890.341
9809.067
30000
30000
29999.999
30000
30000
30000
6007.467
6758.4
6545.449
6547.464
6593.561
6539.378
29622.857
30000
29999.999
30000
29999.999
29999.999
4827.428
5792.914
5610.385
5612.112
5561.624
5604.181
30000
29999.999
29999.999
30000
29999.999
30000
901.2
10137.6
9818.173
9821.196
9890.341
74.311
9809.067
20000
40000
41301.369
41288.65
41000
41339.713
8448
8448
8448
8448
8448
42.666
48
46.487
46.502
46.829
46.444
45.511
51.2
49.587
49.602
49.951
30000
30000
29999.999
30000
30000
30000
6007.467
6758.4
6545.449
6547.464
6593.561
8448
49.541
6539.378
20000
46666.666
36.571
41.143
29622.857
30000

Appendix B
Modulation Type
Overhead
IESS-309
B.2.6
R-S Code Word

219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
R-S Depth
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
Max
48184.931
48170.103
47833.333
48229.665
N/A
8448
4, 8, 16
Symbol Rate (ksps)

Min
39.846
38.859
40.139
39.81
39.01
43.886
42.503
42.516
42.818
42.463
Max
29999.999
30000
29999.999
29999.999
4827.428
5792.914
5610.385
5612.112
5561.624
5604.181
Overhead
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4,8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
Data Rate (kbps)

Min
64
64
64
64
64
64
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Max
Min
Max
15000
13767.123
8448
8448
22500
20650.684
8448
8448
30000
27534.246
8448
8448
20000
41301.369
8448
8448
30000
27534.246
8448
8448
20000
41301.369
8448
8448
128
139.462
136.533
148.76
85.333
92.975
91.022
99.173
64
69.371
68.267
74.38
42.666
46.487
45.511
49.587
64
69.371
68.267
74.38
42.666
46.487
45.511
49.587
30000
29999.999
18022.4
19636.346
29999.999
29999.999
12014.933
13090.898
30000
29999.999
9011.2
9818.173
30000
29999.999
6007.467
6545.449
30000
29999.999
9011.2
9818.173
30000
29999.999
6007.467
6545.449
IESS-310 Mode Extended Rates
Modulation Type
Overhead
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
IESS-309
219,201
4, 8, 16
8-PSK 2/3
B.2.8
Data Rate (kbps)

Min
IESS-309 Mode Extended (Closed Network)
Modulation Type
B.2.7
Revision 8
Turbo Code Mode
B7
Data Rate (kbps)

256
51840
256
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
Symbol Rate (ksps)

139.463
28241.194
148.76
4909.087
937.134
1211.701
3534.627
4698.269
17563.701
18818.866
24467.104

Appendix B
Data Rate (kbps)
Modulation Type
B.2.9
Revision 8
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
Min
Max
BPSK 21/44
64
30545.454
134.095
63999.999
BPSK 5/16
64
20000
204.8
64000
QPSK 17/18
64
120888.888
33.882
63999.999
QPSK 21/44
64
61090.909
67.047
63999.999
QPSK 3/4
64
96000
42.666
64000
QPSK 7/8
64
112000
36.571
64000
OQPSK 17/18
64
120888.888
33.882
63999.999
OQPSK 21/44
64
61090.909
67.047
63999.999
OQPSK 3/4
64
96000
42.666
64000
OQPSK 7/8
64
112000
36.571
64000
8-PSK 17/18
256
155520
90.352
54889.411
8-PSK 3/4
256
144000
113.777
64000
8-PSK 7/8
256
155520
97.523
59245.714
16-QAM 3/4
256
155520
85.333
51840
16-QAM 7/8
256
155520
73.143
44434.285
16-QAM Mode
Modulation Type
16-QAM 3/4
16-QAM 7/8
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
None
219,201
208,192
None
219,201
208,192
None
Data Rate ( kbps)

Min
Max
4, 8, 16
256
51840
256
51840
None
4, 8, 16
Symbol Rate ( ksps)

Min
Max
85.333
17280
92.975
18827.462
92.889
18810
73.143
14811.428
79.692
16137.825
79.619
16122.857
16-QAM 3/4 requires Reed-Solomon to be ON in order to automatically resolve data ambiguities.
B8

Appendix B
B.2.10
Revision 8
AUPC Mode
Modulation Type
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
BPSK 1/1
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/1
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/1
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
B.2.11
Data Rate ( kbps)

Min
Max
64
7942.500
64
14062.500
64
21093.750
64
24609.375
64
18750
64
28125
64
42187.500
64
49218.750
64
18750
64
28125
64
42187.500
64
49218.750
64
51840
64
51840
64
51840
64
51840
256
12812.500
256
19218.750
256
22421.875
256
25625
256
38437.500
256
44843.750
256
25625
256
38437.500
256
44843.750
256
51250
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
Symbol Rate ( ksps)

Min
Max
68.266
8472
136.533
30000
91.022
30000
78.019
30000
34.133
10000
68.266
30000
45.511
30000
39.009
30000
34.133
10000
68.266
30000
45.511
30000
39.009
30000
136.533
27648
109.226
22118.400
91.022
18432
78.019
15798.857
149.853
30000
99.902
30000
85.630
30000
74.926
30000
49.951
30000
42.815
30000
74.926
30000
49.951
30000
42.815
30000
149.853
30000
119.882
24276.292
99.902
20230.243
85.630
17340.209
Data Rate ( kbps)

Min
Max
64
1171
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
1067
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
Symbol Rate ( ksps)

Min
Max
136.533
2498.133
68.266
2184.533
45.511
1456.355
39.009
1248.304
68.266
2184.533
45.511
1456.355
39.009
1248.304
149.853
2498.341
74.926
2397.658
49.951
1598.439
42.815
1370.09
74.926
2397.658
49.951
1598.439
42.815
1370.09
AUPC Mode Sequential
Modulation Type
R-S Code Word
R-S Depth
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
B9

Appendix B
B.2.12
AUPC Mode Turbo
Modulation Type
BPSK 21/44
BPSK 5/16
QPSK 17/18
QPSK 21/44
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 17/18
OQPSK 21/44
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 17/18
8PSK 3/4
8PSK 7/8
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
B.2.13
Revision 8
Data Rate (kbps)

Min
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
256
256
256
256
256
Symbol Rate (ksps)

Max
13423.295
8789.062
51840
26846.590
42187.500
49218.750
51840
26846.590
42187.500
49218.750
51840
51840
51840
51840
51840
Min
143.034
218.453
36.141
71.517
45.511
39.009
36.141
71.517
45.511
39.009
96.376
121.362
104.025
91.022
78.019
Max
29999.998
29999.998
29274.352
29999.998
30000
30000
29274.352
29999.998
30000
30000
19516.235
24576
21065.142
18432
15798.857
LDPC Mode Ultra Low Latency (ULL)
Modulation Type
Data Rate (kbps)
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
Min
Max
DR to SR Multiplier
BPSK 1/2
32*
2000
64.868
4054.263
QPSK 1/2
32
2000
32.434
2027.131
2092/1032
2092/2064
QPSK 2/3
41.851
2000
32
1529.239
2092/5448
QPSK 3/4
46.991
2000
32
1361.979
2092/3072
*Minimum Data Rate is 8 kbps with Spreading Enabled
B.2.14
LDPC Mode Low Latency (LL)
Modulation Type
BPSK .382
BPSK .456
BPSK .547
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
8QAM 2/3
8QAM 3/4
8QAM 7/8
16QAM 2/3
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
Data Rate (kbps)
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
Min
Max
32*
32*
32*
32
42.480
47.720
55.767
256
256
256
256
256
256
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
84.676
71.019
59.182
32.188
32
32
32
128.313
114.223
97.741
96.140
85.584
73.234
13230.769
11096.774
9247.311
5029.411
3766.519
3352.941
2869.127
2506.118
2230.936
1909.023
1877.753
1671.568
1430.369
B10
DR to SR Multiplier
4128/1560
4128/1860
4128/2232
4104/4080
4104/5448
4104/6120
4104/7152
4096/8172
4096/9180
4096/10728
4092/10944
4092/12240
4092/14304

Appendix B
B.2.15
Revision 8
LDPC Mode High Performance (HP)

Data Rate (kbps)
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 2/3
OQPSK 3/4
8QAM 2/3
8QAM 3/4
16QAM 3/4
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
Min
Max
32*
32
42.667
48
32
42.667
48
256
256
256
15000
30000
40000
45000
30000
40000
45000
41000
46000
46000
64
32
32
32
32
32
32
128
113.777
85.333
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
20500
20444.444
15333.333
DR to SR Multiplier
16416/8208
8208/8208
8208/10944
8208/12384
8208/8208
8208/10944
8208/12384
5472/10944
5504/12384
4128/12384
B.3
Clocking Options
Clocking of the data from the terrestrial equipment to the satellite (and vice versa) will depend on
the application. This section describes the most common options and recommended configurations.
SCT (INTERNAL) clock no longer applies when the modem has loop timing on. The TX clock
source is now recovered from the RX satellite data. This recovered clock is put out on the ST line
and is used to clock the terrestrial equipment. The TX terrestrial clock is now essentially the same
as the RX satellite clock, except that it has been buffered by the terrestrial equipment.
Select TX TERRESTRIAL for the TX clock source when in loop timing, if the user equipment
is being slaved off the modem.
B.3.1
IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master

Use this application when both earth stations have high stability clocks and the received data is to
be clocked to the local network. Refer to Figure B-1 for:
Clocking block diagram
TX clock options
Buffer clock options
The disadvantage of the master/master application is that the RX data will slip, as the clocks will
not be synchronized. If the buffer is properly set up, the slips will be an exact frame length,
causing minimum loss of data. By using very high stability clocks, the expected time between
slips can be several days.
Loss of the buffer clock will mean the buffer will not be emptied and data will not be available.
The buffer clock will normally revert to the low stability internal reference automatically.
B11

Appendix B
Revision 8
Figure B-1. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram
B12

Appendix B
B.3.2
Revision 8
IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave

Use this application when the far end earth station does not have local access to a high stability
reference clock, or when it is not required to synchronize with a local clock. Refer to Figure B-2 for:
Clocking block diagram
TX clock options
Buffer clock options for using external loop timing
Modem loop timing does not apply for G.703 operation. The terrestrial equipment must select loop
timing to recover the clock off the RX data and use that recovered clock for the TX data.
B13

Appendix B
Revision 8
Figure B-2. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram

The disadvantage of the master/slave application is that the signal received at the slave station is
subject to Doppler shift. The length of the buffer at the master end will need to be twice the
length that is normally required, compensating for the Doppler shift on the outward and return
paths
B14

Appendix B
B.4
Revision 8
Buffering
There are two reasons for a receive buffer:
1. Plesiochronous buffering of two dissimilar clock frequencies (normally the far end TX
clock verses the local network clock). The clocks may be very close in frequency to each
other and will normally slip at a constant rate. Figure B-3 shows plesiochronous operation
for dissimilar clocks. If incoming traffic is too fast, an occasional bit will be lost. If
incoming traffic is too slow, an occasional bit will be repeated.
Figure B-3. Clock Slip

2. Doppler buffer of the signal of the satellite. The Doppler shift results from the Figure 8
station-keeping movement performed by the satellite in space over a period of one day
(Figure B-4). Doppler shift should not result in a clock slip, as the buffer will constantly
fill and empty.
B15

Appendix B
Revision 8
Figure B-4. Doppler Shift

If the two earth stations are configured as master/slave, then the buffer need only be configured
for Doppler operation. The buffer will then have sufficient capacity for the Doppler shift on the
outward and return paths.
A buffer set up for Doppler operation only will typically require less depth than one intended for
both Doppler and plesiochronous operation.
B.4.1
Buffer Size
The depth of the receive buffer will depend on four parameters:
1.
Doppler shift caused by satellite.
2.
Stability of each clock (plesiochronous/Doppler operation).
3.
Frame/Multiframe length of multiplexed data format.
4.
Allowable time between clock slips.
B.4.1.1 Doppler
A geostationary satellite should be positioned directly over the equator and orbit with duration of
24 hours. In practice, the exact inclination of the satellite (relative to the equator) is influenced by
the earth, moon, and suns gravity, as well as solar wind. Station-keeping motors are required to
maintain the orbital position.
B16

Appendix B
Revision 8
When viewed from the earth, the satellite appears to prescribe an ellipse in space, degrading to a
Figure 8 as the angle of inclination increases. The orbit of the satellite can result in a peak-topeak altitude variation of 2% (85 km), while the station keeping of a newly launched satellite
will typically be 0.1 (150 km). The total effect will be 172 km relative to the nominal
42,164 km radius.
Depending upon the location of the earth station relative to the satellite, the variation in
propagation delay will typically be 1.15 ms (up to satellite and back down); therefore a buffer
depth of 2 ms is sufficient to cope with most commercial satellites.
Since station-keeping involves using fuel in the motors, the lifetime of the satellite can be
extended by allowing the satellite to drift into a wider Figure 8 and using the motor less often.
The older satellites will be found in a more inclined orbit with the station keeping varying in
latitude by as much as 4. The total effect of the inclined orbit may result in a typical variation
in path delay of 35 ms.
B.4.1.2 Plesiochronous
The stability of station reference clocks is normally 1 x 10-12 (derived from a cesium standard).
While the stability is exceptionally high, the two clocks are not in synchronization with each
other and will eventually pass by each other.
The clock used for the TX signal is passed over the satellite, but will not be used at the RX earth
station where a national network derives its time locally. A buffer will fill up with data using the
clock from the satellite and will empty using the local clock. The object of the buffer is to ensure
that the buffer overflows or underflows at regular, determinable intervals (typically every 40
days). The buffer depth required (from center to end) would be:
Minimum slip period (seconds) * [stability of far end (transmit) clock + stability of local clock]
For example:
Far end (transmit) clock stability
1 x 10-9
Local (buffer) clock
1 x 10-11
Minimum clock slip
40 days
Buffer Depth = (40 x 24 x 60 x 60) x (1 x 10-9 + 1 x 10-11) = 3.49 ms

Because the buffer will either fill or empty (depending on the frequency relationship of the two
clocks), the total buffer depth will be 2 x 3.49 ms = 6.98 ms.
B17

Appendix B
Revision 8
B.4.1.3 Frame / Multiframe Length

The depth of the receive buffer required is applicable to all unframed data.
When the data is framed (such as 2048 kbps G732 or 1544 kbps G733), it is desirable to provide
slips in predefined locations. The advantage of organized slip locations (in relation to the frame) is
that multiplexing equipment does not lose sync and outages on any channel are kept to a minimum.
A 2048 kbps frame structure commonly used is G732. This has a frame length of 256 bits with 16
frames per multiframe (4096 bits total, or 2 ms).
B.4.1.3.1
Multiples of the Frame Length
If this setting is set to NONE, the user can choose any buffer depth.
B.4.1.4 Total Buffer Length

T1 and E1 framing structure under G.704 are available. When this is selected, the buffer length is
restricted to the size of the buffer. Using the examples from the three previous sections, the total
buffer depth (end to end) will be:
Doppler + Plesiochronous (rounded up to the nearest multiframe)
1.15 ms + 6.98 ms = 8.13 ms
If the frame length is 2 ms, then the nearest multiframe will be 10 ms, or 20,480 bits.
B.4.1.4.1
Converting Between Bits and Seconds

Bits to Seconds
Seconds to Bits
1/Data Rate x Bits = Seconds

Data Rate x Seconds = Bit
B18
Appendix C. REMOTE CONTROL

C.1
Overview
This appendix describes the protocol and message command set for remote monitor and control of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
The electrical interface is either an EIA-485 multi-drop bus (for the control of many devices) or an EIA-232 connection (for the control of
a single device), and data is transmitted in asynchronous serial form using ASCII characters. Control and status information is transmitted
in packets of variable length in accordance with the structure and protocol defined in later sections.
C.2
EIA-485
For applications where multiple devices are to be monitored and controlled, a full-duplex (or 4-wire) EIA-485 is preferred. Half-duplex
(2-wire) EIA-485 is possible, but is not preferred.
In full-duplex EIA-485 communication there are two separate, isolated, independent differential-mode twisted pairs, each handling serial
data in different directions. It is assumed that there is a Controller device (a PC or dumb terminal), which transmits data in a broadcast
mode via one of the pairs. Many Target devices are connected to this pair, which all simultaneously receive data from the Controller.
The Controller is the only device with a line-driver connected to this pair the Target devices only have line-receivers connected.
In the other direction, on the other pair each Target has a Tri-Stateable line driver connected, and the Controller has a line-receiver
connected. All the line drivers are held in high-impedance mode until one and only one Target transmits back to the Controller.
Each Target has a unique address, and each time the Controller transmits in a framed packet of data, the address of the intended recipient
Target is included. All of the Targets receive the packet, but only one the intended will reply. The Target enables its output line driver
and transmits its return data packet back to the Controller in the other direction, on the physically separate pair.
C1

Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
EIA-485 (full duplex) summary:
C.3
Two differential pairs: one pair for Controller-to-Target, one pair for Target -to-Controller.
Controller-to-Target pair has one line driver (Controller), and all Target s have line-receivers.
Target-to-Controller pair has one line receiver (Controller), and all Targets have Tri-State drivers.
EIA-232
This is a much simpler configuration in which the Controller device is connected directly to the Target via a two-wire-plus-ground
connection. Controller-to-Target data is carried via EIA-232 electrical levels on one conductor, and Target -to-Controller data is carried in
the other direction on the other conductor.
C.4
Basic Protocol
Whether in EIA-232 or EIA-485 mode, all data is transmitted as asynchronous serial characters suitable for transmission and reception by
a UART. In this case, the asynchronous character format supported is 8N1. The baud rate may vary between 2400 and 57,600 baud.
All data is transmitted in framed packets. The Controller is assumed to be a PC or ASCII dumb terminal, which is in charge of the process
of monitor and control. The Controller is the only device which is permitted to initiate, at will, the transmission of data. Targets are only
permitted to transmit when they have been specifically instructed to do so by the Controller.
All bytes within a packet are printable ASCII characters less than ASCII code 127. In this context, the Carriage Return and Line Feed
characters are considered printable.
All messages from Controller-to-Target require a response, with one exception: this will be either to return data, which has been requested
by the Controller, or to acknowledge reception of an instruction to change the configuration of the Target. The exception to this is when
the Controller broadcasts a message (such as Set time/date) using Address 0, when the Target is set to EIA-485 mode.
C2

Appendix C
C.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Packet Structure
Controller-to-Target
Start of Packet
Target Address
<
ASCII code 60
Instruction Code
/
ASCII code 47
(1 character)
Example:
Address Delimiter
(4 characters)
(1 character)
Code Qualifier
Optional Arguments
= or ?
ASCII codes 61 or
63
(3 characters)
(1 character)
End of Packet
Carriage Return
ASCII code 13
(n characters)
(1 character)
<0135/TFQ=70.2345{CR}
Target-to-Controller
Start of Packet
Target Address
>
ASCII code 62
C.5.1
Instruction Code
/
ASCII code 47
(1 character)
Example:
Address Delimiter
(4 characters)
(1 character)
Code Qualifier
=, ?, !, or *
ASCII codes
61, 63, 33, or 42
(3 characters)
(1 character)
Optional Arguments
(From 0 to n
characters)
End of Packet
Carriage Return,
Line Feed
ASCII codes 13,10
(2 characters)
>0654/RSW=32{CR}{LF}
Start of Packet
Controller-to-Target: This is the character < (ASCII code 60).
Target-to-Controller: This is the character > (ASCII code 62).
Because this is used to provide a reliable indication of the start of packet, these two characters may not appear anywhere else within the
body of the message.
C3

Appendix C
C.5.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Target Address
Up to 9999 devices can be uniquely addressed. In EIA-232 applications, this value is set to 0. In EIA-485 applications, the permissible
range of values is 1 to 9999. It is programmed into a Target unit using the front panel keypad.
IMPORTANT
C.5.3
The Controller sends a packet with the address of a Target the destination of the packet. When the Target responds, the
address used is the same address, to indicate to the Controller the source of the packet. The Controller does not have its own
address.
Address Delimiter
This is the forward slash character '/ ' (ASCII code 47).
C.5.4
Instruction Code
This is a three-character alphabetic sequence, which identifies the subject of the message. Wherever possible, the instruction codes have
been chosen to have some significance e.g., TFQ for transmit frequency, RMD for receive modulation type, etc. This aids in the
readability of the message, should it be displayed in its raw ASCII form. Only upper case alphabetic characters may be used (A to Z,
ASCII codes 65 to 90).
C.5.5
Instruction Code Qualifier

This is a single character, which further qualifies the preceding instruction code. Code Qualifiers obey the following rules:
1. From Controller-to-Target, the only permitted values are:
Symbol
Definition
=
(ASCII code 61)
The = code is used as the Assignment Operator (AO) and is used to indicate that the parameter defined by the preceding byte should
be set to the value of the argument (s) which follow it.
Example: in a message from Controller-to-Target, TFQ=0950.0000 would mean set the transmit frequency to 950 MHz.
?
(ASCII code 63)
The ? code is used as the Query Operator (QO) and is used to indicate that the Target should return the current value of the
parameters defined by the preceding byte.
Example: in a message from Controller-to-Target, TFQ? Would mean return the current value of the transmit frequency.
C4

Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2. From Target-to-Controller, the only permitted values are:
C.5.6
Symbol
Definition
=
(ASCII code 61)
The = code is used in two ways:

a. If the Controller has sent a query code to a Target
(Example: TFQ? (meaning whats the Transmit frequency?), the Target would respond with TFQ=xxxx.xxxx, where xxxx.xxxx
represents the frequency in question.
b. If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, then, providing the value sent is valid, the Target will
acknowledge the message by replying with TFQ=(with no message arguments)
?
(ASCII code 63)
If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, then, if the value sent is not valid, the Target will
acknowledge the message by replying (for example) with TFQ? (with no message arguments). This indicates that there was an error in
the message sent by the Controller.
!
(ASCII code 33)
If the Controller sends an instruction code which the Target does not recognize, the Target will acknowledge the message by echoing
the invalid instruction, followed by the ! character with: Example: XYZ!
*
(ASCII code 42)
If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, then, if the value sent is valid, BUT the modulator will not
permit that particular parameter to be changed at this time, the Target will acknowledge the message by replying (for example) with
TFQ* (with message arguments).
#
ASCI code 35)
If the Controller sends a correctly formatted command, BUT the modulator is not in remote mode, it will not allow reconfiguration and
will respond with TFQ#
Optional Message Arguments

Arguments are not required for all messages. Arguments are ASCII codes for the characters 0 to 9 (ASCII codes 48 to 57), period (ASCII
code 46) and comma (ASCII code 44).
C.5.7
End Of Packet
Controller-to-Target: This is the Carriage Return character (ASCII code 13).
Target-to-Controller: This is the two-character sequence Carriage Return, Line Feed (ASCII codes 13 and 10). Both indicate the
valid termination of a packet.
C5

Appendix C
C.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Remote Commands / Queries

Index Notes: Where Column C = Command and Column Q = Query, columns marked X designate instruction code as Command only, Query only,
A
or Command/Query. Under CODE, XXX indicates a priority command; XXX indicates a command/query valid only when the SLM-5650A modem type
O
has been set to AUPC; XXX indicates a command/query that is valid only when an optional interface module has been installed in the SLM-5650A.
CODE
PAGE
A
ACTA
AETA
AMNA
AMTA
AMXA
ANPA
ARBA
ARFA
ASIA
ATBA
ATFA
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
B
BBR
BEI
BER
BFS
BRS
BRTO
BRX
BTX
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-32
C-32
C-32
C-32
C-32
C-32
C-33
C-33
C-33
C-34
C-34
C-15
C-9
C-15
C-21
C-15
C-40
C-16
C-9
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C
CAAA
CAE
CAS
CCF
CDM
CFM
CFO
CID
CLD
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-34
C-21
C-21
C-21
C-21
C-21
C-22
C-22
C-29
CODE
PAGE
CODE
CNM
C-22
LUF
COM
CRA
CRM
CSD
CST
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-22
C-22
C-23
C-23
C-29
C-23
M
MGC
MIPO
MISO
MOM
MRC
MSK
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-37
C-37
C-23
C-16
C-24
C-37
C-16
X
X
C-40
C-39
D
DAY
E
E1FO
E2FO
EBA
EBN
EID
ERFO
ERR
G
GBMO
GIPO
X
X
X
X
I
IAPA
IEP
IMG
IPA
ISP
ITF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-34
C-24
C-24
C-25
C-25
C-7
L
LCLA
LOP
LPCA
LRS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-35
C-25
C-35
C-25
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
NUAA
NUE
NUS
PAGE
CODE
PAGE
CODE
C-26
RFM
C-14
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-18
C-18
C-14
C-40
C-41
C-14
C-35
C-27
C-28
C-36
C-36
C-36
C-36
C-19
C-19
C-19
C-19
C-19
C-19
C-20
C-37
C-20
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-9
C-42
C-42
C-28
C-28
C-28
T1FO
T2FO
TBO
TCI
TCK
TCR
TCW
TDE
TDF
TDI
TDR
TFM
TFQ
TFT
TIM
TMD
TMP
TPL
TRD
TRS
TSC
TSE
TSF
TSI
TTCO
TXF
TXO
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-29
C-40
C-40
C-7
C-25
C-25
X
X
X
C-34
C-26
C-26
P
PAT
C-27
R
RBM
RBO
RBS
RCB
RCI
RCK
RCLA
RCR
RCW
RDD
RDF
RDI
RDR
RDS
REA
RFB
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-16
C-16
C-16
C-16
C-17
C-17
C-36
C-15
C-17
C-17
C-17
C-18
C-15
C-18
C-18
C-7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RFO
RFQ
RFT
RIMO
RIPO
RMD
RNAA
RNE
RNS
RPBA
RPCA
RPEA
RPLA
RRD
RRS
RSE
RSF
RSI
RSL
RSW
RTCO
RXF
S
SCT
SMGO
SMIO
SNO
SSI
SWR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PAGE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-38
C-38
C-9
C-10
C-10
C-9
C-10
C-10
C-10
C-11
C-9
C-8
C-11
C-8
C-28
C-8
C-28
C-11
C-11
C-11
C-12
C-12
C-12
C-12
C-38
C-12
C-13
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
NOTE Instruction Code Qualifiers, as defined in Sect. C.5.5, are used as follows in the command/query tables Response to Command columns:
=
?
Message ok
Received ok, but invalid arguments found
*
#
C6
Message ok, but not permitted in current mode

Message ok, but unit is not in Remote mode

Appendix C
C.6.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Initial Setup Priority Commands / Queries
Before executing any Modem, Unit, Bulk/Global, AUPC, or Optional Interface commands/queries, initial setup should be accomplished with these
three commands, prioritized as follows: (Highest Priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (Lowest Priority). Priority commands are indicated by shading
throughout these sections. Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Modem
Operating
Mode
MOM=
1 hex byte,
value 0 thru C
Modem RF
Band
RFB=
1 byte, value 0
or 1
Interface Type
ITF=
1 byte, value 0
thru 7
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Modem Operating Mode, where:
x = 0=OM-73
1=Mil-165A
2=IESS-308
3=IESS-309
4=IESS-310
5=TURBO
6=16QAM
7=AUPC
8=RXBURST
9=TXBURST
A=TURBO-FA
B=RXBRSTFA
C=LDPC
Example: MOM=0 (sets OM-73 operating mode)
Command or Query.
Modem RF Band, where:
0=70/140 MHz Band
1=L-Band (950 MHz 2000 MHz)
Example: RFB=0 (sets 70/140 Band)
Command or Query.
Interface Type, where:
0=EIA-530
1=HSSI
2=Unbalance G.703
3=Balanced G.703
4=GigaBit Ethernet Interface
6=Network Processor Card
7=LVDS Interface
Example: ITF=0 (sets EIA-530 interface type)
C7
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
MOM=
MOM?
MOM*
MOM#
MOM?
MOM=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RFB=
RFB?
RFB *
RFB #
RFB?
RFB =x
(see Description
of Arguments)
ITF=
ITF?
ITF*
ITF#
ITF?
ITF=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
C.6.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modulator (Tx) Commands / Queries
Tx Priority System = (Highest priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (See Sect. C.6.1), TFM, TFT, TMD, TCR, and TDR (Lowest Priority). Priority
commands indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
Parameter
Type
Tx Overhead
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TFM=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of
0 thru 2, 4
Tx FEC Type
TFT=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 6
Tx Modulation
Type
TMD=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 4
Command or Query.
Tx Overhead Type, where:
0=None (Unframed)
1=IBS
2=IDR
4=AUPC
Depending on Modem mode, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TFM=0 (selects Unframed mode)
Command or Query.
Tx FEC coding type, where:
0=None (Uncoded)
1=Viterbi
2=Turbo
3=Sequential
4=LDPC ULL (Ultra Low Latency)
5=LDPC LL (Low Latency)
6=LDPC HP (High Performance)
Example: TFT=2 (selects Turbo coding)
Command or Query.
Tx Modulation type, where:
0=BPSK
1=QPSK
2=OQPSK
3=8PSK
4=16QAM
Depending on FEC type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TMD=1 (selects QPSK)
C8
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
TFM=
TFM?
TFM*
TFM#
TFM?
TFM=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TFT=
TFT?
TFT*
TFT#
TFT?
TFT=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TMD=
TMD?
TMD*
TMD#
TMD?
TMD=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Tx Code Rate
TCR=
1 byte, value of
0 thru D
Tx Data Rate
TDR=
10 bytes
Command or Query
Tx Code Rate, where:
0 = 1/1 (Uncoded)
1 = 1/2
2 = 3/4
3 = 7/8
4 = 2/3
5 = 5/6
6 = 21/44
7 = 5/16
8 = 17/18
9 = Reserved
A = Reserved
B = .547
C = .456
D = .382
Example: TCR=1 (selects Rate 1/2)
Command or Query.
Tx Data rate, in kbps, in the form xxxxxx.xxx.
Resolution=1 bps.
Example: TDR=002047.999 (selects 2047.999 kbps)
Command only.
Insert single bit error in Tx BERT
Example: BEI=
Insert Tx BERT
Error
BEI=
None
Tx BERT State
BTX=
Tx SCT
Reference
SCT=
1 byte, value of 0 Command or Query.

or 1
Tx BERT State, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: BTX=1 (Tx BERT On)
thru 2
SCT Clock Reference, where:
0=Internal
1=Data Source Synchronized
2=Loop Timing (Rx-Satellite Clock)
Example: SCT=0 (selects Internal Modem Reference)
C9
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
TCR=
TCR?
TCR*
TCR#
TCR?
TCR=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TDR=
TDR?
TDR*
TDR#
TDR?
TDR=xxxxxx.xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
BEI=
BEI?
BEI*
BEI#
BTX=
BTX?
BTX*
BTX#
N/A
N/A
BTX?
BTX=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
SCT =
SCT?
SCT*
SCT#
SCT?
SCT=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Tx BPSK Data
Ordering
TBO=
Tx Clock Invert
TCI=
Tx Clock
Source
TCK=
Tx
Reed-Solomon
Code Word
TCW=
Tx Differential
Encoding
TDE=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

or 1
Invert Transmit BPSK Data Ordering, where::
0=Standard
1=Non-Standard
Example: TBO=1 (selects Inverted BPSK Ordering)
or 1
Invert Transmit Clock, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: TCI=1 (selects Inverted TX Clock)
1 byte
Command or Query.
Tx Clock Source, where:
x=Tx Clock Source:
0=SCT
1=Tx Terrestrial
Example: TCK=1 (selects Tx Terrestrial Clock Source)
to 5
Tx RS encoding, where:
0 = RS(225,205,10)
1 = RS(219,201,9)
2 = RS(208,192,8)
3 = RS(194,178,8)
4 = RS(126,112,7)
5 = RS(220,200,10)
Depending on Modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be
valid.
Example: TCW=0 (This is a dont care if RS is Off under TRS)
1 byte
Command or Query.
Tx Differential Encoding, where:
x=Tx Differential Encoding:
0=Off
1=On
Depending on FEC type or Modulation Type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TDE=1 (selects Tx Differential Encoding On)
C10
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
TBO =
TBO?
TBO*
TBO#
TBO?
TBO=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TCI =
TCI?
TCI*
TCI#
TCI?
TCI=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TCK=
TCK?
TCK*
TCK#
TCK?
TCK=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TCW=
TCW?
TCW*
TCW#
TCW?
TCW=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TDE=
TDE?
TDE*
TDE#
TDE?
TDE=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Tx Data Fault
TDF=
Tx Data Invert
TDI=
Tx Frequency
TFQ=
Tx Power Level
Tx
Reed-Solomon
Interleaver
Depth
Tx
Reed-Solomon
Encoding
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

thru 2
Transmit Data Fault, where:
0=None
1=DATA
2=AIS
Example: TDF=0 (selects Data Fault = None)
or 1
Invert Transmit Data, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: TDI=1 (selects Inverted TX Data)
9 bytes
Command or Query.
Tx Frequency, 52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 176 MHz, and 950 to 2000 MHz
Resolution = 100Hz.
Example: TFQ=0140.9872
Command or Query.
TPL=
5 bytes
TRD=
Tx Output power level, where:

s=sign ( + / - )
xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and 40.0 dBm.
Example: TPL=-13.4
to 2
0 = Interleaver Depth 4
TRS=
valid.
Example: TRD=0 (This is a dont care if RS is Off under TRS)
or 1
0=Off
1=On
Example: TRS=0 (RS encoding is Off)
C11
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
TDF =
TDF?
TDF*
TDF#
TDF?
TDF=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TDI =
TDI?
TDI*
TDI#
TDI?
TDI=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TFQ=
TFQ?
TFQ*
TFQ#
TFQ?
TFQ=xxxx.xxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
TPL=
TPL?
TPL*
TPL#
TPL?
TPL=sxx.x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TRD =
TRD?
TRD *
TRD #
TRD?
TRD =x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TRS=
TRS?
TRS*
TRS#
TRS?
TRS=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Tx Scrambler
TSC=
Tx Spreading
Equation
TSE=
Tx Spreading
Factor
TSF=
Tx Spectrum
Invert
TSI=
Live Tx Faults
N/A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query

thru 6
Tx Scrambler state, where:
0 = Off
1 = OM-73 Scrambler
2 = V.35 Scrambler
3 = Modified V.35 (Comtech EF Data Closed Network)
4 = Reed-Solomon Synchronous Scrambler
5 = IBS Overhead Synchronous Scrambler
6 = TURBO Scrambler
Depending on Modem mode, FEC type, overhead type, and RS state, not all
selections will be valid.
Example: TSC=1 (OM-73 Scrambler On)
thru 4
Tx Spreading Equation, where x selects Equation 1 thru 4:
Example: TSE=1 (Tx Equation #1)
3 bytes, value of
1 thru 128
Command or Query.
Tx Spreading Factor, where xxx is value from 1 to 128. Values other than 1 are only
valid when Modem Type = LDPC.
Example: TSF=001 (Tx Spreading Off)

or 1
Tx Spectrum Invert selection, where:
0=Normal,
1=Tx Spectrum Inverted
Example: TSI=0 (selects normal)
8 bytes
Query only.
Live Tx Faults are returned as a 32 bit Hexadecimal value. Bit values are defined as
follows:
80000000 = Modulator Symbol Clock not locked
40000000 = Modulator RF Synthesizer not locked
20000000 = Modulator No IQ Activity
10000000 = Modulator Nyquist Filter Clipping
08000000 = Interface data clock PLLs not locked
04000000 = Interface Terrestrial Clock No Activity
02000000 = Interface SCT PLL not locked
01000000 = Interface No Data Activity
Example: TXF=00000000 indicates No Tx Faults
C12
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
TSC=
TSC?
TSC*
TSC#
TSC?
TSC=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TSE=
TSE?
TSE*
TSE#
TSF=
TSF?
TSF*
TSF#
TSE?
TSE=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TSF?
TSF=xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
TSI=
TSI?
TSI*
TSI#
TSI?
TSI=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
TXF?
TXF=xxxxxxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Tx Carrier State
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TXO=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

thru 3
Tx Carrier State, where:
0=OFF due to front panel or remote control command
1=ON
2=RTS
3=OFF due to ext H/W Tx Carrier Off command (not a valid argument when used
as a command)
Example: TXO=1 (Tx Carrier ON)
C13
Response to
Command
TXO=
TXO?
TXO*
TXO#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TXO?
Response to Query
TXO=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
C.6.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Demodulator (Rx) Commands / Queries
Rx Priority System = (Highest priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (See Sect. C.6.1), RFM, RFT, RMD, RCR, and RDR (Lowest Priority). Priority
commands are indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Rx Framing
Mode
RFM=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 2, 4
Rx FEC Type
RFT=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 6
Rx Demod type RMD=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 4
Command or Query.
Rx Overhead Type, where:
0=None (Unframed)
1=IBS
2=IDR
4=AUPC
Example: RFM=0 (selects Unframed mode)
Command or Query.
Rx FEC coding type, where:
0=None (Uncoded)
1=Viterbi
2=Turbo
3=Sequential
4=LDPC ULL (Ultra Low Latency)
5=LDPC LL (Low Latency)
6=LDPC HP (High Performance)
Example: RFT=2 (selects Turbo coding)
Command or Query.
Rx Modulation type, where:
0=BPSK
1=QPSK
2=OQPSK
3=8PSK
4=16QAM
Example: RMD=1 (selects QPSK)
C14
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
RFM=
RFM?
RFM*
RFM#
RFM?
RFM=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RFT=
RFT?
RFT*
RFT#
RFT?
RFT=x
(same format
as command
argument)
RMD=
RMD?
RMD*
RMD#
RMD?
RMD=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Rx FEC Code
Rate
Rx Data Rate
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RCR=
RDR=
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of
0 thru D
10 bytes
Command or Query.
Rx FEC Code Rate, where:
0 = 1/1 (Uncoded)
1 = 1/2
2 = 3/4
3 = 7/8
4 = 2/3
5 = 5/6
6 = 21/44
7 = 5/16
8 = 17/18
9 = Reserved
A = Reserved
B = .547
C = .456
D = .382
Example: RCR=1 (selects Rate 1/2)
Command or Query.
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RCR=
RCR?
RCR*
RCR#
RCR?
RCR=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
RDR?
RDR=xxxxxx.xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
BBR?
BBR=a.bEcc
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
BER?
BER=a.bEcc
(see Description
of Arguments)
BRS=
BRS?
BRS*
BRS#
N/A
N/A
Rx Data rate, in kbps, in the form xxxxxx.xxx.

Resolution = 1 bps.
Rx BERT BER
N/A
6 bytes
Example: RDR=002047.999 (selects 2047.999 kbps)

Query only.
Unit returns the value of the BERT BER in the form a.b x 10-c, where:
First three bytes are the value;
Last two bytes are the exponent.
Rx BER
N/A
6 bytes
Rx BERT Reset
BRS=
None
Returns 0.0E00 if the BERT is not synchronized to a pattern.

Example: BBR=4.9E12
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the estimated corrected BER in the form a.b x 10-cc . First
three bytes are the value. Last two bytes are the exponent. Returns 99999 if the
demodulator is unlocked.
Example: BER=4.8E03 (selects BER = 4.8 x 10-3)
Command only.
Reset Rx BERT.
Example: BRS=
C15
Response to Query

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Rx BERT State
BRX=
Rx Eb/No
N/A
Rx BERT Errors N/A
Rx Buffer
Programming
Mode
RBM=
Rx BPSK Data
Ordering
RBO=
Rx Buffer Size
RBS=
ReCenter Buffer RCB=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

or 1
Rx BERT State, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: BRX=1 (Rx BERT On)
4 bytes
Query only.
Returns the value of Eb/No, between 0 and 20 dB, resolution = 0.1 dB.
Returns 99.9 if demod is unlocked.
Example: EBN=12.3 (selects Eb/No = 12.3 dB)
For values greater than 20.0 dB, the reply will be: EBN=+020
7 bytes
Query only.
Read the total number of Bit Errors.
Example: ERR=9999999
or 1
Rx Buffer Programming Mode, where:
0 = Buffer Size is programmed in Bits.
1 = Buffer Size is programmed in milliseconds.
Note: Commands as well as queries are not allowed when either the GigaBit
Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: RBM=0
or 1
Invert Receive BPSK Data Ordering in the form x, where:
0=Standard
1=Non-Standard
Example: RBO=1 (selects Inverted BPSK Ordering)
8 bytes
Command or Query.
Rx Buffer Size (in either bits or milliseconds, see RBM command), where:
xxxxxxxx=Rx Buffer Size
Example: RBS=00000512
None
Command only.
Forces the software to recenter the receive Plesiochronous / Doppler buffer.
Note: This command is not allowed when either the GigaBit Ethernet or NP card has
been selected as the current interface type.
Example: RCB= (ReCenter buffer)
C16
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
BRX=
BRX?
BRX*
BRX#
BRX?
BRX=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
EBN?
EBN=xxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
ERR?
N/A
RBM=
RBM?
RBM*
RBM#
RBM?
RBM=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RBO =
RBO?
RBO*
RBO#
RBO?
RBO=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RBS=
RBS?
RBS*
RBS#
RBS?
RBS=xxxxxxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
RCB=
RCB?
RCB*
RCB#
N/A
N/A

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Rx Clock Invert
RCI=
Rx Clock
Source
RCK=
Rx
Reed-Solomon
Code Word
RCW=
Rx Differential
Decoding
RDD=
Rx Data Fault
RDF=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

or 1
Invert Receive Clock in the form x, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: RCI=1 (selects Inverted RX Clock)
thru 3
Rx Clock Source, where:
0=Rx Satellite
1=Internal
2=Tx-Terrestrial
3= External Clock (only valid with the G.703 Option Card)
Example: RCK=2 (selects Tx-Terrestrial)
to 5
Rx RS encoding in the form x, where:
0 = RS(225,205,10)
1 = RS(219,201,9)
2 = RS(208,192,8)
3 = RS(194,178,8)
4 = RS(126,112,7)
5 = RS(220,200,10)
valid.
Example: RCW=0 (This is a dont care if RS is Off under TRS)
or 1
Rx Differential Decoding in the form x, where:
0=Off
1=On
Depending on FEC type or Modulation Type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RDD=1 (selects Rx Differential Decoding On)
thru 2
Receive Data Fault, where:
0=None
1=DATA
2=AIS
Example: RDF=0 (selects Data Fault = None)
C17
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
RCI =
RCI?
RCI*
RCI#
RCI?
RCI=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RCK=
RCK?
RCK*
RCK#
RCK?
RCK=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RCW =
RCW?
RCW *
RCW #
RCW?
RCW=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RDD=
RDD?
RDD*
RDD#
RDD?
RDD=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RDF =
RDF?
RDF*
RDF#
RDF?
RDF=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Rx Data Invert
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RDI=
Rx Descrambler RDS=
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query

or 1
Invert Receive Data, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: RDI=1 (selects Inverted RX Data)
thru 6
Rx Scrambler state, where:
0 = Off
1 = OM-73 Scrambler
2 = IESS-V.35 Scrambler
3 = Modified V.35 (Comtech EF Data Closed Network)
4 = Reed-Solomon Synchronous Scrambler
5 = IBS Overhead Synchronous Scrambler
6 = TURBO Scrambler
Rx
Reacquisition
Time
REA=
3 bytes
Rx Frequency
Offset
N/A
5 bytes
Rx Frequency
RFQ=
9 bytes
Depending on Modem mode, FEC type, overhead type, and RS state, not all
selections will be valid.
Example: RDS=1 (OM-73 Scrambler On)
Command or Query.
Rx reacquisition time, in seconds, ranging from 0 to 999.
Example: REA=000 (selects 0 seconds)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the measured frequency offset of the carrier being
demodulated.
Values range from 0 to 30 kHz, 100 Hz resolution.
Returns 99999 if the demodulator is unlocked.
Example: RFO=+02.3 (selects + 2.3 kHz)
Command or Query.
Rx Frequency, 52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 176 MHz, and 950 to 2000 MHz.
Resolution = 100Hz.
Example: RFQ=0140.9872
C18
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
RDI =
RDI?
RDI*
RDI#
RDI?
RDI=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RDS=
RDS?
RDS*
RDS#
RDS?
RDS=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
REA=
REA?
REA*
REA#
N/A
REA?
REA=xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
RFO?
RFO=xxxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
RFQ=
RFQ?
RFQ*
RFQ#
RFQ?
RFQ=xxxx.xxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Rx
Reed-Solomon
Interleaver
Depth
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RRD=
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query

to 2
Rx RS encoding, where:
valid.
Example: RRD=0 (This is a dont care if RS is Off under RRS)
or 1
Rx RS encoding, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: RRS=0 (RS encoding is Off)
thru 4
Rx Spreading Equation, where x selects Equation 1 thru 4:
Rx ReedSolomon
Decoding
RRS=
Rx Spreading
Equation
RSE=
Rx Spreading
Factor
RSF=
3 bytes, value of
1 thru 128
Rx Spectrum
Invert
RSI=
Rx Signal Level
N/A

or 1
Rx Spectrum Invert, where:
0=Normal
1=Rx Spectrum Invert
Example: RSI=0 (selects Normal)
5 bytes
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the Rx signal level in the form sxx.x, where:
s = + (positive) or (negative) sign
xx.x Rx signal level value in dBm, between +15.0 and 60.0 dBm
Examples:
RSL = +99.9 (RSL > +15.0 dBm)
RSL = +15.0
RSL = -60.0
RSL = -99.9 (RSL < -60.0 dBm)
Example: RSE=1 (Rx Equation #1)

Command or Query.
Rx Spreading Factor, where xxx is value from 1 to 128. Values other than 1 are only
valid when Modem Type = LDPC.
Example: RSF=001 (Rx Spreading Off)
C19
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
RRD =
RRD?
RRD *
RRD #
RRD?
RRD =x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RRS=
RRS?
RRS*
RRS#
RRS?
RRS=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RSE=
RSE?
RSE*
RSE#
RSE?
RSE=x
(See Description
of Arguments)
RSF=
RSF?
RSF*
RSF#
RSF?
RSF=xxx
(See Description
of Arguments)
RSI=
RSI?
RSI*
RSI#
RSI?
RSI=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
RSL?
RSL=sxx.x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Rx Demod
Acquisition
Sweep Range
RSW=
8 bytes
Command or Query.
Rx acquisition sweep range of demodulator, in kHz, ranging from 0 to 60 kHz.
Example: RSW=0060.000 (selects 60 kHz)
Live Rx Faults
N/A
8 bytes
Query only.
Live Rx Faults are returned as a 32 bit Hexadecimal value. Bit values are defined as
follows:
80000000 = Demodulator IF not locked
40000000 = Demodulator Data Decoder not locked
20000000 = Demodulator RF Synthesizer not locked
10000000 = Demodulator No IQ Activity
08000000 = Interface De-Multiplexers not locked
04000000 = Interface Buffer Fault
02000000 = Interface Buffer about to slip
01000000 = Interface Buffer has overflowed
00800000 = Interface Buffer has underflowed
00400000 = Interface Buffer Clock PLL not locked
00200000 = Interface Buffer Clock Reference Activity
00100000 = Interface Data/AIS
00080000 = Eb/No Threshold exceeded
00040000 = Composite Power > 40 dBc
00020000 = Composite Power > 20 dBm
00010000 = BERT Sync Loss
Example: RXF=00000000 indicates No Rx Faults
C20
Response to
Command
RSW=
RSW?
RSW*
RSW#
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
RSW?
RSW=xxxx.xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
RXF?
RXF=xxxxxxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
C.6.4
Parameter
Type
Buffer Fill State
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem, Unit Commands / Queries

Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
2 bytes
Query only.
xx = value of the buffer fill state, between 1 to 99%.
Returns 00 if demodulator is unlocked.
Example: BFS=33 (selects 33%)
Command only.
Forces the software to clear the software events log.
Note: This command takes no arguments
Example: CAE=
Command only.
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A
BFS?
BFS=xx
(see Description
of Arguments)
CAE=
CAE?
CAE*
CAE#
N/A
N/A
CAS=
CAS?
CAS*
CAS#
N/A
N/A
CCF=
CCF?
CCF*
CCF#
CCF?
CCF=xx.xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
Clear All Stored

Events
CAE=
None
Clear All Stored

Statistics
CAS=
None
Carrier-inCarrier (CnC)
Frequency
Offset Range
CCF=
6 bytes
Delay Monitor
N/A
6 bytes
Query only.
N/A
CDM?
CDM=xxxxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
Frequency
Offset Monitor
N/A
6 bytes
When CnC is enabled and locked, the delay of the interferer is readable in
microseconds.
Example 1: CDM=229500 (229.5 mSec)
Example 2: CDM=999999 (not locked or CnC not enabled)
Query only.
N/A
CFM?
CFM=xxxx.x
(see Description
of Arguments)
Forces the software to clear the software statistics log.

Note: This command takes no arguments
Example: CAS=
Command or Query.
CnC Sweep Frequency range from 0 to 60.000 kHz
Example: CCF=60.000
When CnC is enabled and locked, the estimated frequency offset between the
desired signal and the interferer is readable in kHz.
Example 1: CFM=+001.0 (1 kHz)
Example 2: CFM=9999.9 (not locked or CnC not enabled)
C21

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Configured
FAST Options
Circuit ID String
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
CID=
Mode
CNM=
Carrier Only
Test Modes
COM=
Re-Acquisition
Time
CRA=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
16 bytes
24 bytes
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Command or Query.
Unit returns information concerning the Configured FAST Options, and the option
field, in the form abcdefghxxxxxxxx, where:
a = QOS: 0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed
b = Reserved
c = Spectrum Spreading
d = Management Security: 0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed
e = Vipersat Compatibility: 0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed
f = Reserved
g = Transec Data Rate Option: 0 = Base (5,000 kbps),
1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps, 3 = 51,840 kbps,
4 = 155,520 kbps, 5 = 2,500 kbps
h = Vipersat Data Rate Option: 0 = Base (5,000 kbps),
1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps, 3 = 51,840 kbps,
4 = 155,520 kbps, 5 = 2,500 kbps
i = Bridged Point to Multipoint: 0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed
j = Customer Defined Options: 0-3
x = spare
Command or Query.
Sets or queries the user-defined Circuit ID string, which is a fixed length of 24

characters.
Valid characters include: Space ( ) * + , . / 0 9 and A thru Z
or 1
CnC Mode of Operation, where:
0= Off
1= On
Example: CNM=0
thru 2
Test Mode, where:
0= Normal Mode (no test)
1=Tx CW
2=Tx Alternating 1,0 Pattern
Example: COM=1 (CW Mode)
3 bytes
Command or Query.
CnC re-Acquisition time in seconds, from 10 to 999. This is the time wherein CnC
will start searching for the delay and frequency offset if a long duration of unlock
occurs.
Example: CRA=010
C22
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A
CFO?
CFO=abcdefghijxx
xxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
CID=
CID?
CID*
CID#
CID?
CID=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
CNM=
CNM?
CNM*
CNM#
CNM?
CNM=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
COM=
COM?
COM*
COM#
COM?
COM=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
CRA=
CRA?
CRA*
CRA#
CRA?
CRA=xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Ratio Monitor
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
4 bytes
Carrier-inCSD=
Carrier (CnC)
Min/Max Search
Delay
6 bytes
RTC Date
DAY=
6 bytes
Eb/No Alarm
Point
EBA=
4 bytes
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, the ratio between the interferer and the desired
signal power is readable in dB.
Example 1: CRM=+02 (interferer > desired)
Example 2: CRM=LT10 (less than -10 dB)
Example 3: CRM=GT10 (greater than +10 dB)
Example 4: CRM=99.9 (not locked or CnC not enabled)
Command or Query.
CnC min/max delay value in milliseconds, from 0 to 300 ms in the form xxxyyy,
where:
xxx=min delay
yyy=max delay
Example: CSD=010300
Command or Query.
A date in the form ddmmyy, where:
dd = day of the month (01 to 31),
mm = month (01 to 12)
yy = year (00 to 99)
Example: DAY=240457 (April 24, 2057)
Command or Query.
Eb/No alarm point in dB, with a range between 0.1 and 20 dB.
Resolution = 0.1 dB.
Example: EBA=12.3
C23
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A
CRM?
CRM=xxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
CSD=
CSD?
CSD*
CSD#
CSD?
CSD=xxxyyy
(see Description
of Arguments)
DAY=
DAY?
DAY*
DAY#
DAY?
DAY=ddmmyy
(see Description
of Arguments)
EBA=
EBA?
EBA*
EBA#
EBA?
EBA=xx.x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Equipment ID
N/A
17 bytes
Initialize Events
Pointer
IEP=
None
Software Image
IMG=
1 bytes, value of
1 or 2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Query only.
Unit returns information concerning the equipment identification, and the option field,
in the form aaaabcdefghijklmx where:
aaaa = defines the modem model number (565A = SLM-5650 in this case)
b = Advanced FEC: 0 = None, 1 = TPC, 2 = TPC + LDPC
c = Advanced FEC Data Rate: 0 = Base (5,000 kbps),
1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps, 3 = 51,840 kbps, 4 = 155,520 kbps,
5 = 2,500 kbps
d = Option Card: 0 = None, 1 = G.703, 2 = GigaBit Ethernet,
4 = Network Processor, 5 = LVDS
e = Data Rate (Asymmetric Tx) Option: 0 = Base (5,000 kbps),
1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps, 3 = 51,840 kbps,
4 = 155,520 kbps, 5 = 2,500 kbps
f = Higher-order modulation: 0 = None, 1 = 8PSK, 2 = 8PSK and 16QAM,
3 = 8PSK+16QAM and 16APSK/32APSK
g = Reed-Solomon Codec Option: 0 = None, 1 = Installed
h = Transec Module: 0 = None, 1 = FEC2 Card and Transec Module Installed,
2 = FEC2 Card Installed (No Transec)
i = AUPC Option: 0 = None, 1 = Installed
j = ASYNC Engineering Service Channel: 0 = None, 1 = Installed
k = Demod Only
l = CnC Data Rate: 0 = None, 1 = up to 512 kbps, 2 = up to 1 Mbps,
3 = up to 2.5 Mbps, 4 = up to 5 Mbps, 5 = up to 10 Mbps, 6 = up to 15 Mbps,
7 = up to 20 Mbps, 8 = up to 25 Mbps, 9 = up to 30 Mbps, A = up to 40 Mbps,
B = up to 51.840 Mbps, C = up to 70 Mbps
m = Sequential Encoding/Decoding Option: 0 = None, 1 = Installed
x = Asymmetric Rx Data Rate: 0 = None, 1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps,
3 = 51,840 kbps, 4 = 155,520 kbps, 5 = 2,500 kbps
Example: EID=565A0000000000000 indicates SLM-5650A with no options installed
Command only.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNE? queries to start at the beginning of the stored
events log.
Command or Query.
Next Reboot Image, where:
1 = Bulk Image #1
2 = Bulk Image #2
Example: IMG=1 (Image #1 will be active after next reboot)
C24
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A
EID?
EID=aaaabcdefghi
jklmx
(see Description
of Arguments)
IEP=
IEP#
N/A
N/A
IMG=
IMG?
IMG*
IMG#
IMG?
IMG=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
IP Address
IPA=
Initialize
Statistics
Pointer
ISP=
LoopBack Test
Modes
LOP=
Local/Remote
Status
LRS=
Modem
Reference
Clock
MRC=
Modem Alarm
Mask
MSK=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
18 bytes,
numerical
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the 10/100 BaseTx Ethernet
management port, in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy, where:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address, and
yy is the network prefix (0-31)
Example: 010.006.030.001.24
None
Command only.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNS? queries to start at the beginning of the stored
statistics log.
thru 2
Loopback Test Modes, where:
0=Normal Mode (no test)
1=IF Loopback
2=I/O Loopback #1
Example: LOP=1 (IF Loopback)
1 byte, value of
Command or Query.
0, 1, or 3
Local/Remote status, where:
0=Local
1=Serial Remote Control
3=Serial + Ethernet Remote Control
Example: LRS=1 (selects Serial Remote)
thru 3
Modem Reference Clock (for Frequency Accuracy), where:
0=Internal
1=External 1 MHz
2=External 5 MHz
3=External 10 MHz
6 bytes
Command or Query.
Alarm mask conditions, in the form abcdef, where:
a=spare ( must be set to 0 )
b=spare ( must be set to 0 )
c=spare ( must be set to 0 )
d=spare ( must be set to 0 )
e=Demod Faults (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked )
f=Eb/No Threshold Alarm (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked)
Example: MSK=000001
C25
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
IPA=
IPA?
IPA*
IPA#
IPA?
IPA=
xx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy
(see Description
of Arguments)
ISP=
ISP#
N/A
N/A
LOP=
LOP?
LOP*
LOP#
LOP?
LOP=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
LRS=
LRS?
LRS*
LRS#
LRS?
LRS=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
MRC=
MRC?
MRC*
MRC#
MRC?
MRC=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
MSK=
MSK?
MSK*
MSK#
MSK?
MSK=abcdef
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Live Unit Faults
N/A
8 bytes
Number of
Unread stored
Events
N/A
3 bytes
Query only.
Live Unit Faults are returned as a 32 bit Hexadecimal value. Bit values are defined
as follows:
80000000 = +5.0V Power
40000000 = +3.3V Power
20000000 = +2.5V Power
10000000 = +1.5V Power
08000000 = +12V Power
04000000 = -12V Power
02000000 = +18V Power
01000000 = Cooling Fan
00800000 = Ext Reference Activity
00400000 = 192 MHz Clock not locked
00200000 = 10 MHz Ref Clock not locked
00100000 = M&C FPGA not loaded
00080000 = Mod FPGA not loaded
00040000 = Demod FPGA not loaded
00020000 = Decoder FPGA not loaded
00010000 = Tx Interface FPGA not loaded
00008000 = Rx Interface FPGA not loaded
00004000 = FEC #1 FPGA not loaded
00002000 = FEC #2 FPGA not loaded
00001000 = Option Card FPGA not loaded
00000800 = FPGA DCM not locked
00000400 = NP Card Mailbox Comm Error
00000200 = FIPS Card Mailbox Comm Error
Example: LUF=00000000 indicates No Unit Faults
Query only.
Number of
Unread stored
Statistics
N/A
3 bytes
Unit returns the Number of stored Events, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
Note: This means unread over the remote control.
Example: NUE=126
Query only.
Unit returns the Number of stored Statistics, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
Example: NUS=126
C26
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A
LUF?
LUF=xxxxxxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
NUE?
NUE=xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
NUS?
NUS=xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
BERT Pattern
PAT=
Retrieve next 5
unread Stored
Events
N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A

thru 8
BERT Pattern, where:
0=2047
1=Mark
2=Space
3=1:1
4=1:2
5=2^15-1
6=2^20-1
7=2^23-1
8=MIL-188
Example: PAT=0 (2047 Pattern)
110 bytes
Query only.
Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Events which have not yet been read over the
remote control.
Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody, where Sub-body= Axxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmss, A being the fault type where:
1=Unit
2=Rx Traffic
3=Tx Traffic
4=Info
xxxxxxxx is the Fault Code number, as in LUF?, TXF?, RXF?, or Info Code,
which is:
00000000=Power Off
00000001=Power On
00000002=Log Cleared
00000004=Global Config Change
00000005=NP Card Watch Dog Timer
00000006=NP Card Boot Timeout
00000007=Transec Card Boot Timeout
If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded
with zeros.
If there are no new events, the response is RNE*.
C27
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
PAT=
PAT?
PAT*
PAT#
PAT?
PAT=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
RNE?
RNE={CR}Axxxxx
xxxddmmyyhhmm
ss{CR}Axxxxxxxx
ddmmyyhhmmss{
CR}Axxxxxxxxdd
mmyyhhmmss{CR
}Axxxxxxxxddmm
yyhhmmss{CR}Ax
xxxxxxxddmmyyh
hmmss
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Retrieve next 5
unread Stored
Statistics
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
105 bytes
Query only.
Response to
Command
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RNS?
Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Statistics which have not yet been read over the
remote control.
Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody, where Sub-body= AA.ABB.Bddmmyyhhmmss,
AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period. Loss is displayed if carrier was
lost during the sample period.
BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period. Loss is displayed if carrier was
lost during the entire sample period.
Serial Number
N/A
9 bytes
Statistics
Sample Interval
SSI=
1 byte
Software
Revision
N/A
43 bytes
RTC Time
TIM=
6 bytes
Temperature
N/A
3 bytes
with zeros.
If there are no new events, the response is RNS*.
Query only.
Used to query the unit 9-digit serial number. Unit returns its S/N in the form
xxxxxxxxx.
Example: SNO=176500143
Command or Query.
Used to set the sample interval for the Statistics Logging Function.
SSI=x, where x = 0 to 9 in 10 minute steps.
Note: Setting this parameter to 0 disables the statistics logging function.
Example: SSI=3 sets the logging inverval to 30 minutes
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the internal software revision installed in the unit, in the
form:
Boot:xx.yy.zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz Bulk2:xx.yy.zz
Example: SWR=Boot:01.01.01 Bulk1:01.01.01 Bulk2:01.01.01
Command or Query.
A time in the form hhmmss, indicating the time from midnight, where:
hh = hours (00 to 23)
mm = minutes (00 to 59)
ss = seconds (00 to 59)
Example: TIM=231259 (23 hours:12 minutes:59 seconds)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the internal temperature, in the form of xxx (degrees C).
Example: TMP=+26
C28
Response to Query
RNS={CR}AA.AB
B.Bddmmyyhhmm
ss{CR}AA.ABB.Bd
dmmyyhhmmss{C
R}AA.ABB.Bddm
myyhhmmss{CR}
AA.ABB.Bddmmy
yhhmmss{CR}AA.
ABB.Bddmmyyhh
mmss
(see Description
for Arguments)
N/A
SNO?
SNO=xxxxxxxxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
SSI=
SSI?
SSI*
SSI#
SSI?
SSI=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
SWR?
SWR=Boot:xx.yy.
zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz
Bulk2:xx.yy.zz
(see Description
of Arguments)
TIM=
TIM?
TIM*
TIM#
TIM?
TIM=hhmmss
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
TMP?
TMP=xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
C.6.5
Parameter
Type
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Bulk Configuration Commands / Queries

Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Configuration
Load
CLD=
1 byte
Configuration
Save
CST=
1 byte
Global
Configuration
MGC=
Command can
be 177 bytes or
217 bytes,
Query
Response is
always 217
bytes
Command only.
Causes the modem to retrieve a previously stored configuration
from Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte
argument (0 to 9).
Example: CLD=4 (retrieve modem configuration from location 4)
Command only.
Command causes the modem to store the current configuration in
Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte argument
(0 to 9).
Example: CST=4 (store the current configuration in location 4)
Command or Query.
Global Configuration of SLM-5650A, in the form:
abcdeeeeeefghijabbbbbbklmnoooooo.ooopppp.ppppqcrestuvwxyyy.y
zABCDEFGHHff.fffIJKLLLLLL.LLLMMMM.MMMMNgggPQRSTUVW
XYZZZZ.ZZZAAABCDDDDDDDDEE.EFGHIJKLMNNN.NOOO.OPP
P.PQQ.QR.RSTUVWXXYZZhhhijjjkllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll where:
a = Modem Operating Mode
same as MOM
b = Modem RF Band
same as RFB
c = Modem Interface Type
same as ITF
d = Modem Reference Clock
same as MRC
eeeeee = Modem Alarm Mask
same as MSK
f = Carrier Only Test Modes
same as COM
g = Loopback Test Modes
same as LOP
h = Tx BERT State
same as BTX
i = Rx BERT State
same as BRX
j = BERT Pattern
same as PAT
a = CnC Mode
same as CNM
bbbbb = CnC Mode
same as CSD
k = expansion byte
l = Tx FEC Type
same as TFT
m = Tx Modulation Type
same as TMD
n = Tx Code Rate
same as TCR
oooooo.ooo = Tx Data Rate
same as TDR
pppp.pppp = Tx Frequency
same as TFQ
q = Tx Overhead Type
same as TFM
c = NP Bridge Mode
same as GBM
r = expansion byte
e = NP Secure Mode
same as MIS
C29
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
CLD=
CLD?
CLD*
CLD#
N/A
N/A
CST=
CST?
CST*
CST#
N/A
N/A
MGC=
MGC?
MGC*
MGC#
MGC?
MGC=abcdeeeeeefghijab
bbbbbklmnoooooo.oooppp
p.ppppqcrestuvwxyyy.yzA
BCDEFGHHff.fffIJKLLLLL
L.LLLMMMM.MMMMNggg
PQRSTUVWXYZZZZ.ZZZ
AAABCDDDDDDDDEE.E
FGHIJKLMNNN.NOOO.O
PPP.PQQ.QR.RSTUVWX
XYZZhhhijjjkllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
llll
(see Description of
Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
s = Tx Reed-Solomon state
t = Tx Reed-Solomon code word
u = Tx Reed-Solomon interleaver depth
v = Tx Spectrum Invert
w = Tx Scrambler
x = Tx Differential Encoder
yyy.y = Tx Power Level
z = Tx Clock Source
A = Tx SCT Reference
B = Tx Clock Invert
C = Tx Data Invert
D = Tx Data Fault
E = Tx BPSK Data Ordering
F = Tx Carrier State
HH = expansion bytes
ff.fff = CnC Freq Offset Range
I = Rx FEC Type
J = Rx Modulation Type
K = Rx Code Rate
LLLLLL.LLL = Rx Data Rate
MMMM.MMMM = Rx Frequency
N = Rx Overhead Type
ggg = CnC Re-acq Time
P = Rx Reed-Solomon state
Q = Rx Reed-Solomon code word
R = Rx Reed-Solomon interleaver depth
S = Rx Spectrum Invert
T = Rx Descrambler
U = Rx Differential Decoder
V = Rx Clock Invert
W = Rx Data Invert
X = Rx Data Fault
Y = Rx BPSK Data Ordering
ZZZZ.ZZZ = Rx Demod Acq Sweep Range
AAA = Rx Reacquisition Time
B = Rx Clock Source
C = Rx Buffer Programming Mode
DDDDDDDD = Rx Buffer Size
EE.E = Eb/No Alarm Point
F = Statistics Sample Interval
GGGGGG = expansion bytes
M = AUPC Local Enable
NNN.N = AUPC Nominal Power Level
C30
same as TRS
same as TCW
same as TRD
same as TSI
same as TSC
same as TDE
same as TPL
same as TCK
same as SCT
same as TCI
same as TDI
same as TDF
same as TBO
same as TXO
same as CCF
same as RFT
same as RMD
same as RCR
same as RDR
same as RFQ
same as RFM
same as CRA
same as RRS
same as RCW
same as RRD
same as RSI
same as RDS
same as RDD
same as RCI
same as RDI
same as RDF
same as RBO
same as RSW
same as REA
same as RCK
same as RBM
same as RBS
same as EBA
same as SSI
same as LPC
same as ANP
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
OOO.O = AUPC Maximum Power Level
PPP.P = AUPC Minimum Power Level
QQ.Q = AUPC Eb/No Target Level
R.R = AUPC Max Tracking Rate
S = AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action
T = AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action
U = AUPC Log Sample Interval
V = AUPC ESC Type
W = AUPC ESC Tx Baud Rate
XX = AUPC ESC Tx Format
Y = AUPC ESC Rx Baud Rate
ZZ = AUPC ESC Rx Format
hhh = Tx Spread Factor
i = Tx Spread Equation
jjj= Rx Spread Factor
k = Rx Spread Equation
llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll = expansion bytes
Fill unused expansion bytes with x
C31
same as AMX
same as AMN
same as AET
same as AMT
same as LCL
same as RCL
same as ASI
same as ACT
same as ATB
same as ATF
same as ARB
same as ARF
same as TSF
same as TSE
same as RSF
same as RSE
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query

Appendix C
C.6.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem type has been set to AUPC.
Note: Always wait three (3) seconds between consecutive remote modem command/query polls. If Local AUPC is not enabled, queries will return
the last known condition. A request for status from the remote modem will then be transmitted, ensuring that the next query will return current status.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
ASYNC ESC
Type
ACT=
1 byte
Command or Query.
4 bytes
ASYNC ESC Type, where:

0=RS-232
1=RS-485 2-Wire
2=RS-485 4-Wire
Example: ACT=0 (sets the ASYNC ESC to RS-232)
Command or Query.
AUPC Eb/N0
Target Set Point
AET=
AUPC Minimum
Power Level
AMN=
5 bytes
AUPC
Maximum
Tracking Rate
AMT=
3 bytes
AUPC
Maximum
Power Level
AMX=
5 bytes
AUPC Eb/N0 Target, where:

xx.x = AUPC Eb/N0 Target, 3.2 to 16.0 dB.
Example: AET=13.4
Command or Query.
Minimum Tx Output power level, where:
s=sign ( + / )
Example: AMN = 13.4
Command or Query.
AUPC Maximum Tracking Rate, where:
x.x = Maximum Tracking Rate, 0.5 to 6.0 dBm/minute in increments of .5.
Example: AMT=0.5
Command or Query.
AUPC Nominal
Power Level
ANP=
5 bytes
Maximum Tx Output power level, where:

s=sign ( + / - )
Example: AMX=-13.4
Command or Query.
Nominal Tx Output power level, where:
s=sign ( + / - )
Example: ANP=-13.4
C32
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
ACT=
ACT?
ACT*
ACT#
ACT?
ACT=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
AET=
AET?
AET*
AET#
AET?
AET=xx.x
(see Description
of Arguments)
AMN=
AMN?
AMN*
AMN#
AMN?
AMN=sxx.x
(see Description
of Arguments)
AMT=
AMT?
AMT*
AMT#
AMT?
AMT=x.x
(see Description
of Arguments)
AMX=
AMX?
AMX*
AMX#
AMX?
AMX=sxx.x
(see Description
of Arguments)
ANP=
ANP?
ANP*
ANP#
ANP?
ANP=sxx.x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
ASYNC ESC
Rx Baud Rate
ARB=
1 byte
ASYNC ESC
Rx Format
ARF=
2 bytes
AUPC Log
Sample Interval
ASI=
1 byte
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Command or Query.
Baud Rate, where:
0=110
1=150
2=300
3=600
4=1200
5=2400
6=4800
7=9600
8=19200
9=38400
Example: ARB=0 (sets the ASYNC ESC Rx Baud Rate to 110 Baud)
Command or Query.
Async Format, where:
00=7 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
01=7 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
02=7 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
03=7 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
04=7 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
05=7 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
Example: ARF=0 (sets the ASYNC ESC Rx Format to 7N1)
Command or Query.
Used to set the sample interval for the AUPC Logging Function in the form x, where:
x = 0 to 9 in 10 minute steps.
Note: Setting this parameter to 0 disables the logging function.
Example: ASI=3 (sets the logging inverval to 30 minutes)
C33
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
ARB=
ARB?
ARB*
ARB#
ARB?
ARB=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
ARF=
ARF?
ARF*
ARF#
ARF?
ARF=xx
(see Description
of Arguments)
ASI=
ASI?
ASI*
ASI#
ASI?
ASI=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
ASYNC ESC Tx
Baud Rate
ATB=
1 byte
ASYNC ESC Tx
Format
ATF=
2 bytes
Clear All AUPC

Log Entries
CAA=
None
Initialize AUPC
Log Pointer
IAP=
None
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Command or Query.
Baud Rate, where:
0=110
1=150
2=300
3=600
4=1200
5=2400
6=4800
7=9600
8=19200
9=38400
Example: ATB=0 (sets the ASYNC ESC Tx Baud Rate to 110 Baud)
Command or Query.
Async Format, where:
Example: ATF=00 (sets the ASYNC ESC Tx Format to 7N1)
Command only.
Forces the software to clear the software AUPC log.
Note: This command takes no arguments.
Example: AAS=
Command only.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNA? queries to start at the beginning of the stored
statistics log.
C34
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
ATB=
ATB?
ATB*
ATB#
ATB?
ATB=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
ATF=
ATF?
ATF*
ATF#
ATF?
ATF=xx
(see Description
of Arguments)
CAA=
CAA?
CAA*
CAA#
N/A
N/A
IAP=
IAP#
N/A
N/A

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
AUPC Local
Carrier Loss
Action
LCL=
1 byte, values
of 0 thru 2
AUPC Local
Enable
LPC=
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
Number of
Unread AUPC
Log Entries
N/A
3 bytes
Retrieve next 5
unread AUPC
Log Entries
N/A
155 bytes
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Command or Query.
Tx Output Power level setting when local carrier is lost, where:
0=Hold current output power level
1=Goto Nominal output power level
2=Goto Maximum output power level
Example: LCL=0
Command or Query.
Local AUPC Control, where:
0=Off
1=On
Note: When Local AUPC Control is enabled, modulator output power is
automatically controlled by the modem. Power output commands via TPL are not
allowed during this mode; although, queries will function as normal.
Example: LPC=1 (Turn on Local AUPC Control)
Query only.
Unit returns the Number of AUPC Log Entries, which remain Unread, in the form
xxx.
Example: NUS=126
Query only.
Unit returns the oldest 5 AUPC Log Entries which have not yet been read over the
remote control.
Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR} Sub-body{CR}Subbody, where Sub-body= AA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.Eddmmyyhhmmss:
AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period.
BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period.
CCC.C = Max Output Power during sample period.
EEE.E = Average Output Power during sample period.
with zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNA*.
C35
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
LCL=
LCL?
LCL*
LCL#
LCL?
LCL=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
LPC=
LPC?
LPC*
LPC#
LPC?
LPC=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
NUA?
NUA=xxx
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
RNA?
RNA=
{CR}AA.ABB.BCC
C.CEEE.Eddmmy
yhhmmss{CR}AA.
ABB.BCCC.CEEE
.Eddmmyyhhmms
s{CR}AA.ABB.BC
CC.CEEE.Eddm
myyhhmmss{CR}
AA.ABB.BCCC.C
EEE.Eddmmyyhh
mmss{CR}AA.AB
B.BCCC.CEEE.E
ddmmyyhhmmss
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
AUPC Remote
Carrier Loss
Action
RCL=
1 byte, values
of 0 thru 2
Remote Modem
Pattern
Substitution
RPB=
1 byte, values
of 0 or 1
Remote Modem
AUPC Enable
RPC=
1 byte, values
of 0 or 1
Remote Modem
BERT BER
N/A
6 bytes
Remote Modem
I/O Loopback
RPL=
1 byte, values
of 0 or 1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Command or Query.
Tx Output Power level setting when remote carrier is lost, where:
0=Hold current output power level
1=Goto Nominal output power level
2=Goto Maximum output power level
Example: RCL=0
Command or Query.
Remote Modem Tx Pattern Substitution, where:
0=Off
1=On
Note: For compatibility reasons, only the 2047 Tx pattern can be turned On or Off at
the remote modem.
Example: RPB=1 (Turn on remote modem AUPC Control)
Command or Query.
Remote Modem AUPC Control, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: RPC=1 (Turn on remote modem AUPC Control)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the remote modems BERT BER in the form a.b x 10-c . First
three bytes are the value. Last two bytes are the exponent. Returns 0.0E00 if the
BERT is not synchronized to a pattern.
Example: RPE=4.0E06
Command or Query.
Remote Modem I/O Loopback Mode, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: RPL=1 (Turn on remote modem AUPC Control)
C36
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
RCL=
RCL?
RCL*
RCL#
RCL?
RCL=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RPB=
RPB?
RPB*
RPB#
RPB?
RPB=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RPC=
RPC?
RPC*
RPC#
RPC?
RPC=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
RPE?
RPE=a.bEcc
(see Description
of Arguments)
RPL=
RPL?
RPL*
RPL#
RPL?
RPL=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
C.6.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
G.703 Interface Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional G.703 interface module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Receive E1
Framing
E1F=
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
Receive E2
Framing
E2F=
1 byte, value of
0, 1, 2, or 4
External Buffer
Clock
Reference
ERF=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 3
Rx Ternary
Code
RTC=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 3
Command or Query.
Receive T1 Framing, where:
0=None
1=G.704
Example: E1F=0
Command or Query.
Receive E2 Framing, where:
0=None
1=G.704
2=G.742
4=G.745
Example: E2F=0
Command or Query.
External Buffer Clock Reference, where:
0=External Clock equals Rx Data Rate
1=5 MHz External Clock
Example: ERF=0
Command or Query.
Rx Ternary Code, where:
0=AMI
1=B8ZS
2=B6ZS
3=HDB3
Example: RTC=3 (Set Rx Ternary Code to HDB3)
C37
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
E1F=
E1F?
E1F*
E1F#
E1F?
E1F=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
E2F=
E2F?
E2F*
E2F#
E2F?
E2F=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
ERF=
ERF?
ERF*
ERF#
ERF?
ERF=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
RTC=
RTC?
RTC*
RTC#
RTC?
RTC=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Receive T1
Framing
T1F=
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
Receive T2
Framing
T2F=
1 byte, value of
0, 1, 3, or 5
Tx Ternary
Code
TTC=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Command or Query.
0=None
1=G.704
Example: T1F=0
Command or Query.
0=None
1=G.704
3=G.743
5=G.747
Example: T2F=0
Command or Query.
Tx Ternary Code, where:
0=AMI
1=B8ZS
2=B6ZS
3=HDB3
Example: TTC=3 (Set Tx Ternary Code to HDB3)
C38
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
T1F=
T1F?
T1F*
T1F#
T1F?
T1F=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
T2F=
T2F?
T2F*
T2F#
T2F?
T2F=x
(see Description
of Arguments)
TTC=
TTC?
TTC*
TTC#
TTC?
TTC=x
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
C.6.8
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet Interface Module is installed in the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter
Type
GigaBit
Ethernet
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Range
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
GIP=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
18 bytes
Command or Query.
Response to
Command
N/A
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the GigaBit Ethernet Interface
Management port, in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP address, and
ee = network prefix (0-31)
Example: 010.006.030.001.24
C39
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
GIP?
Response to Query
GIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.
ddd.ee
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
C.6.9
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite
Modem.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Router Ethernet
Interface Traffic
IP Address and
Range
BRT=
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
Router Working
Mode
GBM=
Router Ethernet
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Range
MIP=
18 bytes
Modem IP
Interface
Security Mode
MIS=
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
Router IP
Address Mode
RIM=
1 byte
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
Command or Query.
Used to set the NP cards Bridged Point to Multipoint mode, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
Example: BRT=0
Command or Query.
Used to set the NP Cards Working Mode where:
1 = Vipersat Hub
2 = Vipersat Hub Expansion
3 = Vipersat Remote
4 = Vipersat Remote Expansion
5 = Multipoint Hub
6 = Multipoint Remote
7 = Point to Point
8 = GigaBit Bridge
Example: GBM=7
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the
NP Interface Management port, in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:
Example: MIP=010.006.030.001.24
Command or Query.
Used to set the modem IP Interface security level where:
0 = Normal or Low Level Security, and
1 = High Level Security
Example: MIS=0
Command or Query.
Used to set the NP Cards IP address mode where:
0 = Single IP Address, and
1 = Dual IP Address
Example: RIM=0
C40
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
BRT=
BRT?
BRT*
BRT#
BRT?
BRT=a
(see Description
of Arguments)
GBM=
GBM?
GBM*
GBM#
GBM?
GBM=a
(see Description
of Arguments)
MIP=
MIP?
MIP*
MIP#
MIP?
MIP=aaa.bbb.ccc
.ddd.ee
(see Description
of Arguments)
MIS=
MIS?
MIS*
MIS#
MIS?
MIS=a
(see Description
of Arguments)
RIM=
RIM?
RIM*
RIM#
RIM?
RIM=a
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Router Ethernet
Interface Traffic
IP Address and
Range
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RI7P=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
18 bytes
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the
NP Interface Traffic port, in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:
Example: RIP=010.006.030.001.24
C41
Response to
Command
RIP=
RIP?
RIP*
RIP#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RIP?
Response to Query
RIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.
ddd.ee
(see Description
of Arguments)

Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.10 TRANSEC Interface Commands / Queries

The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional TRANSEC Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Transec
Ethernet
Interface
Gateway IP
Address
SMG=
15 bytes
Transec
Ethernet
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Range
SMI=
18 bytes
Command or Query.
Used to set the Gateway IP address for the Transec Management port in the form
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP address
Example: 010.006.030.001
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the Transec Management port in
the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:
Example: 010.006.030.001.24
C42
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A
SMG?
SMG=aaa.bbb.cc
c.ddd
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
SMI?
SMI=aaa.bbb.ccc
.ddd.ee
(see Description
of Arguments)
Appendix D. MODEM OPTIONS

D.1
Forward Error Correction Options

As standard, the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is equipped with three Forward Error Correction
(FEC) encoders/decoders: Viterbi, concatenated Reed-Solomon, and Trellis (available with the
8PSK FAST option). The constraint lengths and encoding polynomials are not only Open
Network compatible, but are also Closed Network compatible with the vast majority of existing
modems from other manufacturers. The SLM-5650A also provides the capability to disable all
FEC, allowing the modem to run uncoded.
Turbo Coding represents a very significant development in the area of FEC and, optionally, the
SLM-5650A may be fitted with Turbo Product Coding (TPC) and Low-Density Parity Check
(LDPC) coding.
There are six speed grades of these Advanced FECs; the data rate limits are as follows:
Low Rate
64 kbps to 2.5 Mbps

64 kbps to 5 Mbps
64 kbps to 10 Mbps
64 kbps to 20 Mbps
High Rate
64 kbps to 51.84 Mbps

64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps (TPC only)
D1

Appendix D
D.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Viterbi
The combination of convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding has become an almost universal
standard for satellite communications. The SLM-5650A complies with the Intelsat IESS 308 and
309 standards for Viterbi decoding, and has a short constraint length defined as the number of
output symbols from the encoder that are affected by a single input bit fixed at seven for all
code rates.
This constraint length of seven is a de facto standard, which facilitates the SLM-5650As interoperability with other manufacturers equipment. It provides very useful levels of coding gain,
and its short decoding delay and error-burst characteristics make it particularly suitable for low
data rate coded voice applications.
A major advantage of the Viterbi decoding method is that the performance is independent of data
rate, and does not display a pronounced threshold effect (i.e., does not fail rapidly below a certain
value of Eb/No). Note that in BPSK mode, the SLM-5650A permits code rates of 1/2, 3/4, and
7/8.
By choosing various coding rates (Rate 1/2, 3/4 or 7/8) the user can trade off coding gain for
bandwidth expansion:
Rate 1/2 coding gives the best improvement in error rate, but doubles the transmitted data rate,
and hence doubles the occupied bandwidth of the signal.
Rate 7/8 coding, at the other extreme, provides the most modest improvement in performance, but
only expands the transmitted bandwidth by 14 %.
Because the method of convolutional coding used with Viterbi, the encoder does not preserve the
original data intact, and is called non-systematic.
Table D-1. Viterbi Decoding Summary
FOR
AGAINST
Good BER performance - very useful coding gain.

Almost universally used, with de facto standards for
constraint length and coding polynomials
Shortest decoding delay (~100 bits) of any FEC
scheme - good for coded voice, VOIP, etc
Short constraint length produce small error bursts;
good for coded voice.
No pronounced threshold effect - fails gracefully.
Coding gain independent of data rate.
D2
Higher coding gain possible with other methods

Appendix D
D.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Reed-Solomon Outer Codec

The concatenation of an outer Reed-Solomon (R-S) Codec with a Viterbi decoder first became
popular in the early 1990s as a means to permit significant improvements in error performance
without significant bandwidth expansion.
The coding overhead added by the R-S outer Codec is typically around 10%, which translates to a
0.4 dB power penalty for a given link. Reed-Solomon codes are block codes (as opposed to
Viterbi and Sequential, which are convolutional) and, in order to be processed correctly, the data
must be framed and de-framed. Additionally, R-S codes are limited in how well they can correct
errors that occur in bursts. This, unfortunately, is the nature of the uncorrected errors from Viterbi
decoders, which produce clusters of errors that are multiples of half the constraint length. For this
reason, the data must be interleaved following R-S encoding, and then de-interleaved prior to
decoding. This ensures that a single burst of errors leaving the Viterbi decoder is spread out over
a number of interleaving frames, so errors entering the R-S decoder do not exceed its capacity to
correct those errors.
D3

Appendix D
D.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Closed Network Modes

A 225,205 or 220,200 code is used in closed network mode. For a rate of 225,205 data is put into
blocks of 225 bytes, of which 205 bytes are data, and 20 bytes are FEC overhead. The code was
chosen because it is compatible with legacy Comtech EF Data modems.
For closed network Viterbi Reed Solomon, an interleaver depth of four or eight is used. The
increase in coding gain is at the expense of delay. The interleaving/de-interleaving delay and the
delay through the decoder itself can be as high as 25 kbps. At low data rates, this equates to an
appreciable part of a second, when combined with the round trip delay makes it highly unsuitable
for voice applications. Additionally, the de-interleaver frame synchronization method can add
significantly to the time taken for the demodulator to declare acquisition.
Table D-2. Open Network Modes
Code Rate
Mode
225, 205
219, 201
208, 192
194, 178
126, 112
IESS-308
219, 201
IESS-309 IBS, VSAT-IBS and Extended
219, 201
IESS-310
A characteristic of concatenated R-S coding is the very pronounced threshold effect. For any
given modem design, there will be a threshold value of Eb/No below which the demodulator
cannot stay synchronized. This may be due to the carrier-recovery circuits, or the synchronization
threshold of the primary FEC device, or both. In the SLM-5650A, and Rate 1/2 operation, this
threshold is around 4 dB Eb/No. Below this value, operation is not possible, but above this value,
the error performance of the concatenated R-S system produces exceptionally low error rates for a
very small increase in Eb/No.
Do not operate the demodulator near its sync threshold. Small fluctuations in
Eb/No can cause total loss of the link, and the demodulator must then reacquire the signal.
Table D-3. Concatenated RS Coding Summary

FOR
AGAINST
Exceptionally good BER performance - several

orders of magnitude improvement in link BER
under given link conditions.
Very small additional bandwidth expansion
Interoperable with legacy Intelsat networks
D4
Very pronounced threshold effect - does not fail

gracefully in poor Eb/No conditions. Additional
coding overhead actually degrades sync threshold,
and reduces link fade margin.
Significant processing delay (~25 kbps) - not good
for voice, or IP applications
Adds to demod acquisition time.

Appendix D
D.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Trellis Coding (FAST Option)

In the other FEC methods described here, the processes of coding and modulation are
independent - the FEC codec has no knowledge of, or interaction with, the modulator. However,
there are schemes in which the coding and modulation are combined together, where the encoder
places FEC symbols in a precise manner into the signal constellation. This can yield an overall
improvement in performance, and is used in higher-order modulation schemes such as 8PSK,
16PSK, 16QAM, etc.
When convolution coding is used, the overall coded modulation approach is referred to as Trellis
Coded Modulation (TCM). Ungerboeck was an early pioneer, and developed optimum mapping
and decoding schemes. However, the decoding scheme was seen as complex, and expensive, and
Qualcomm Inc. developed a variation on the theme, which uses a Viterbi decoder at the core,
surrounded by adjunct processing. The scheme is able to achieve performance very close to the
optimum Ungerboeck method, but with far less complexity, and is called pragmatic Trellis Coded
Modulation.
Intelsat recognized that, as more and more high-power transponders are put in to service, the
transponders are no longer power limited, but bandwidth limited. In order to maximize
transponder capacity, they looked at 8PSK as a method of reducing the occupied bandwidth of a
carrier, and adopted Qualcomms pragmatic TCM, at Rate 2/3.
A Rate 2/3 8PSK/TCM carrier occupies only 50% of the bandwidth of a Rate 1/2 QPSK carrier.
However, the overall coding gain of the scheme is not adequate by itself, and so Intelsats IESS310 specification requires that the scheme be concatenated with an outer RS codec. When
combined, there is a threshold value of Eb/No of around 6 dB, and above approximately 7 dB, the
bit error rate is better than 1 x 10-8.
The detractions of the concatenated RS approach apply here also, along with more stringent
requirements for phase noise and group delay distortion the natural consequences of the higherorder modulation.
The SLM-5650A fully implements the IESS-310 specification at data rates up to 51.84 Mbps. In
accordance with the specification, the R-S outer code cannot be disabled.
Table D-4. 8PSK/TCM Coding Summary
FOR
Exceptionally bandwidth efficient compared to
QPSK
Interoperable with legacy Intelsat networks
D5
AGAINST
Needs concatenated RS outer codec to give
acceptable coding gain performance
Demodulator acquisition threshold much higher
than for QPSK
8PSK is more sensitive to phase noise and group
delay distortion than QPSK

Appendix D
D.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Turbo Product Codec (FAST Option)

Turbo coding is an FEC technique developed within the last few years, which delivers significant
performance improvements compared to more traditional techniques. Two general classes of
Turbo Codes have been developed, Turbo Convolutional Codes (TCC), and Turbo Product
Codes (TPC), a block coding technique that is a 2- or 3-dimensional array of block codes.
Comtech EF Data has chosen to implement an FEC codec based on TPC. Encoding is relatively
straightforward, but decoding is a very complex process requiring multiple iterations of
processing for maximum performance to be achieved.
Unlike the popular method of concatenating an R-S codec with a primary FEC codec, TPC is an
entirely standalone method. It does not require the complex interleaving/de-interleaving of the RS approach, and consequently, decoding delays are significantly reduced. Furthermore, the
traditional concatenated R-S schemes exhibit a very pronounced threshold effect a small
reduction in Eb/No can result in total loss of demod and decoder synchronization. TPC does not
suffer from this problem the demodulator and decoder remain synchronized down to the point
where the output error rate becomes unusable. This is considered to be a particularly
advantageous characteristic in a fading environment. Typically, in QPSK, 8PSK and 16QAM
TPC modes the demod and decoder can remain synchronized 2-3dB below the Viterbi/ReedSolomon or TCM cases.
Table D-5. Available TPC Modes
TPC Code Rate/Modulation
Data Rate Range
Rate 5/16 BPSK
64 kbps to 20 Mbps
Rate 21/44 BPSK
Rate 21/44 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 3/4 8PSK
256 kbps to 144 Mbps
Rate 3/4 16QAM
64 kbps to 112 Mbps
Rate 7/8 8-PSK
Rate 7/8 16QAM
64 kbps to 120.888888 Mbps
Rate 17/18 8PSK
D6

Appendix D
D.7
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Sequential (FAST Option)

Although the method of convolutional coding and Sequential decoding appears to be very similar
to the Viterbi method, there are some fundamental differences. To begin with, the convolutional
encoder is said to be systematic it does not alter the input data, and the FEC overhead bits are
simply appended to the data. Furthermore, the constraint length, k, is much longer (Rate 1/2,
k=36. Rate 3/4, k= 63. Rate 7/8, k=87). This means that when the decoding process fails (i.e.,
when its capacity to correct errors is exceeded) it produces a burst of errors which is in multiples
of half the constraint length.
An error distribution is produced which is markedly different to that of a Viterbi decoder. This
gives rise to a pronounced threshold effect. A Sequential decoder does not fail gracefully a
reduction in Eb/No of just a few tenths of a dB can make the difference between acceptable BER
and a complete loss of synchronization.
The decoding algorithm itself (called the Fano algorithm) uses significantly more path memory
(4 kbps in this case) than the equivalent Viterbi decoder, giving rise to increased latency.
Furthermore, a fixed computational clock is used to process input symbols, and to search
backwards and forwards in time to determine the correct decoding path. At lower data rates, there
are a sufficient number of computational cycles per input symbol to permit the decoding process
to perform optimally. However, as the data rate increases, there are fewer cycles available,
leading to a reduction in coding gain. For data rates above ~1 Mbps, Viterbi should be considered
the better alternative. The practical upper limit at this time is 2.048 Mbps.
Table D-6. Sequential Decoding Summary
FOR
AGAINST
Higher coding gain (1-2 dB) at lower data rates,

compared to Viterbi.
Pronounced threshold effect - does not fail

gracefully in poor Eb/No conditions.
Higher processing delay than Viterbi
(~4 k bits) not good for low-rate coded voice.
Upper data rate limit approximately 2Mbps
Coding gain varies with data rate - favors lower
data rates.
D7

Appendix D
D.8
D.8.1
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding

Introduction
In the past few years there has been an unprecedented resurgence in interest in FEC technology.
The start of this new interest has its origins in the work done by Claude Berrou et al, and the 1993
landmark paper, Near Shannon Limit Error Correcting Coding and Decoding Turbo Codes.
FEC is considered an essential component in all wireless and satellite communications in order to
reduce the power and bandwidth requirements for reliable data transmission.
Claude Shannon, considered by many to be the father of modern communications theory, first
established the concept of Channel Capacity in his 1948 paper A Mathematical Theory of
Communication. This places an absolute limit on how fast it is possible to transmit error-free data
within a channel of a given bandwidth, and with given noise conditions within that channel. He
concluded that it would only be possible to approach this limit through the use of source encoding
what is familiar today as Forward Error Correction.
Shannon postulated that if it were possible to store every possible message in the receiver, finding
the stored message that most closely matched the incoming message would yield an optimum
decoding method. However, for all but the shortest bit sequences, the memory required for this,
and the time taken to perform the comparisons, makes this approach impractical. For all practical
purposes, the memory requirement and the decoding latency become infinite.
For many years, there were few advances in the quest to approach the Shannon Limit. The Viterbi
algorithm heralded a major step forward, followed in the early 1990s by the concatenation of a
Viterbi decoder with Reed-Solomon hard-decision block codes. It remained clear, however, that
the Shannon Limit was still an elusive target.
Berrous work on Turbo Codes showed, through the use of an ingeniously simple approach
(multiple, or iterative decoding passes) that it is possible to achieve performance close to the
Shannon Limit. Berrous early work dealt exclusively with iteratively-decoded convolutional
codes (i.e., TCC), but in time the iterative approach was applied to TPC. TPC exhibits inherently
low decoding latency compared with TCC, and so is considered much more desirable for twoway, interactive satellite communications applications.
In August 1999, Comtech became the first company in the world to offer satellite modems that
incorporate TPC. Since its inception, Comtech has continued to develop and refine its
implementation of TPC in its products, and now offers a comprehensive range of code rates (from
Rate 5/16 to Rate 0.95) and modulations (from BPSK to 16QAM). However, in the past few
years, as part of the general interest in Turbo coding, a third class of Turbo coding has emerged:
Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) Codes.
LDPC is more like TPC than TCC in that it is an iteratively-decoded block code. Gallager first
suggested this in 1962 but, at the time, the implementation complexity was considered to be too
great; for decades, it remained of purely academic interest. Further interest in LDPC was
stimulated in 2003, when the Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) committee adopted LDPC codes
(proposed by Hughes Network Systems) as the basis for the new DVB-S2 standard. Now,
however, with silicon gates being cheap, plentiful and fast, an LDPC decoder can easily be
accommodated in a large Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) device.
The LDPC method on its own produces an undesirable flaring in the Bit Error Rate (BER) vs.
Eb/No characteristic, and for this reason it is desirable to concatenate a short BCH code with
D8

Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
LDPC. This concatenation produces almost vertical BER vs. Eb/No curves, as can be seen in the
performance graphs that are presented later. In order to take full advantage of the coding gain
increase that LDPC provides, it became necessary to find an alternative to 8PSK. Comtech EF
Data has therefore developed an 8QAM approach that permits acquisition and tracking at much
lower values of Eb/No than 8PSK. Comtechs implementation of 8QAM is the subject of a U.S.
Patent, granted in 2007.
D.8.2
LDPC versus TPC

Is LDPC better than TPC? The answer must be sometimes, but not always, and there are issues
such as latency that must be taken into consideration. Error free transmission is not possible for
values of spectral efficiency (capacity) vs. Eb/No above these limit curves. The horizontal
distance to the limit provides a metric of overall performance.
Figure D-1 graphs the performance of various TPC and LDPC modes relative to the Shannon
Limit the Channel Capacity is shown for both QPSK and 8PSK. It can be seen from this graph
that, for Code Rates above 3/4, Comtechs TPCs are very close (1-1.5 dB) to the Shannon Limit.
However, at 3/4 and below, LDPCs are performing 0.7-1.2 dB better than TPCs. It is clear that, in
order to provide the best possible performance over the range of code rates from 1/2 to 0.95, both
an LDPC and a TPC codec need to be offered.
Figure D-1. TPC & LDPC Modes Performance (Relative to Shannon Limit)
In order to provide a robust set of LDPC codes with varying degrees of latency, the SLM-5650A
has implemented three different block sizes:
The Ultra Low Latency (ULL) code provides the lowest latency, but worst performance of the
three block sizes. This code is available in the data rate range from 32 kbps to 2 Mbps and is
compatible with the CDM-625 ULL code.
The Low Latency (LL) code provides modest latency and performance over the data rate range
of 32 kbps to 5 Mbps.
D9

Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The High Performance (HP) code provides the best performance but worst latency. This code is
available from 32 kbps up to 46 Mbps depending on MODCOD. The HP code is compatible with
the CDM-625 LDPC code.
See Appendix B. OPERATIONS REFERENCE for more details on the data rate and symbol
rate ranges supported in each code.
D.9
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS)

As On-The-Move systems with very small dishes (e.g., VSATs) become more popular, there is an
increased interest in Spectrum Spreading. To meet this need, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
(DSSS) is optionally available in the SLM-5650A.
DSSS works by modulating the normal carrier with a pseudo-random PN sequence (chips) at a
much higher chip rate. The chip rate is determined by the carriers symbol rate and a multiplying
(spreading) factor.
The SLM-5650A offers spreading in the following LDPC MODCODs:
ULL
BPSK
1/2
LL
BPSK
.382
LL
BPSK
.456
LL
BPSK
.547
HP
BPSK
1/2
The Spreading Factors currently supported are 1(Spreading Off), 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, and 128 up to
a maximum chip rate of 23 Mcps. The user can select between four built-in pseudo-random PN
sequences so that multiple spread carriers can occupy the same bandwidth in a Code-Division
Multiple Access (CDMA) fashion.
When using large spreading factors, the SLM-5650A also exhibits a large tolerance to jamming
up to 24 dB and a Low Probability of Detection/Interception. With DSSS enabled, the lower
data rate limit has been reduced to 8 kbps. The SLM-5650A Base Modem Web Server Interface
provides a Web page to facilitate anti-jamming applications. This page allows the user to
configure the modem parameters so that a fixed occupied bandwidth can be maintained.
Lastly, there is no loss in performance with spreading enabled.
D.10 Extended Temperature Option

Extended temperature range is -32 to 50 C. When operating from -32 to 0 C, Tx power
accuracy is +/- 1.5 dB.
A heater is installed on the bottom of the chassis. This 300-Watt heater operates at 120 or
240V AC.
When temperatures are below 0 C, allow a 10-minute warm up period upon power-up before the
modem boots. To ensure performance specifications, allow an additional 15 minutes, for a total of
25 minutes of recommended warm-up time.
D10
Appendix E. VIPERSAT
NETWORK APPLICATION
EXAMPLES
E.1
Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modems optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module (also
referred to as the NP Interface or the card), when installed and operating in Router Mode
OSPFv2 or BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode, makes point-to-multipoint topologies
possible. This appendix provides the following Vipersat Network Application Examples:
E.2
OSPFv2
BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
OSPFv2 in a Shared Outbound Satellite Network

This section examines the challenges and solutions for using the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) in a shared outbound/split path satellite network such as
Vipersat.
E.2.1
Shared Outbound Satellite Network Overview

A shared outbound network saves satellite bandwidth and reduces operating expenses by allowing
multiple remote terminals to share the same channel from a hub ground station.
Figure E-1 illustrates a satellite shared outbound network. Notably, the outbound interface at the
hub is not the same interface at which return traffic received. This is referred to as split path.
E1

Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure E-1. Satellite Shared Outbound Network
E.2.2
OSPF Basics
Certain critical features of the OSPF protocol that impact a shared outbound satellite network are
as follows:
OSPF requires that the communication channel between the interfaces that connect any
two given OSPF nodes must have ability to pass traffic bidirectionally.
A router running the OSPF algorithm will send out Hello packets on each interface,
when the response from a node on the same subnet as the interface is received, OSPF
will create a the neighbor adjacency with that node.
In this way, the subnets and segments of the OSPF network are discovered, mapped and
an OSPF database is created. This database is used by all OSPF routers to determine open
shortest paths to all remote networks. OSPF nodes that do not follow these rules will not
be added to a router's neighbor adjacency database.
E.2.3
OSPF Challenges
Use of a split path violates the requirement whereby OSPF messaging is sent and received on the
same interface. Therefore, the hub modems will not achieve neighbor adjacency with any of the
remote routers. This means that running OSPF on the hub routers will not add any value.
In the example diagram, the SLM-5650A NP Router is essentially a two-port router, thereby
requiring that another OSPF node must always be in place downstream at the remote.
However, if this downstream router is running OSPF, could the high costs associated with a
satellite link be managed and reduced by specifically configuring the router interface? Such a
configuration would allow the overall OSPF network to control whether traffic should pass to the
E2

Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
satellite link, or to a lower-cost link, such a terrestrial fiber, based upon availability. The
possibility of such a solution is examined in the following use case.
E.2.4
OSPF Maritime Use Cases

The maritime use cases presented here depicts application of OSPFv2 as part of a deployed
network of routers that includes the SLM-5650A Network Processor (NP) Interface.
The primary objective of these use cases is to describe the process of automatically re-routing
traffic when alternative transmission links are available in a maritime environment. Specifically,
the satellite link should be used when at sea, and the high-speed terrestrial link should be used
when at shore. This switch should occur automatically.
If other communication links such as ship-to-ship or back-up lower-speed satellite networks are
available, then the OSPF routing protocol will select the best path as defined by link cost.
E.2.4.1 OSPF Use Case: At Shore

When at shore, as depicted in Figure E-2, the shipboard OSPF network automatically re-routes
packets destined to non-shipboard networks over the high-speed, low-cost network.
Figure E-2. OSPF Support at Shore
E3

Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.2.4.2 OSPF Use Case: At Sea

When at sea, all traffic is routed to the satellite network. If other communication links such as
ship-to-ship or backup lower-speed satellite networks are available, then the OSPF routing
protocol selects the best path as defined by link cost.
Figure E-3. OSPF Support at Sea
E4

Appendix E
E.2.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
OSPF Deployment Solution
E.2.5.1 OSPF Test Network

Figure E-4 depicts the test network created to demonstrate how OSPFv2 can be used in a largescale Vipersat deployment.
It has been determined that OSPF can be used with a Vipersat and shared outbound topology by
enabling a common router feature: IP Tunneling.
Figure E-4. OSPF Laboratory Test Network
E5

Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.2.5.2 OSPF Test Solution

Multi-TDM Tunneling is a technique where a VLAN tunnel is set up between the Hub unit and
any expansion units that are being used to create an SCPC link with a Remote that is Home Stated
to the specified Hub Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM) Modem.
As shown in Figure E-5, if an IP tunnel is configured from each of the remote Autonomous
System Boundary Routers (ASBRs) to the OSPF routers at the hub, the two routers will attain
neighbor adjacency. All of the necessary OSPF messages will be exchanged to include the remote
shipboard network into the OSPF domain.
This configuration allows the network to automatically reconfigure to the lower-cost terrestrial
link when connected and automatically return to the higher-cost satellite link when the terrestrial
link is disconnected.
It is recommended that the hub OSPF router be a backbone router (area 0.0.0.0), and each of the
shipboard networks be a single OSPF area. This will reduce the amount of OSPF messaging
required to be transmitted over the satellite network.
Figure E-5. OSPF Test Solution
E6

Appendix E
E.2.6
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
OSPFv2 Summary
The proposed solution using router-configurable IP tunneling to connect the remotes to the hub
OSPF router satisfies the use case with minimal operator configuration.
While the addition of an IP tunnel will add overhead, the overall reduction in satellite bandwidth
using the dynamic shared bandwidth functionality of Vipersat will more than offset the added
overhead. Load switching, used in conjunction with OSPF, will allow the bandwidth to be
automatically returned to the pool once a lower-cost terrestrial link is connected.
Advantages
Disadvantages
Allows for automatic path selection via OSPF

in a split path configuration with minimal
impact to the network.
Because each ship is its own area, there will

be a reduced amount of OSPF traffic over the
satellite.
If the operator uses Vipersat load switching at

the remote (i.e. shipboard SLM-5650A NP),
then once the terrestrial link is connected, traffic
will be redirected to fiber link and the loadswitching algorithm will free the satellite link and
return it to STDMA operation. This will free up
significant satellite bandwidth automatically for
use by other ships still at sea.
Satellite link availability will still be available to

the participating OSPF routers because
periodic LSA and Hello packets will not be
received on the router interface in case of
satellite outage.
Reduces the number of OSPF nodes in the

network.
Allows for automatic path selection via OSPF

in a split path configuration with minimal
impact to the network.
E7
Because IP tunnels are set up from the

remote ASBR to the hub backbone router, an
additional 20-byte IP header will be added to
all packets traversing the satellite interface.
An IP tunnel will have to be configured for

each ship to the hub OSPF router.

Appendix E
E.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Network Processor (NP) Interface BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint)

Mode
Networks where modems traditionally act as routers e.g., Vipersat-based satellite
communications systems and include encryption devices are sometimes incompatible or require
difficult and unwieldy configurations. Additionally, the NP Interface is limited to 256 allowable
route tables. This, in turn, can limit the overall size of the network, particularly when OSPF
dynamic routing protocol is used in the NP Interface.
In order to increase the flexibility and scalability of the satellite network with SLM-5650A
Satellite Modems, BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode, an optional FAST feature, has been
introduced in the NP Interfaces FW-0000051L Ver. 1.9.1 firmware release.
When BPM Mode is selected, Layer 2 and Layer 3 networks can operate simultaneously i.e.,
the users can operate two independent Layer2 networks and one Layer3 network without
interfering with each other.
E.3.1
BPM Mode Functional Description
Figure E-6. Ethernet Port Configuration in BPM Mode

The NP Interface features four Ethernet ports: P1 through P4. When BPM Mode is enabled, the
SLM-5650A Base Modem J5 Ethernet management port effectively becomes the NP Interfaces
fifth Ethernet port. All five Ethernet ports are then segregated into three Ethernet switches.
As shown in Figure E-6:
NP Ethernet ports P1 and P2, with internal Data WAN Port A forms the red switch
group referred to as Bridge-Group1. This group is reserved for bridged Layer 2 traffic
only.
NP Ethernet ports P3 and P4, with internal Management WAN Port B forms the blue
switch group referred to as Bridge-Group2. This group is reserved for bridged Layer 2
traffic only.
The SLM-5650A Base Modem J5 Ethernet port, with internal VS WAN Port C forms
the green switch group referred to as Router-Group. This set is reserved for routed
Layer 3 traffic and management use only.
E8

Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
All three switch groups are isolated such that:
Traffic from NP Interface Port P1 can only transmit to the Data WAN Port A or NP
Interface port P2. It will NOT transmit to the NP Interface ports P3 or P4, the Base
Modem J5 Ethernet port, Management WAN Port B, or VS WAN Port C.
The traffic from NP Interface Port P3 can transmit to the Management WAN Port B or
NP Interface Port P4. It will NOT transmit to the NP Interface ports P1 or P2, the Base
Modem J5 Ethernet Port, Data WAN Port A, or VS WAN Port C.
The traffic from the Base Modem J5 Ethernet Port can transmit to VS WAN Port C. It
will NOT transmit to NP Interface Ports P1 through P4, Data WAN Port A, or
Management Port B.
Note the following definitions:
Primary Port: This is the port that can transmit the traffic those ingresses from any port
within its group.
Examples:
NP Interface Port P1 can transmit the traffic coming from Data WAN Port A or
NP Interface Port P2.
NP Interface Port P3 can transmit the traffic coming from Management WAN
port B or NP Interface Port P4.
The Base Modem J5 Ethernet port can transmit the traffic coming from VS WAN
port C.
Expansion Port: This is the port that can transmit the traffic that ingress from its primary
port within that group.
Examples:
NP Interface Port P2 can transmit the traffic coming from NP Interface Port P1
only.
NP Interface Port P4 can transmit the traffic coming from NP Interface Port P3
only.
WAN Port: This is a logical port that transmits the packet only to the primary ports, but
it can receive the packets from either the primary port or the expansion port.
Examples:
Data WAN port A Bridge-Group1.
Management WAN port B in Bridge-Group2.
VS WAN port C in Router-Group.
E9

Appendix E
E.3.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BPM Mode Configuration

BPM Mode is available on the NP Interface as an optional FAST Feature. Once the FAST
Feature Code has been purchased during normal business hours from Comtech EF Data Customer
Support, it is then activated in the NP Interface-equipped modem via the modem front panel.
Once activated, BPM Mode must then be enabled for operation.
See Chapter Sect. 1.3.3.6 Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), Chapter
Sect. 5.3.7.10 Utility: FAST or Chapter Sect. 8.6.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for
more information about FAST Features.
BPM Mode may be enabled for operation via

either the SLM-5650A front panel menu
(CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig
Option Card Addr Network Proc), or the
NP Interface HTTP/HTTPS Interface Admin
| Vipersat Modes page.
See Chapter Sect. 5.3.3.9
CONFIG: Remote or Chapter
Sect. 8.6.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat
Mode (FAST Feature Required)
for further details.
E10

Appendix E
E.3.3
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BPM Mode in Hub Data Traffic Networks
Figure Legend
Equipment
Data Type
TDM Modem
STDMA Return Link
Hub LAN Data Switch
Forward Link
Hub router
Network Encryption
Other Devices
MAC Learning Disabled (Entire Switch)
Hub Demodulator Data Switch
SCPC Return #1
Demodulator #1
SCPC Return #2
Demodulator #2
SCPC Return #N
Demodulator #N
Figure E-7. Hub Data Traffic Network

In a point-to-multipoint system, at the hub a split-path topology is used and traffic in the Forward
Link and Return Link directions may be processed by different SLM-5650A modems.
Figure E-7 shows a typical Hub Data Traffic Network for one Layer 2 Network (P1/P2/A
shown in red). The other two networks (P3/P4/B shown in blue and P5/C shown in green) can
be used in a similar fashion.
Note that the Hub Demodulators used in this configuration are SLM-5650A modems configured
for operation with the optional Demodulator only FAST Feature enabled.
E11

Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
In the Forward Link direction, all traffic is transmitted by the Hub Time-Division Multiplexing
(TDM) Modem. Packets received from the Hub Data Network are received by the Hub TDM
Modem on a Data LAN Port (P1) and forward to the Data WAN.
The packets received by Return Link channels can come into the Hub in one of two ways:
1. They are processed by the Hub TDM Modem for Self-Organizing Time Division
Multiple Access (STDMA) channels.
2. Hub Demodulators are used for Single Channel per Carrier (SCPC) channels.
In Figure E-7, the external hub switch supporting data traffic is shown as two separate switches:
the Hub LAN Data Switch, and the Hub Demodulator Data Switch. It is important to note that this
is a functional concept only the physical implementation of this switch can be accomplished in
one of three ways:
1. Two separate switches, as illustrated in Figure E-7.
2. One physical switch, partitioned into two logical switches using port isolation. Many
commercially available managed switches have this capability.
3. A data-path router directly connected to the Hub TDM Modems P1 port, with the
functionality of the Hub Demodulator Data Switch implemented by means of daisychaining the Hub Demodulator units Data LAN ports (i.e., connecting the P1 port of one
Hub Demodulator to the P2 port of the next Hub Demodulator).
This third method has the advantage of reducing the required Hub equipment. However,
it has the disadvantage of adding between 5 sec and 0.01 ms of delay per Hub
Demodulator unit traversed, depending on packet size (64 1500 bytes @ 1000 Mbps
GigE negotiation between Hub Demodulators and the Hub TDM Modem).
Note also that for return link packets arriving via SCPC channels, care must be taken to avoid
potential issues associated with the split path topology inherent in the point-to-multipoint system
architecture. In order to forward the packets received from the Hub Demodulator to the Hub
expansion port P2, MAC learning on the HUB demodulators switch should be disabled, as
indicated by Data Type D in Figure E-7.
E12

Appendix E
E.3.4
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Dynamic Hub Demodulators in a Multiple TDM Hubs Configuration

In BPM Mode, multiple Hub TDM Modem configuration is supported along with dynamic
assignment of Hub Demodulators.
In a dynamic Hub Demodulator assignment, the Hub Demodulator can be assigned to any Hub
TDM Modem. Packet transmission should therefore be forwarded from the Hub Demodulator to
the corresponding Hub TDM Modem. In order to accommodate this, a separate VLAN packet
tagging is used.
Packets transmitted from the Hub Demodulator will be tagged with configured VLAN (or doubletagged if the packet already has a VLAN) and then sent to all designated Hub TDM Modems. The
corresponding Hub TDM Modem(s) will receive and process these packets, while noncorresponding Hub TDM Modems will ignore them.
With this configuration, as shown in Figure E-8, the Hub TDM Modem is set to Vipersat Hub
per the Admin | Vipersat Mode Web page (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.5.2.1) and configured for
Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode per the LAN | Interface Web page (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.5.4.1).
This VLAN communication is configurable as Automatic. When Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode is
configured as Manual, then a unique VLAN ID has to be entered.
Admin | Vipersat Modes page
LAN | Interface page

Hub TDM Modem Config
Figure E-8. Hub VLAN Configuration HTTP/HTTPS Interface Pages
E13

Appendix E
E.3.5
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Remote Data Traffic Handling
Figure Legend
Equipment
Data Type
Remote Modem
Tx / Rx Data Link from Hub
Remote LAN Data Switches
Network Encryption
Remote Router
Other Devices
Figure E-9. Remote (Spoke) Data Traffic Network

In BPM Mode, the remote role is the same for either point-to-point or point-to-multipoint
topologies. No special configuration is required for remote operation.
As shown in Figure E-9:
NP Ethernet ports P1 and P2, with internal Data WAN Port A forms the red switch
group referred to as Bridge-Group1;
NP Ethernet ports P3 and P4, with internal Management WAN Port B forms the blue
switch group referred to as Bridge-Group2;
The SLM-5650A Base Modem J5 Ethernet port, with internal VS WAN Port C forms
the green switch group referred to as Router-Group.
The following rules are observed with this configuration:
NP Interface ports P1, P3, and Base Modem Ethernet Port J5 are the primary ports.
NP Interface ports P2 and P4 are the secondary ports.
Note that, while the remote LAN switches shown in Figure E-9 are included to illustrate how
third party Layer2 switches can be used, their use is not mandatory.
E14
2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA

480 333 2200 PHONE
480 333 2161 FAX

Manual de Operare-Instalare - Modem SLM5650a

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual de Operare-Instalare - Modem SLM5650a

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SLM-5650A

THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! PLM CO C-0027953

THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! PLM CO C-0027953

THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! PLM CO C-0027953

THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! PLM CO C-0027953

Router Ethernet Interface Traffic IP Address and Range command, corrected

This document is not subject to revision/update!

This document is not subject to revision/update!

Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 12

CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 21

Unpacking and Inspection ................................................................................................................... 21

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

Connect External Cables...................................................................................................................... 27

CHAPTER 3. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS A ND PINOUTS .................................................. 31

CHAPTER 4. UPDATING FIRMWARE ........................................................................................ 41

Updating Firmware via Internet .......................................................................................................... 41

About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Archive Formats ............................................................ 41

Bulk Firmware Update Ethernet FTP Upload Procedure .......................................................................... 43

Network Processor (NP) Interface Module Update Procedure ............................................................. 45

TRANSEC Module Update Procedure ................................................................................................. 410

CHAPTER 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION ................................................................................ 51

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

Navigating the Menu Screens .................................................................................................................. 57

CHAPTER 6. ETHERNET-BASED MANAGEMENT .................................................................. 61

HTTP/HTTPS (Web Server) Interfaces .................................................................................................. 64

SSH (Secure Shell) Interface .............................................................................................................. 610

CHAPTER 7. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE ...................................................................... 71

CHAPTER 8. NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE ..................................................... 81

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode ............................................................................................. 85

CHAPTER 9. NP INTERFACE TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION ............................................. 91

CHAPTER 10. TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE .................................................... 101

TRANSEC Module Overview .............................................................................................................. 101

TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface .................................................................................................... 102

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

Admin (Administrative) pages ........................................................................................................... 106

CHAPTER 11. TRANSEC MODULE SSH CLI OPERATION .................................................. 111

CHAPTER 12. 10/100/1000 BASET (GBE) INTERFACE ................................................. 121

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 121

General Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 123

CHAPTER 13. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 INTERFACE ................................................................ 131

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 131

Summary of Specifications ................................................................................................................ 134

CHAPTER 14. LOW VOLTAGE DIFFERENTIAL (LVDS) INTERFACE ............................. 141

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 141

Physical Description .......................................................................................................................... 142

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

J1 Connector Pinout ....................................................................................................................... 143

General Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 144

CHAPTER 15. DOUBLETALK CARRIER-IN-CARRIER OPTION ....................................... 151

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 151

What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier? .............................................................................................. 151

DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications .................................................................................... 1520

Carrier-in-Carrier Summary ............................................................................................................. 1520

APPENDIX A. TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................... A1

Fault Isolation .................................................................................................................................... A9

System Faults/Alarms ...................................................................................................................... A10

LED Display and Description ............................................................................................................. A12

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

APPENDIX B. OPERATIONS REFERENCE ................................................................................ B1

APPENDIX C. REMOTE CONTROL .............................................................................................. C1

Basic Protocol ..................................................................................................................................... C2

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem